Binder1 PDF

ATB SCHORCH GmbH
01.12.2017
Documentation
EN
KU7840G-PL20
44 063 6 01
ITEM-No.
340-MK-01
Strom-Drehmoment / Drehzahl-Kennlinie
Current-torque / speed characteristic
S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=
6,0 2,4
ಮ
WU
D
E
LQ I/In
H G
U H
H H
U
U=Un
Y
J
UV D
H H
G LV
Q
Z 5,0 2,0
D
W
U
H
K K
LF W
Q
R
W
Q
U R
H Q
I
I L
R
V

I/In

U=0,9Un
4,0 1,6
1
1
( (
Q
L
Ð
Õ G
H
P L[
H I
J V
] H
Q F
M/Mn [1]
D Q
U
I/In [1]
D
U
OH
R OH 3,0 1,2
R
7
U
W
H H M/Mn
G WK

Q U=Un
H WR
J W
LH
F
H
N = 359 1/min
UO M
H
W
E
X
tH = 7,16s
Q V

X

G UH
D
Q
X

G
2,0 0,8
Q Q
D
WH
V
D H
'
OX
H
W D
H Y
M/Mn
Q G
K H
W U=0,9Un
F
H
U OD
H X
OF
N = 359 1/min
E D 1,0 0,4
G
Q F tH = 10s
L H
V U
W D
W
Q
H Q
P H
X P
N X
R F
' R

G
P V
L
H K
Mg/Mn
V W
H
L
0,0 0,0
LQ
G
Q
L OV
L 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1
Q WD
H
WH N/N0 [1]
D G
O
'
D
Q LF
Q
7UÕJKHLWVPRPHQW-0RWRU NJP-)UHPG NJP
H
K K
F F
V H
,QHUWLD - 0RWRU NJP - H[W NJP
L W
Q H
K K
F
7
WH

H
L
'
ರ
$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

'DWXP'DWH Typ ATB SCHORCH Auftrags-Nr.:
.8*3/
5HY5HY Product code ATB Schorch ref. No.
1DPH1DPH )ULW] 'RN1U'RF1R BB 6HLWH3DJH
Thermische Widerstandskennlinie
Thermal withstand characteristic/ thermal limit curve
10000
1000
t [s]
100
10
1
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
I/In [%]
laufende Maschine aus warmen Zustand running machine from warm condition
laufende Maschine aus kaltem Zustand running machine from cold condition
blockierter Rotor aus warmen Zustand locked rotor from warm condition
blockierter Rotor aus kaltem Zustand locked rotor from cold condition

.8*3/
Teillastkurve
Partial load characteristic
ಮ
WU
D
1,6 1,6
E
LQ
H G
U H
H H
U
Y
J
UV D
H
G
H cos ϕ
LV
Q
Z 1,4 1,4
D
W
U
H
K K
LF W
Q
R
W
Q
U R
H Q
I
I L
R
V

1,2 1,2

1
1
( (
Q
L
Ð
Õ G
P
H
L[
1,0 1,0
H I I/In
J V
] H
Q F
D Q
U D
OH U
cos ϕ I/In
R OH
η s/sn
R
7
U
W
H H
WK
0,8 0,8
G
Q
H WR
J W
F
LH H
UO M
H E
W X
Q V

X

UH
G
Q D

0,6 0,6
X G
Q Q
D
WH
V η
D H
'
OX
H
W D
H Y

Q G
K
F
H
W 0,4 0,4
H
U OD
H X
OF
E D
G
Q F
L H
V U
W D
W
Q
H Q
P H 0,2 0,2
X P
N X
R F
' R

G
P V
L
H K
V
H
W s/sn
L LQ
G
Q
L OV
L 0,0 0,0
Q WD
WH
H 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2
D G
O
'
D
Q LF P/Pn
H Q
K K
F F
V
L H
W
Q
K H
K
6WDQGDUGV(1(16WDQGDUGV(1(1
F
7
WH

H
L
'
ರ

.8*3/
Strom-Drehzahl / Zeit-Kennlinie
Current-speed / -time characteristic
ಮ
WU
D
1,2 6,0
E
LQ
H G
U H
H H
U
Y
J
UV D n/n0
H H
G LV U=Un
Q
Z
D
W
U tH = 7,2s
H
K K
LF W 1,0 5,0
Q
R
W
Q
U R
H Q
I
I L
R
V

1
1
( ( 0,8 4,0
Q
L
Ð
Õ G
H n/n0
P L[
H I
J V U=0,9Un
] H
Q F tH = 10s
D Q
U D
OH U
R OH
R
7 W
n/n0
I/In
H H 0,6 3,0
G WK

Q
H WR
J W
F
LH H
UO M
H E
W X
Q V

X

G UH
Q D

X G
Q Q
WH
D
0,4 2,0 I/In
D V
'
H U=Un
OX
H
W D
H Y

Q G
K H
W
F
H
U OD
H X
OF
E D
G
Q F
L H
V U
D
0,2 1,0
W W
Q
H Q
P H
X P
N X
R F
' R

G
P V
L
H K
I/In
V W
H
L U=0,9Un
LQ
G
0,0 0,0
Q
L OV
L
Q WD
WH
H 0 2,2 4,4 6,6 8,8 11
D G
O
' D

Q LF t / [s]
H Q
K K
F F
V
L H
W
Q H
K K
F
7
WH

H
L
'
ರ

.8*3/
Strom-Drehzahl / Zeit-Kennlinie
Current-speed / -time characteristic
ಮ
WU
D
1,4 7,0
E
LQ
H G
U H
H H
U
Y
J
UV D n/n0
H H
G LV U=Un
Q
Z
D
W
U
1,2 6,0 tH = 7,2s
H
K K
LF W
Q
R
W
Q
U R
H Q
I
I L
R
V

1,0 5,0

1
1
( (
Q
L
Ð
Õ G
H n/n0
P L[
H I
J V U=0,8Un
] H
Q
D
F
Q
0,8 4,0 tH = 15,7s
U D
OH U
R OH
R
7 W
n/n0
I/In
U
H H
G WK

Q
H WR
J W
F
LH H
UO M
E
0,6 3,0
H
W X
Q V

X

G UH
Q D

X G
Q Q
D I/In
WH
V
D H U=Un
'
OX
H
W D 0,4 2,0
H Y

Q G
K H
W
F
H
U OD
H X
OF
E D
G
Q F
L H
V U
W D
Q W 0,2 1,0
H Q
P H
X P
N X
R F
' R

G
P V
L
H K
I/In
V W
H
L U=0,8Un
LQ
G 0,0 0,0
Q
L OV
L
Q WD 0 3,4 6,8 10,2 13,6 17
H
WH
D G
O
'
D
LF
t / [s]
Q
H Q
K K
F F
V
L H
W
Q H
K K
F
7
WH

H
L
'
ರ

.8*3/
Instationäre Luftspaltmomentenberechnung
Dynamic Air Gap Torques Calculation
ಮ
WU
D
E
LQ
H G
U H Die Gleichung für das Motormoment ist in differentieller Form nichtlinear über den Drehwinkel bzw. die
H H
U
Y
J Drehwinkelbeschleunigung mit dem Antriebssystem verknüpft. Der dynamische Momentenverlauf ist daher
UV D
H H
G LV
exakt nur numerisch lösbar und abhängig von der Drehfedersteife und dem Massenträgheitsmoment des
Q
Z gesamten Wellenstranges.
D
W
U
H
K K
LF W Für das Luftspaltmoment im Motor lassen sich näherungsweise die folgenden Funktionsverläufe angeben:
Q
R
W
Q
U R
H Q
I
I L
R
V

1
1
( (
Q
L
Ð
Õ G
H
P L[
H I
The motor torque equation is linked in differential form non-linearly with the drive system via the angle of rotation or the
J V
] H acceleration of the angle of rotation. Therefore the dynamic torque characteristic can be exactly solved only numerically and as a
Q F
D
U
Q
D
function of the torsional stiffness and all mass moments of inertia of the entire shaft assembly (complete string).
OH U
R OH In approximation, the following equations can be given for the motor air gap torque:
R
7
U
W
H H
G WK

Q
H WR
J W
F
LH H
UO M
H E
W X
Q
X

V
Anlauf aus dem Stillstand
G UH
Q D
Start from standstill
X G
Q
WH
Q
D

−t m1
D
'

V
H
OX
m (t ) = m1 e T1
sin ω t T1 ms
H
W
H
Q
D
Y

G
0SHDN N1P
K H
F
H
W
OD
2-poliger Klemmenkurzschluß
U X
H 2-pole short-circuit
OF
E D
G
F
Q
L
V
H
U  − Tt t
1 −T2′  m2
m(t ) = m2 ⋅ e ⋅ sin ω t − ⋅ e ⋅ sin 2ω t 
 ms
W D
W
Q
H Q
2 T2
P
X
H
P  2  T2' ms
N
R
'

X
F
R
  0SHDN N1P
G
P V
L
H K
V W
H
L 3-poliger Klemmenkurzschluß
LQ
G
Q OV
L
L 3-pole short-circuit
Q WD
WH
D
H
G
O
−
t
m3
'

Q
D
LF
m(t ) = m3 ⋅ e T3 ⋅ sinω t T3 ms
0SHDN N1P
H Q
K K
F F
V
L H
W
Q
K H
K
Netzumschaltung mit 100% Restspannung / Phasenopposition
F
7
WH

Re-connection at 100% residual voltage at phase oppostion
H
L
'
ರ −
t
m4
m(t ) = m4 ⋅ e T4
⋅ sin ω t T4 ms
0SHDN N1P
Mi = mi * Mn ( i=1,2,3,4)
Mn Nm
.8*3/
Festbremszeit und Zeitkonstante
Locked Rotor Time and Time Constant
Festbremszeit warm s
13
Locked rotor time warm s
Festbremszeit kalt s
18
Locked rotor time cold s
Unterspannung % Un
80
Undervoltage % Ur
Festbremszeit warm bei Unterspannung s

20
Locked rotor time warm at undervoltage s
Festbremszeit kalt bei Unterspannung s

28
Locked rotor time cold at undervoltage s
Thermische Erwärmungszeitkonstante (Maschine) bei Nenndrehzahl min

45
Thermal heating time constant (machine) at rated speed min
Thermische Erwärmungszeitkonstante (Wicklung) bei Nenndrehzahl min

6
Thermal heating time constant (winding) at rated speed min
Thermische Abkühlzeitkonstante (Stillstand) min

330
Thermal cooling time constant (standstill) min

.8*3/
Datenblatt Motor
Data Sheet Motor
Drehstrom - Asynchronmotor mit Käfigläufer

Three phase induction motor with squirrel cage rotor
Anzahl / Quantity :1 ITEM-No.:340-MK-01
Typ / Product code : KU7840G-PL20
Elektrische Daten / Electrical data Allgemeine Daten / General Data

Bemessungsleistung Maßzeichnung
( kW ): 2300 : 8240473
Rated output Outline drawing
Betriebsart Bauform
: S1 : IMB3
Duty Type of construction
Bemessungsspannung Schutzart
( V ): 13200 : IP55
Rated voltage Degree of protection
Spannungstoleranz Gewicht cirka 32,2
: ±10% ( t ):
Voltage tolerance Weight approx. 32,2
Schaltung Einschaltart direkt
: Y :
Connection Starting d.o.l.
Bemessungsstrom Aufstellungshöhe
( A ): 144 ( m ): ≤1000
Rated current Altitude (above sea level)
Frequenz Kühlart
( Hz ): 60 : IC81W
Frequency Cooling
Frequenztoleranz Drehrichtung links ( auf DE gesehen )
: ±2% :
Frequency tolerance Direction of rotation ccw ( viewed from DE to NDE )
Bemessungsdrehzahl ( min-1 ): Schalldruckpegel
358 LpfA ( dB ): 80 +3
Rated speed ( rpm ): Sound pressure level
Last / Load 100% Laufgüte
: VDI2056 G
Wirkungsgrad Balance quality
( % ): 96
Efficiency Läuferauswuchtung ohne Passfeder
:
Leistungsfaktor Rotor balancing without key
: 0,73
Power factor Umgebungstemperatur im Betrieb
: -20 oC ≤ Tamb ≤ +50 oC
Anzugsstrom Ambient temperature in operation
( % FLC ): 500
Locked rotor current Standards
: EN60034, IEC60034
Anzugsmoment Standards
( % FLT ): 55
Locked rotor torque Kühlmedium / Cooling medium
Kippmoment Kühlmittel Wasser
( % FLT ): 190 :
Breakdown torque Coolant water
Thermische Klasse / Kühlmittelmenge 3
( m /h ): 14,8
Ausnutzung nach thermischer Klasse Amount of coolant
: 155/130; (F/B)
Thermal class / Kühlmitteltemperatur
: ≤39 oC
Exploitation depending on thermal class Coolant temperature
Zündschutz / Protection Statischer Druckabfall
( bar ): 0,8
Ex-Schutz Static pressure drop
II 2G Ex pxe II T3
Explosion protection Betriebsdruck
( bar ): 9,5
Baumusterprüfbescheinigung Operating pressure
: TÜV 07 ATEX 553989
Prototype test certificate Beschilderung / Labeling
Zertifizierungsstelle Sprache englisch
: 0102 :
Certifying body Language English
Anstrich / Paint Lagerung DE / NDE / Bearing DE / NDE
Anstrichsystem K2-Anstrich Lager Gleitlager
: :
Paint finish Paint systems "K2" Bearings sleeve bearing
Farbton Lagerungsart Loslager DE
: RAL5012 :
Shade Type of bearing Floating bearing DE
Isolation Lager DE + NDE
:
Insulation Bearings DE + NDE
Schmiermittel Öl
:
Lubricant Oil
ISO VG68
Lagerung DE / Bearing DE
Lager DE
: EFEZLB-22-280 INSUL.
Bearing DE
1. Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 2000
First oil change after
Weitere Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 8000
Further oil changes after
Erforderliche Ölmenge pro Lager
( l ): 23
Oil quantity per bearing
E20161014A20170622N10
„Die technischen Daten in diesem Dokument sind berechnete Daten und unterliegen der Toleranz gemäß EN60034-1, sofern nicht anders vereinbart.“
"The technical details in this document are calculated values and are subject to the tolerances fixed in EN 60034-1, if not otherwise agreed."
Abt. / Dept. PS D
Datum / Date 22.06.2017 Typ ATB Schorch Auftrags-Nr.
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Rev. / Rev. 04 Product code ATB Schorch ref. No.
Name / Name A. Heidt Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No. 44063601_001_2001011020 Seite / Page 1 / 2
Datenblatt Motor
Data Sheet Motor

Anzahl / Quantity :1
Lagerung NDE / Bearing NDE

Lager NDE
: EFKZLB-22-280 INSUL.
Bearing NDE
1. Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 2000
weitere Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 8000
( l ): 23
Hauptanschlusskasten / Main Terminal Box
Anschlusskastenlage links
:
Position of terminal box left
Kabeleinführung Gewinde / thread
:
Cable entries 1x NPT 3"
Überwachungseinrichtungen / Monitoring devices
Wicklung PT100 9; 3 Leiter
:
Winding PT100 9; 3 wires
Warnung
130 oC
Warning
Abschaltung
140 oC
Tripping
Lager DE + NDE 2x (2 PT100; 3 Leiter)
Bearings DE + NDE 2x (2 PT100; 3 wires)
Warnung
95 oC
Warning
Abschaltung
100 oC
Tripping
Zubehör / Accessories
Stillstandsheizung
: 460V; 4800W; 6,03A
Space heater
Abt. / Dept. PS D
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Instrumentenliste
List of auxiliary equipment
Stillstandsheizung
2x 2400 W = 4800 W 460 V 3Ph.
Space heater
Lagerwiderstandsthermometer 2x PT100, EEx i (3-Leiter), 2x auf AS und 2x auf GS

Bearing resistance thermometer 2x PT100, EEx i (3-wire type), 2x at DE and 2x at NDE
Widerstandsthermometer in der Wicklung 9x PT100, EEx i (3-Leiter)

Resistance thermometer in stator winding 9x PT100, EEx i (3-wire-type)
Widerstandsthermometer Luft PT100 EEx i (3-Leiter), 2x Kaltluft und 1x Warmluft

Resistance thermometer air PT100 EEx i (3-wire type), 2x cold air and 1x hot air
Schwingungsaufnehmer 2x für Wellenschwingung, 1x AS und 1x GS

Vibration probes 2x for shaft vibration, 1x DE and 1x NDE
Keyphasor 1x auf GS
Keyphasor 1x at NDE
Spüllufteinrichtung Expo-Technologies, Typ D758

Purge system Expo-Technologies, type D758
Leckagewächter Endress & Hauser, Liquiphant M FTL50, EEx d

Leakage detector Endress & Hauser, Liquiphant M FTL50, EEx d
Abt. / Dept. E41

Datum / Date 08.11.16 Typ SCHORCH Auftrags-Nr.
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Rev. / Rev. 00 Product code SCHORCH ref. no.
Name / Name Yasar Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601_001_2950200020 Seite / Page 1/1
Prüfablaufplan
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
Der Prüfablaufplan ist Eigentum von ATB SCHORCH GmbH. Die im Prüfablaufplan enthaltene Information ist als firmenvertraulich zu behandeln. Die Vervielfältigung von Teilen
oder des Gesamtumfangs ist nicht gestattet. ATB SCHORCH GmbH behält sich das Recht vor, jederzeit Änderungen vorzunehmen.
The Inspection and Test Plan is property of ATB SCHORCH GmbH. The information contained in the Inspection and Test Plan must be treated confidentially. Reproduction of parts or in full is not
allowed. ATB SCHORCH GmbH reserves the right to make modifications at any time.
Rev. / Ausgabe / Änderungen / Prüfung / Freigabe /
Revision Issue Alterations Checked Released
24.01.2017 Erstausgabe / First Issue Q32: Schütt * Q: Hinrichs * Aktivitäten Code / Activity code
00 1= ATB Schorch GmbH / ATB Schorch GmbH
2= Auftragnehmer / Contractor
3= Kunde / Client
01 4= Behörde / Inspektor / Authority / inspector
Anmerkungen / Remarks
02 W= Meldepunkt / Witness point
H= Haltepunkt / Hold point
R= Review / Review
03
Kundenkennung / Motor Nr. /
Item no. Motor No.
04 44063601 / 1
05
Genehmigungsvermerk durch Kunden / Datum / Abteilung / Name /

Statement by customer / client Date Department Name
genehmigt /
Accepted Unterschrift /
Signature
nicht genehmigt /
Not accepted
genehmigt, wenn entsprechende Anmerkungen im Prüfablaufplan berücksichtigt werden /

Accepted, subject comments noted being incorporated
* Dieser ITP wurde elektronisch erstellt und ist ohne Unterschrift gültig / * This ITP has been generated automatically and is valid without signature
Abt. / Dept. Q
Datum / Date 24.01.2017 Typ / ATB SCHORCH GmbH Auftrags-Nr. /
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Rev. / Rev. 00 Product code ATB SCHORCH GmbH ref. no.
Name / Name Hinrichs Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601_001_5001000020 Seite / Page 1/6
Prüfablaufplan - Wichtige Informationen
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) - Important Information
- Der Prüfablaufplan ist Eigentum von ATB SCHORCH GmbH. Die im Prüfablaufplan enthaltene Informationen sind vertraulich zu behandeln. Die Vervielfältigung von
Teilen oder des Gesamtumfangs ist nicht gestattet. ATB SCHORCH GmbH behält sich das Recht vor, Änderungen vorzunehmen.
The Inspection and Test Plan is property of ATB SCHORCH GmbH. The information contained in the Inspection and Test Plan must be treated confidentially. Reproduction of parts or
in full is not allowed. ATB SCHORCH GmbH reserves the right to make modifications.
- Der Prüfablaufplan (ITP) wurde maschinell erstellt. Bezeichnungen oder Wortwahl können nicht verändert werden. Im Bedarfsfall kann das Leerformular im Anhang
(Anhang 'A') genutzt werden, um eigene Informationen, Verweise oder Erläuterungen aufzunehmen.
The Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) has been generated automatically. Descriptions or word choice can not be modified. If nesceccary the blank form (appendix 'A') at the end of the ITP
can be used to insert own information or references or descriptions.
- Hinweis für Motoren mit sehr großen Leistungen bzw. Drehmomenten: Motoren, welche die Leistungen der Belastungsmaschinen überschreiten, werden nach DIN EN 60034-
29 : Verfahren der äquivalenten Belastung und Überlagerung – Indirekte Prüfung zur Ermittlung der Übertemperatur gemessen. Belastungskennlinie entsprechend nach EN
60034-2-1 Teil 8.2.2.4.2. Je nach Leistung wird der Prüfumfang (erforderlichen Belastungs- und Leerlaufprüfungen) festgelegt.
Notice: for motors with huge torques or high power: electrical motors that exceed the performance of our load machines can only be performed according to IEC 60034-29: Equivalent
loading and superposition techniques – Indirect testing to determine temperature rise. Load characteristics will be measured according to EN 60034-2-1 Part 8.2.2.4.2. The testing effort
depends on the power of the Motor (required tests will be performed at load and no-load).
- *Hinweis für Motoren mit einer von 50 Hz abweichenden Frequenz: Bei Motoren mit hohen Leistungen bzw. Drehmomenten einer von 50 Hz abweichenden Frequenz,
können bestimmte Messungen nur bei 50Hz durchgeführt werden. Falls nötig werden diese durch erweiterte Messungen ergänzt.
*Notice: for engines with deviating frequency of 50Hz: for motors with huge torques or high power and deviating frequency of 50Hz certain measurements can be only performed at
50Hz. If necessary, those are complemented by extended measurements.
Abt. / Dept. Q
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Prüfablaufplan
Arbeitsgang Beschreibung / Prüfverfahren / Dokumentation / Aktivitäten Code /
Operational description Specification for Documentation Activity code
Elektrische / thermische Prüfungen Verfahren / Annahmekriterium / Zuständigkeit /
1 2 3 4
Electrical / thermal tests Procedure Acceptance Criteria Responsible
1 Typenprüfung - Motor Nr.: 44063601 / 1
Type test - Performance test - motor no.:
1.1 Messung des Isolationswiderstandes - Wicklung EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
H
Measurement of insulation resistance - winding IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
1.2 Kalter Wicklungswiderstand EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Measurement of winding resistance at cold condition IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
1.3 Drehrichtungskontrolle EN 60034-1 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Checking of direction of rotation IEC 60034-1 Production order Test field Test certificate
1.4 Erwärmungsprüfung * EN 60034-29 Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Heat run test * IEC 60034-29 Production order Test field Test certificate
1.5 Warmer Wicklungswiderstand (Abkühlkurve) EN 60034-2 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Measurement of winding resistance at warm condition IEC 60034-2 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
1.6 Belastungskennlinien (Wirkungsgrad, Leistungsfaktor und Schlupf) * EN 60034-2-1, EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
Teil 8.2.2.4.2
H
Load characteristic (efficiency, power factor and slip) * IEC 60034-2-1, IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
part 8.2.2.4.2
1.7 Leerlaufkennlinie (warm, 6 Punkte) (Leerlaufstrom und Leerlaufverluste) EN 60034-2 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
H
No-load characteristic (warm, 6 points) (No-load current and losses) IEC 60034-2 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
1.8 Wellenspannung im Leerlauf * EN 60034 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Measurement of shaft voltage at no load * IEC 60034 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
1.9 Hochlaufkennlinien bei reduzierter Spannung aus dem Gegenlauf EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
H
Run-up characteristic at reduced voltage after reversing IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
Abt. / Dept. Q
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Prüfablaufplan
1 2 3 4
1 Typenprüfung - Motor Nr.: 44063601 / 1
Type test - Performance test - motor no.:
1.10 Kurzschlusskennlinie bei reduzierter Spannung (Kurzschlussstrom und EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
Anzugsmoment)
H
Short circuit / locked rotor characteristic at reduced voltage (starting current and IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
torque)
1.11 Hochspannungs- / Stehspannungsprüfung der Wicklung (zusätzlich EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
Stillstandsheizung falls vorhanden)
H
High-voltage test / withstand voltage test on winding (addition on space heater if IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
available)
1.12 Messung des Isolationswiderstandes - Wicklung (zusätzlich EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
Stillstandsheizung falls vorhanden)
H
Measurement of insulation resistance - winding (addition on space heater if IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
available)
1.13 Funktionskontrolle der Hilfseinrichtungen (soweit vorhanden & Prüfung EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
möglich)
H
Functional test of auxiliary devices (if available and measurement possible) IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
Abt. / Dept. Q
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Prüfablaufplan
1 2 3 4
2 Teil 5.2.4: Verfahren mit Verbindung von Prüfungen bei verminderter Spannung und vermindertem Strom 44063601
Part 5.2.4: Method combining tests at reduced voltage and reduced current
2.1 Erwärmungsmessung bei Ured., fn und Imax. (max. möglicher Strom) EN 60034-29 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
H
Heat run test at Ured., fn and Imax. (max. possible current) IEC 60034-29 Production order Test field Test certificate
2.2 Erwärmungsmessung bei Un, fn im Leerlauf EN 60034-29 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Heat run test at Un, fn at no load IEC 60034-29 Production order Test field Test certificate
2.3 Erwärmungsmessung bei Ured., fn im Leerlauf EN 60034-29 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

H
Heat run test at Ured., fn at no load IEC 60034-29 Production order Test field Test certificate
2.4 Belastungskennlinien bei fn und Ured. nach EN 60034-2-1, Teil 8.2.2.4.2 EN 60034-2-1, EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
Teil 8.2.2.4.2 /
H
Load characteristic at fn and Ured according to IEC 60034-2-1, part 8.2.2.4.2 IEC 60034-2-1, IEC 60034 Test field Test certificate
part 8.2.2.4.2
Abt. / Dept. Q
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Prüfablaufplan
1 2 3 4
3 Sonderprüfungen /
Special tests
3.1 Geräuschmessung (unter Belastung und im Leerlauf) (Type Test) EN 60034-9 / EN 60034-9 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /
H
Noise measurement (load dependency and at no load ) (type test) IEC 60034-9 IEC 60034-9 Test field Test certificate
Abt. / Dept. Q
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Prüfablaufplan - Kundenanhänge - Verknüpfungen
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) - Customers Attachments and Links
ITP Arbeitsgang Beschreibung - spezifische Kundenbeschreibung / Verknüpfungen zu Kunden Beschreibungen (Auszufüllen durch Kunden)
Pos. Operational description - customer specific descriptions / Links to customer descriptions (have to be completed by customer)
Abt. / Dept. Q
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Name / Name Hinrichs Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601_001_5001000020 Anhang / Appendix A
Herstellerprüfzertifikat
Manufacturer´s test certificate
M3
Maschinennr. Auftragnr.
3 ~ MOT KU7840G-PL20 44063601/ 1 44063601
machine no. job no.
Bemessungsgrößen rated value EDV 700
Baugröße Bauform Schutzart IP 55 Betriebsart S1
IMB3
frame size type of constr. degree of prot. duty
Kühlmitteltemp. 39 °C Wärmeklasse 155/130
PN 2300 kW n 358 min-1
coolant temperature thermal class
Drehrichtung links Kühlwasser 14.8 m3/h Θmax 39 °C
UN 13200 V Y fN 60 Hz
dir. of rotation ← cooling water
Gewicht TÜV 07 ATEX 553989
IN 144 A cos φ 0.73 32.2 t
weight II 2G Ex pxe IIC T3
Normen standards EN 60034 / IEC 60034 IA/IN te s
*Determination of temperature rise by graphical method acc. to 5.2.2.3 - IEC 60034-29 -2008 S- 67423
L- 26386
Prüfschein- Nr.
certificate no.
Messwerte measured values
Wicklungswiderstand bei Ständer Läufer
Θ 27.8°C 0.84720 Ω Ω
winding resistance at stator rotor
Kurzschluß bei und MA / MN =
UN fN I= 686 A P= 2468 kW 0.71
locked rotor at and LRT/FLT=
Leerlauf bei 13200 V und 60 Hz I= 65.76 A P= 44.40 kW
no load at and
Lastkennlinie P auf kW Pab η cos φ Schlupf
P/PN UN V fN I kW %
Hz A input output % slip
1.25 13200 60 176.8 2996 2875 95.973 0.741 0.489
load curve 1.00 13200 60 142.5 2391 2300 96.188 0.734 0.371
0.75 13200 60 114.1 1796 1725 96.036 0.689 0.264
0.50 13200 60 91.05 1208 1150 95.180 0.580 0.167
0.25 13200 60 73.25 625.4 575.0 91.945 0.373 0.080
*Erwärmung bei I/IN 1.00 Betriebsart bei der Prüfung S1 min % Dauer 4h 0 min
f 50.0 Hz duty during the test time
temperature rise at Kühlwasser m3/h Lager Kühlöl l/min
U 5500 V cooling water bearing cooling oil
Raum 25.8 °C Luft ein °C Kühlöl °C Nutenthermometer
Θ ambient Θ air in Θ bearing oil ∆Θ/Κ
slot detectors
Gehäuse 34.8 °C Luft aus K Kühlöl K 34.4
Θ frame ∆Θ air out ∆Θ bearing & cooling oil 31.3
Lager DE 47.6 °C Innenluft 28.1 °C Ständerwicklung * 30.8 K 32.1
Θ bearing DE Θ internal air ∆Θ stator winding 30.3
Lager NDE 48.5 °C Kühlwasser ein °C Rotorwicklung K 30.6
Θ bearing NDE Θ cooling water in ∆Θ rotor winding 32.2
Hochspannungsprüfung Stator stator V27400 1 min Luftspalt 2.80 mm
high voltage test Rotor rotor V 1 min air gap
Isolationswiderstand Stator stator 5000 V 33 °C >5000 MΩ
insulation resistance Rotor rotor V °C MΩ
Stillstandsheizung 3 ~ U = 460 V I = 6.03 A Lager DE bearing DE EFEZLB-22-280 INSUL.
space heater P = 4.800 kW Lager NDE bearing NDE EFKZLB-22-280 INSUL.
Polarization-Index Schwingstaerke/vibration severity
PI= 9.26 v (eff ) = 0.20 mm/s
Wellenschwingungen/Schaft vibration
Passfeder/key 0
DE [p-p] : 13µm / 11µm ____
NDE [p-p]: 17µm / 15µm LpfA = 66 dB
Wellenspannung/shaft voltage 0.068V~
Abt. / Dept. BS 2 Kundenkennung / Item no. / TAG-No.: 340-MK-01
KU7840G-PL20 44063601/ 1
Name / Name LOURAK Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601_001_ 5091030020 Seite / Page 1
Geräuschmessung
Noise measurement
3 ~ MOT KU7840G-PL20 44063601/ 1 44063601
machine no. job no.
Bemessungsgrößen rated value EDV
Baugröße Bauform Schutzart Betriebsart S1
IMB3 IP 55
Kühlmitteltemp. S - no. L - no.
PN 2300 kW n 358 min-1 39 °C 67423 26386
coolant temperature S - no. L - no.
Drehrichtung links Gleitlager x Kugellager
UN 13200 V Y fN 60 Hz
dir. of rotation ← Sleeve bearing Ball bearings
IN 144 A cos φ 0.73 Lüfter
Fan
Messwerte Measured values Meßpos. 1 AS.B3 Ausführung/pos.1 type of constr.B3
Meßpos. 1 Hauptanschlußkasten/pos.1 main terminal box
Messinstrument Measuring device V1 Ausführung type of constr.V1
Anmerkung: Für das Verfahren der Genauigkeitsklasse 3
Rion NL-32 x von DIN EN ISO 3746 werden nur die
Meßpunkte 1,2,3,4,9 benutzt; Pkt. 9 wenn erreichbar
B u K 2215 2236 2033 Note: For the survery method of DIN EN ISO 3746
positions 1,2,3,4,9 are used; position 9 if attainable
Ono Sokki CF - 350
Messabstand d = 1 m (no load)
Distance d = 0.15 m (load) LpfA no load 65 dB
Messfl.-Mass dB
Log area ratio Load dependence 1 dB(A)
Vorschrift EN 60034-9
Standard LpfA load 66 dB
___
Kundenforderung LpfA/dB tolerance 63 Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 16kHz
Customer requirements + Lp/dB
Leerlauf Störpegel Belastung Störpegel
65 LpA/dB LpA/dB LpA/dA
No load Background noise Load Background noise
entkuppelt gekuppelt Mittlere ges. Mittlere Masch. Oktavband Analyse Belastung Mittl. ges. Mittl. Masch. Oktavband Analyse
Lautstärke Lautstärke Lautstärke Lautstärke
uncoupled coupled Octava band analysis Load Octava band analysis
Average total Average mach. noise Average total Average mach.
Pos. noise Pos. Pos. noise noise Pos.
d=1m LpA/dB d=0.15m Hz Lp/dB Lp/dB Hz p/dB
L
1 68 70 63 64 1 71 63 70
2 65 70 125 66 2 71 125 70
3 64 70 250 63 3 71 250 67
4 66 71 500 60 4 70 500 61
LpA/dB LpfA/dB LpA/dB
5 65 65 1000 56 5 71 1000 60
6 2000 48 6 2000 54
7 4000 45 7 4000 48
8 8000 40 8 8000 41
9 64 70 16000 9 70 16000
65 70 linear 72 70 linear 81
Luftgeräusche Magnetgeräusche Lagergeräusche Luftstrom

Bearing noise Air current
Q= m3/min. M.P.
Air noise Magnetic noise
Bemerkungen
Remarks
Abt. / Dept. PB Kundenkennung / Item no. / TAG-No.: 340-MK-01
KU7840G-PL20 44063601/ 1
Name/Name Lourak Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601_001_5091251020 Seite / Page 1 / 1
Schwingungsmessung
Vibration measurement
3 ~ MOT KU7840G-PL20 44063601/ 1 44063601
machine no. job no.
Bemessungsgrößen rated value EDV
Baugröße Bauform IMB3 Schutzart IP 55 Betriebsart S1
Kühlmitteltemp. S - no. L - no.
PN 2300 kW n 358 min-1 39°C 67423 26386
coolant temperature S - no. L - no.
Drehrichtung links Gleitlager Kugellager
UN 13200 V Y fN 60 Hz
dir. of rotation ← Sleeve bearing Ball bearings
IN 144 A cos φ 0.73 Lüfter F1
Fan
Vorschrift Standard EN 600034-14 / IEC 60034-14
Messwerte Measured values
Schwinggröße 6
Vibration magnitude 2 5 5
∧ •
a= : 3 6 4
veff in mm/s X
• •
∧ 1 4 3 1
s in µm 2
•
∧
b in m/s²
X horizontal vertical
Messpunkt Masch. Nr. Masch. Nr. Masch. Nr. Masch. Nr. Masch. Nr.
Pos. Machine No. Machine No. Machine No. Machine No. Machine No.
a∑ af a2f a∑ af a2f a∑ af a2f a∑ af a2f a∑ af a2f
1 0.1
2 0.1
3 0.1
4 0.1
5 0.1
6 0.1
8
Messinstrument
KSH 5 x Vibroport Vibrotest Ordalys SPM A30
Measuring device
Maschinenaufstellung freie Aufhängung Passfeder 1/1 Kupplung DE:
Machine mounting Free suspension Key Coupling NDE:
starre Aufstellung 1/2
Rigid mounting
x 0 ...n/a x
Vorschrift Kundenforderung
Specification Customer requirements
Beurteilung nach Schwingstärkestufe x
EN 60034-14 A 2.3 mm / s (max.)
Classification to Vibration grade
IEC 60034-14 B 1.5 mm / s (max.)
Bemerkungen
Remarks
Abt. / Dept. PB Kundenkennung / Item no. / TAG-No.:

KU7840G-PL20 44063601/ 1
Name/Name Lourak Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601 _001_5091301020 Seite / Page 1 / 1
Verlustfaktor (Wicklung)
Loss tangent test (Winding)
Typ / P roduct code KU7840GPL20
Maschinen-Nr. / Motor no. 1
Bemessungsleistung (kW): 2300 Wicklungstemperatur (°C): 22

Rated output Winding temperatur
Bemessungsspannung (kV): 13,2 Raumtemperatur (°C): 22

Rated voltage Ambient temperature
Bemessungsstrom (A): 144,0 Blechpaket / Laminated core

Rated current Geerdet :
Earthed
Frequenz (Hz): 60 Erdfrei :X
Frequency Not earthed
-1
Bemessungsdrehzahl (min ): 358 Wärmeklasse :F
Rated motor speed Thermal class
Prüfspannung / Wicklung Prüfspannung / Pt100 (kV): 1,5

Test voltage / Winding (kV): 28,7 Test voltage / Pt100
U / UN
20 40 60 80 100 120
[%]
Spannungsstufen
Voltage steps
UN
2,8 5,5 8,3 11,1 13,8 D tan dmax
[kV]
Stränge tan d ( ‰) 13,12 21,80 29,26 34,33 38,58

Phases 8,7
UVW II Cx / μF 0,345 0,348 0,353 0,356 0,360
Strang tan d ( ‰) 11,84 19,20 25,33 29,69 33,57

Phase 7,4
U1 - U2 Cx / μF 0,118 0,119 0,120 0,122 0,123
Strang tan d ( ‰) 11,92 19,16 25,42 29,86 33,65

Phase 7,2
V1 - V2 Cx / μF 0,118 0,119 0,121 0,122 0,123
Strang tan d ( ‰) 11,71 19,08 25,20 29,77 33,68

Phase 7,4
W1 - W2 Cx / μF 0,118 0,119 0,121 0,122 0,123
Andere Stränge sind mit dem Blechpaket verbunden.

Not tested phases connected to the laminated core.
Dieses Dokument wurde elektronisch erstellt und ist daher ohne Unterschrift gültig.
This document is computer generated and therefore requires no signature.
Abt. / Dept. P16 Kundenkennung / Item no.:

KU7840GPL20 440636 01
Name / Name Tekgül Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 440636 01_001_5151700020 Seite / Page 1 / 1
Teilentladungsmessung (Ständerwicklung)
Partial discharge measurement (Stator winding)
Typ / Product code KU7840GPL20
Maschinen-Nr. / Motor no. 1
Bemessungsspannung (kV): 13,2 Wicklungstemperatur (°C): 21

Rated voltage Winding temperatur
Bemessungsleistung (kW): 2300 Raumtemperatur (°C): 21

Rated output Ambient temperature
Bemessungsdrehzahl (min-1): 358 Wärmeklasse : F

Rated motor speed Thermal class
Isolationswiderstand (Vdc): 5000 Blechpaket

Insulation resistance (MW): >5000 Laminated core
Geerdet / Earthed : X
Prüfbeschreibung: Erdfrei / Not earthed :
Test description:
Die Messungen an Wicklungen mit offener Schaltung, werden entsprechend Tabelle 1 durchgeführt. Tabelle 2 gilt für
Messungen bei geschalteten Wicklungen (Y,D). Das komplette Messsystem wird durch 10 nC Impulse kalibriert. Die
Testresultate werden in Form von Teilentladungsmuster und Impulshöhenverteilung angezeigt.
Measurements of windings with open connection, are accomplished according to table 1. Table 2 shows the measuring circuit for windings in
Y or D connection. The complete measuring system was previously calibrated with 10 nC impulses. The test results are displayed in the form
of partial discharge patterns and pulse height distribution.
Tabelle 1 - Anschlussvariante für offenen Sternpunkt Tabelle 2 - Anschlussvariante für Wicklungen in Y oder D
Table 1 - Connection diagram for open star point Table 2 - measuring circuit for windings in Y or D connection
Name HS Erdung Ck Name HS Erdung Ck
Name HV Ground Ck Name HV Ground Ck
UVW U2,V2,W2 - U1,V1,W1 UVW U,V,W - U,V,W
U-VW U2 V1, W1 U1 U V - U
V-UW V2 U1, W1 V1 V W - V
W-UV W2 U1, V1 W1 W U - W
Prüfaufbau:
Test setup
Ck Koppelkondensator / Coupling capacitor
CD Koppeleinheit / Coupling device
Ca Prüfling / Test object
Ca MI Messgerät / Measuring instrument
Ck = 1,031 nF
HS Hochspannung / High voltage
CD MI
Messgeräte
Test equipment
Teilentladungsmessgerät DELTAMAXX 15-PD / Nr.19174640 (Kalibrierdatum / Calibrations date : 20.05.2015)

Partial discharge measuring instrument
Software Digital Loss and Partial Discharge Analyzer 50/60 Hz - V 3.0.3
Software
Kalibrationsgenerator LDC-5/S2, PDCAL-20 (Kalibrierdatum / Calibrations date : 04.2016, 10.2013)
Calibration pulse generator
TE Frequenzbereich (gemäß IEC 60270) 40-800kHz
Frequency range
Unterschrift / Signature
Abt. / Dept. E33 Kundenkennung / Item no.:

KU7840GPL20 440636 01
Name / Name Volkanov Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 440636 01_001_5181713020 Seite / Page 1 / 5
Ergebnisse der Teilentladungsmessung (Teilentladungsmuster)
Results of the partial discharge measurement (Partial discharge pattern)
1
U-VW
Voltage (kV) Qm (nC) Qapp (nC) Frequ.(Hz) LLD (%) Num Gain HW Gain Acq time (s)
13,00 17,20 28,00 50,00 2 1 1 10
V-UW
13,10 14,80 19,60 50,00 2 1 1 10
W-UV
LDC-5/S2 (Kalibrierdatum / Calibrations date : 03.2014)
13,10 26,50 30,00 49,99 2 1 1 10

KU7840GPL20 440636 01
Rev. / Rev. E33 Product code SCHORCH ref. no.
Ergebnisse der Teilentladungsmessung (Teilentladungsmuster)
Results of the partial discharge measurement (Partial discharge pattern)
UVW
7,49 1,06 1,07 50,01 2 1 30 10
Ergebnisse der Teilentladungsmessung (TE-Einsetzspannung und TE-Aussetzspannung)

Results of the partial discharge measurement (Partial-discharge inception and extinction voltage)
Werte bei Spannungserhöhung Werte bei Spannungsabsenkung

UVW
2,00
Qm [nC]
1,00
0,00
20 40 60 80 100
UN / [%]
1,56 0,24 0,24 49,98 2 1 30 10
3,04 0,24 0,24 49,98 2 1 30 10
4,52 0,38 0,43 49,99 2 1 30 10
6,02 0,82 1,00 50,00 2 1 30 10
7,49 1,06 1,07 50,01 2 1 30 10
6,12 0,90 1,26 49,98 2 1 30 10
4,69 0,54 1,03 49,98 2 1 30 10
3,09 0,28 0,31 49,99 2 1 30 10
1,55 0,24 0,24 50,01 2 1 30 10
Num Gain Software Verstärkung / Software gain Qm TE-Amplitude / PD magnitude (IEC 60034-27 TS)
HW Gain Hardware Verstärkung / Hardware gain Qapp TE Amplitude / PD magnitude (IEC 60270, Abschnitt 4.3.3)
Acq time Erfassungszeit / acquisition time LLD Rauschunterdrückung / Noise rejection

KU7840GPL20 440636 01
Name / Name E33 Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 440636 01_001_5181713020 Seite / Page 3 / 5
Ergebnisse der Teilentladungsmessung (Impulshöhenverteilung)
Results of the partial discharge measurement (Pulse height distribution)
U-VW
13,00 17,20 28,00 50,00 2 1 1 10
V-UW
13,10 14,80 19,60 50,00 2 1 1 10
W-UV
13,10 26,50 30,00 49,99 2 1 1 10

KU7840GPL20 440636 01
Ergebnisse der Teilentladungsmessung (Impulshöhenverteilung)
Results of the partial discharge measurement (Pulse height distribution)
UVW
7,49 1,06 1,07 50,01 2 1 30 10
Num Gain Software Verstärkung / Software gain Qm TE-Amplitude / PD magnitude (IEC 60034-27 TS)
HW Gain Hardware Verstärkung / Hardware gain Qapp TE Amplitude / PD magnitude (IEC 60270, Abschnitt 4.3.3)
Acq time Erfassungszeit / acquisition time LLD Rauschunterdrückung / Noise rejection

KU7840GPL20 440636 01
Prüfzertifikat Polarisationsindex
Test certificate Polarization Index
Abt. / Dept. PB Kundenkennung / Item no. 340-MK-01

KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Name/ Name Lourak Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 50030002400-00- DE GB Seite / Page 1/1
Wuchtprotokoll
Balancing - Report
Der Läufer ist (Die Läufer sind) mit den Anbauteilen entsprechend ISO 1940/1 in zwei Ebenen dynamisch
ausgewuchtet.
The rotor is (The rotors are) balanced dynamically together with the components in two planes in
accordance with ISO 1940/1
Auswuchtgüte
G 2,5
Balance quality
Die Wuchtung erfolgte Paßfeder

N
Balancing was effected key
(F=Full key (mit ganzer) - H=Half key (mit halber) - N=No key (ohne)
Der Wuchtzustand ist auf dem Leistungsschild und auf der Stirnseite des
antriebsseitigen Wellenendes gekennzeichnet.
The balancing status is marked at the rating plate and at the front side of the driving shaft end.
Anmerkungen:
Remarks
Interner Hinweis: Wuchten nach der Werknorm 0173200
Abt. / Dept. Q1 Kundenkennung / Item no.:

KU7840G-PL20 44063601/1
Rev. / Rev. 00 Product code ATB Schorch ref. no.
Name / Name Hinrichs Dok.-Nr. / Doc. no. 44063601_001_5603003020 Seite / Page 1 / 1
EG/EU-KonformitatserkHirung Endress+ Hauser gIJ
People for Process Automation
EC/EU-Declaration of Conformity
Declaration CE/UE de Conformite
(E:
Company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, HauptstraBe I, 79689 Maulburg
erklart als Hersteller in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass das Produkt
declares as manufacturer under sole respon sibility, that the product
declare sous sa seule re sponsa bilite en qualite de fabricant que le produit
Product UQUIPHANT MI5

FTLSO(H), FTLS1(H),FTLS1C, FTL70, FTL71
Regulations den folgenden Europaischen Richtlinien entspricht:

conforms to foll owing European Directives:
est conforme au x prescription s des Directives Europeennes suivante s:
gultig bis/va lid until/date d'expiralion gUltig ab/val id from/va li de a pa rtir de

19.04.2016 20.04.2016
EMC 2004/108/EG 20 14/30/EU (L96179)

ATEX 94/9/EG 20 14/34/EU (L96/309)
Standards Gerat entspricht oh ne iinderung en den folgenden harmonisierten Normen:

Device complies without change s to the following harmonized standard s:
L'appareil est conforme sans modifications au x normes harmonisees suivantes:
EN 60947-5-6 (2000) EN 60079 -0 (2012)
EN 61010-1 (2010) EN 60079-1 (2007)
EN 61326- 1 (2013) EN 60079-26 (2007)
EN 61326-2-3 (2013)
EN 61326-2-5 (2013)
Certification EG-BaumusterprOfbe scheinigung Nr. KEMA 99 ATEX 1157

EC-Type Examination Certificate No.
Numero de rattestation d'examen CE de typ
Au sgestellt von / issued by/ delivre par DEKRA Certification RV. (0344)
Qua litatssicherung TOV Nord CERT (GmbH) (0044)
Quality assurance
Systeme d'assurance qualite
Maulburg, 22 .02.2016
Endress + Hauser GmbH + Co. KG
Abteilungsleiter Produktsicherh eit

Department Manager Product Safety
Responsable de certification
EG 99 016 -i
Abnahmeprüfzeugnis 3.1 nach EN 10204:2005
Seite 1 / 2
ATB Schorch GmbH Zeugnis 338567
Postfach 20 11 52
Auftrag 87119-1/0
41211 Mönchengladbach
Zeugnis-ID 294994
Ansprechpartner Frank Walther
Telefon +49 2191 593-211
E-Mail fwalther@dirostahl.de
Datum 08.12.2016
Ihre Bestellnummer: 64506675 Pos. 10
Auftrag 44063601
Pos. Gegenstand Bestellmenge Liefermenge Gesamtgewicht
Allgemeiner Baustahl S355J2G3+N
DIN EN 10250
1 Welle BZ 1 Stück 1 Stück 0 kg
ZG.-Nr.: 8164320 REV. 00
Ø│ 540│ 400│ mm
L│ 95│ 3530│ mm = 3625 mm lang
Ihre Artikel-Nummer: 8164320
Vordrehmaße
sauber mit allseitiger Bearbeitungszugabe roh geschmiedet, normalgeglüht,
nach Zeichnung allseitig auf Maß vorgedreht, sonst unbearbeitet.
Mit Abnahmeprüfzeugnis 3.1 nach EN 10204:2005
gemäß TL 39 370 00 Teil 1
über CA, Ma+Ob, WB, StB, ME/L, K, US nach SEP 1921, VP
Werkstoff S355J2G3
Werkstoffnorm in Anlehnung an DIN EN 10025 bzw. 10250-2
Behandlungszustand
normalgeglüht
Prüfbedingungen und/oder Lieferbedingungen
LV 3937000 Teil 1
Schmelzen-Nr. Stahlwerk Erschmelzungsart
221942 GMH E/vac.
Chemische Zusammensetzung der Schmelze (%)
C Si Mn P S Al Cr Mo Ni
0.16 0.26 1.35 0.009 0.005 0.029 0.18 0.03 0.12
Wärmebehandlung der Lieferung
N: 920°C/Luft
Mechanische Eigenschaften der Lieferung im Lieferzustand
normalgeglüht
Abnahmeprüfzeugnis 3.1 nach EN 10204:2005
Zeugnis 338567 Auftrag 87119-1/0 Seite 2 / 2
Zugversuch nach ISO 6892-1/B
Bruch-
Proben- Streckgrenze Zugfestigkeit Dehnung Einschnürung
Nr. richtung maß Temperatur ReH [N/mm² (MPa)] Rm [N/mm² (MPa)] A [%] Z [%]
Soll L 10Ø mm RT >=265 - 17.0 -
Ist 4157 L 10Ø mm RT 343 520 28.5 74
* L=längs T=tangential Q=quer R=radial
Kerbschlagbiegeversuch nach ISO 148-1

Proben-Nr. Proben- K-Form K-Temp Sollwert Aktueller Aktueller Aktueller Aktueller Aktueller Einheit
richtung Wert1 Wert2 Wert3 Wert4 Mittelwert
4157 L ISO-V -20 °C 23 180 173 182 - 178 J
Besichtigung und Maßkontrolle

durchgeführt ohne Beanstandung
Ultraschallprüfung nach SEP 1921, Klasse D/d:
Es wurden keine unzulässigen Anzeigen festgestellt.
Hinweis: Bei Teilen, die gemäß der Bestellung mit roher Oberfläche und/oder mit nicht umwandlungsbehandeltem Grobkorngefüge US-geprüft werden müssen, kann die Fehlererkennbarkeit
vermindert sein.
Verwechslungsprüfung mittels Spektrometrie wurde keine Materialverwechslung festgestellt.

Stempelbild 221942 Prüfstempel
4157
S355J2G3+N+SR
Diro
Karl Diederichs KG
Abnahme
Es wird bestätigt, dass die Ergebnisse der Prüfungen den vereinbarten Lieferbedingungen entsprechen.
Dieses Zeugnis wurde maschinell erstellt und ist gemäß DIN EN 10204 auch ohne Unterschrift gültig. Frank Walther
Der Abnahmebeauftragte
Certificate of compliance with PED 2014/68/EU
Manufacturer: Luvata Söderköping AB
Industrigatan 2
SE-614 81 SÖDERKÖPING
Tel +46 121 19100
Fax +46 121 10101
Product: QLKE
Hereby Luvata Söderköping AB confirm that all coils included in article 3.3 manufactured by Luvata are designed and
manufactured in compliance with the requirements of Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU.
Products from Luvata is designed according harmonized product standards EN 13445-2, EN 13445-3 and/or EN13480.
Luvata is certified according EN 3834-2 and welding and brazing operations are co-ordinated by International Welding
Specialist (IWS).
We also confirm that all heat exchangers (coils) manufactured by Luvata are pressure tested with a pressure of at least 1,43
times the design/working pressure. The pressure test is performed with dry air under water.
Söderköping 2016-06-15
Luvata Söderköping AB
Technical Department
Linus Rimquist
Technical Manager
About Luvata
Luvata is the leading international metals supplier of solutions, services, components
EN Certificate of and materials for manufacturing and construction. Luvata’s solutions are used in
industries such as power generation, architecture, automotive, transport, medicine,
compliance with air-conditioning, industrial refrigeration, consumer products and construction. The
company’s continued success is attributed to its longevity, technological excellence and
PED 2014/68/EU strategy of building partnerships beyond metals. Employing over 6 500 staff in
17 countries, Luvata works in partnership with customers such as Siemens, Toyota,
Translation of the original instruktion
CERN, Shaaz, and DWD International.
QLAZ-06-82 Rev I 2016-06-15 We reserve the right to alter specifications www.luvata.com

Provningsintyg/Kontrollplan
Inspection Certificate 3.1 acc.EN 10204
Abnahmeprüfzeugnis 3.1 nach EN 10204
Certificat de contrôle (de produit) /
Plan de contrôle (Qualité) 3.1 EN10204
QLAZ-06-60
Ordernummer: Typbeteckning:
Luvata ref No Type designation
QLKE-264-073-3-0-4-02-2-9-X2-Z
Luvata ref No SO00028878-1 Typebezeichnung
Luvata No Désignation du type
Serienummer: Typritning:
Serial Type drawing
0018272 R1085374
Serien Typ Zeichnung
Série Dessin des soudures
Antal: Ber. tryck MPa:
Number Cal. pressure
1,00 1
Anzhal Ber. Druck
Nombre Pression calculée
Tillverkare: Luvata Söderköping AB Provtryck MPa:
Manufacturer Industrigatan 2 Pressure test
1,5
Hersteller SE-614 81 SÖDERKÖPING Druckprüfung
Fabricant Tel +46 121 191 00 Essai de pression
Kund: ATB Schorch GmbH Beräkningstemp °C:
Client Breite Straße 131 Design temp.
99/0
Klient DE-41238 Mönchengladbach Berechnungstemeratur
Client DE Temp. calculée
Kundorder: Volym L:
Customer requistion Volume
64506658 29
Kunden requistion Volume
Ref. no Volume
Anläggning/Projekt: Typgodkännande:
Plant/Project Approval
Auftrag 44063601 - Zeichnung 8167790
Anlage/Projekt Approval
Installation Autorisation
Klassificering ID:
Classification ID
Klassifizierungs ID
Classification ID
Kontrollplan Kontrollmoment Anmärkning

Inspection plan Examination procedure Remarks
Prüfungplan Prüfprozedur Anmerkung
Plan de contrôle Procédure de contrôle Observation
Self Client External, N /A
inspection inspection third part
by Luvata
1. Granskning av ritning VQM 9371-701
Scrutiny of drawing
Prüfung der Zeichnung ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Examen de contrôle du plan
2. Granskning av hållfasthetsberäkning
Scrutiny of strength calculate
Prüfung der Stärkeberechnung ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Examen de contrôle du calcul de rigidité
3. Kontroll av svetskompetens & svetsarprövning
VQM 9363-741
Check of welding qualifications
Prüfung Schweißlizenz & Schweißerprüfung
☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Contrôle de la licence et test du soudeur
4. Granskning av materialintyg VQM 9633-703
Check of material certificates. Certificates for pressure
exposed material are in compliance with EN 10204-3.1
Prüfung der Werkstoffzeugnisse
☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Vérification des certificats matériel
5. Ankomstkontroll VQM 9371-702
Inbound inspection
Wareneingangsprüfung ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Interne inspection
6. Oförstörande provning, läcksökning
VQM 9371-738
Non-destructive examination, leak detection
Zerstörungsfreie Prüfung, leckerkennung
☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Essai d’indestructibilité, détection de fuites.
Luvata Söderköping AB Registered office Söderköping Rev B 2016-12-22

SE-614 81 Söderköping VAT SE556668065701 Sv, En, Ty, Fr
+46 121 191 00
www.luvata.com Page 1 of 2
QLAZ-06-60

Self Client External, N /A
by Luvata
7. Oförstörande provning, penetrant VQM 9371-748
Non-destructive examination, penetration
Zerstörungsfreie Prüfung, penetrante ☐ ☐ ☐ ☒
Essai d’indestructibilité, pénétrant.
8. Kontroll av dimensioner enligt måttritning
VQM 9371-701
Dimensional check
Prüfung der Hauptabmessungen
☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Contrôle de dimensions
9. Oljesköljning genomförd (ALFA/BETA/CETA)
ISO 4406(1999) VPT 9364-710
Oil rinsing performed ☐ ☐ ☐ ☒
Ölspülung durchgefürt
Huile de rinçage Implemented
10. Oförstörande provning, ultraljud
Non-destructive testing, ultra sonic
Zerstörungsfreie Prüfung, Ultraschall ☐ ☐ ☐ ☒
Contrôle non destructif, ultrasonique
11. Tryckprovad mellan tubplattorna 0.03MPa(QDKR)
3-10min VP 9371-719
Pressure tested between the tubeplates ☐ ☐ ☐ ☒
Druckprüfung zwischen platen
Testé sous pression entre les plaques
12. Tryckprov med luft under vatten, 3-10 min VP
9371-719
Pressure test air under water
Druckprüfung Luft unter Wasser
☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Essai de pression air sous l’eau MPa
13. In- och utvändig undersökning VQM 9371-701
Visual inspection
Innen und auswendig Untersuchung ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Contrôle visuel de l’intérieure et l’extérieur
14. Provkörning och kontroll av motorer och fläktar
VQM 9371-737
Testing and control of motors and fans
Prüfung und Kontrolle von Motoren und Ventilatoren
☐ ☐ ☐ ☒
Vérification de fonction des moteurs et des ventilateurs
15. Emballage och Märkning VQM 9371-701
Packaging and Marking
Packung und Markierung ☒ ☐ ☐ ☐
Emballage et létiquetage
Henrik Fridh
Quality Controlled
vqm.skpg@luvata.com

+46 121 191 00
Slutkontrollintyg, MGC
Final inspection certificate, MGC
QLAZ-06-41
SO00028878-1 QLKE-264-073-3-0-4-02-2-9-X2-Z
Nr dell’ordinazione Desengio di tipo
Serial Type drawing
0018272 R1085374
Seriale Disegno
1,00 1
Numero Disegno pressura
1,5
Produttore SE-614 81 SÖDERKÖPING Test pressura
99/0
Cliente DE-41238 Mönchengladbach Disegno temperatura
Kundorder: Volym L:
64506658 29
Nr.del cliente Volume
Ref. no Volume
Installazione Approvato
Klassificering ID:
Classification ID
Classificazione ID
Classification ID
Kontroll Inspection Utfall Åtgärd Signatur

Result Action Signature
Kontrollera måtten mellan flänsarna (+/- 2mm om inte annat anges)
Check the dimension between the flanges (+/- 2mm if nothing else is mention)
accept 038
accept
Kontrollera måtten mellan tubplattorna (+/- 2mm om inte annat anges) 003
Check the dimension between the tube plates (+/- 2mm if nothing else is mention)
accept
Kontrollera längden på tubplattorna (+/- 2mm om inte annat anges)
Check the length of the tubes plates (+/- 2mm if nothing else is mention)
884
accept
Kontrollera bredden på tubplattorna (+/- 2mm om inte annat anges)
Check the width of the tube plates (+/- 2mm if nothing else is mention)
884
accept
Kontrollera planheten på tubplattorna (+/- 4mm om inte annat anges)
Check the flatness of the tube plates (+/- 4mm if nothing else is mention)
750
accept
Kontrollera måttet från fläns till baksida på tubplatta (+/- 2mm om inte annat anges)
Check the dimension from the flange to the backside of the tube plate (+/- 2mm if nothing else is mention)
750
accept
Kontrollera bredden på färdigmonterad kylare (+/- 2 mm om inte annat anges
Check the width on assembled cooler (+/- 2mm if nothing else is mention)
750
accept
Kontrollera infästningshålens diameter på tubplåten enligt ritning
Check the fixing holes diameter on the tube plate according to drawing
884
accept
Kontrollera lameller
Check the fins
102
accept
Kontrollera att avståndet mellan lamell och tubplåt är en lamelldelning
Check the distance between the fin and the tube plate
003
accept
Kontrollera att tätningsytan på flänsen inte är repig eller ojämn max 0,2 mm
Check that the tightening surface on the flanges not are scratched or rough, max 0,2 mm
884
accept
Kontrollera RILSAN-ytan
Check the RILSAN surface
884
Luvata Söderköping AB Registered office Söderköping Rev A 2015-10-30

SE-614 81 Söderköping VAT SE556668065701 Sv, En
+46 121 191 00
Slutkontrollintyg, MGC
Final inspection certificate, MGC
QLAZ-06-41
accept
Kontrollera att svetsoperatören har stämplat kammarprofilen
Check that the welding operator has stamped the header profil
038
accept
Kontrollera att kylaren är provtryckt och godkänd av operatör
Check that the cooler is pressure tested and approved by the pressure test operator
046
accept
Kontrollera att emballaget är tillverkat av godkänt virke (stämplat)
Check that the package is manufactured by approved wood
102
accept
Kontrollera att ACCEPTED-lapp för Godkänd slutkontroll är fastklistrad
Check that the ACCEPTED-note for final inspection is glued on the coil
102
Tolerans av diagonaler accept

Tolerance of diagonal
0 aaa  1000 2.0 mm
1000 aaa 2000 2.5 mm
2000 aaa 3000 3.0 mm
3000aaa 3.5 mm 750
Till exempel
I intervallet 0<aaa<1000 får den nominella avvikelsen på diagonalmåttet max vara 2mm
vinkelförskjutning.
For example
In the interval 0<aaa<1000 the diagonal meausrement must not deviate more than 2mm from nominell.
Henrik Fridh
Quality Controlled
vqm.skpg@luvata.com

+46 121 191 00
Lista över certifierat material, MGC
List of certified material, MGC
QLAZ-06-61
QLKE-264-073-3-0-4-02-2-9-X2-Z
Nr dell’ordinazione SO00028878-1 Desengio di tipo
Serial Type drawing
0018272 R1085374
Seriale Disegno
1,00 1
1,5
99/0
Kundorder: Volym L:
64506658 29
Ref. no Volume
Klassificering ID:
Classification ID
Classificazione ID
Classification ID
Bilaga nr Beskrivning Material Materialtjocklek Certifikat Nr Anteckning

Enclosure no Description Material Material thickness Certificat No Remark
Innerrör
1 Copper/Nickel 0,65 mm 13028642
Primary tube
Ytterplatta inloppssida
3 Brass 12.0 mm 13030079
Primary tube plate
Ytterplatta retursida
4 Primary tube plate Brass 12.0 mm 13030078
return side
Kammargavel
7 Acid proof steel 8.0 mm 13029615 13029613
Chamber gable
Svetsmuff
8 Acid proof steel DN 15 13028856
Welding socket
Svetsmuff
Welding socket
Kammarprofil
11 Acid proof steel 8.0 mm 13029614 13029612
Chamber shell
Mellanvägg
12 Acid proof steel 3.0 mm 13028738
Partition wall
Svetsfläns
13 Acid proof steel ANSI 3" 13029737
Welding neck flange

+46 121 191 00
QLAZ-06-61
DWG Z1096559 _1C
Henrik Fridh
Quality Controlled
vqm.skpg@luvata.com

+46 121 191 00
By Hampus at 7:16 am, Nov 10, 2016
13028642
Loading area/ No. : 850002/20053152
buntmetall amstetten Ges.m.b.H. Fabrikstr. 4 A-3300 Amstetten Internal : **85140970** Page: 1
Please contact : Mrs Teurezbacher
LUVATA SÖDERKÖPING AB Telephone : 07472 - 606-280
GODSMOTTAGNINGEN Fax No. : 07472 - 61604-403
INDUSTRIGATAN 2
SE-614 81 SÖDERKÖPING Your order No. : 2614 / PUR0030989
SCHWEDEN Date : 07.09.2016
Order confirmation No. : 4010116613 001

Inspection lot No. : 30002666742
Our delivery note No. : 4080167685 010
Quantity delivered : 7.783,000 KG
Date : 28.10.2016
Inspection certificate 3.1 as per EN 10204 : 2004

Plant Amstetten
Product. Dimensions:
472 Tubes drawn, seamless Dim A: 12,700 mm
Material: Dim B:
CUNI10FE1MN Dim C: 0,650 mm
Dim D:
Temper: soft
Specification: Revision/Date of issue: Temper Tolerance class

Further spec.: AD 2000-Merkblatt W6/2 März 2009 R290
Technical req.: ASME SB-111 2015 O61
Chemical req.: ASTM B 111 2011
Metrics: EN 12451 08.2012
R290
____________________________________________________________________________
Remarks:
Your material code No.: 1020000013
Eddy Current examination acc. to
ASTM E243
Die Einhaltung der Grenzmaße und die Beschaffung der Oberfläche jedes Stückes wurde geprüft . Die Rohre wurden gereinigt und eine 100%
Wirbelstromprüfung entsprechend der Auftragsbestätigung durchgeführt.
Die Ware entspricht dem AD 2000-Merkblatt W6/2, letzte Ausgabe und Ihren Bestellbedingungen. Die Wahl des Werkstoffes erfolgte über den
Besteller. Zertifiziertes QM-System nach Anhang I, Abschnitt 4.3 der Druckgeräterichtlinie DGR 2014/68/EU. Zertifikat Nr. 222/2004/MUC der
benannten Stelle, Kennnummer 0036.
"Im Einvernehmen mit dem TÜV SÜD (März 2008)".
"Auf Gegenzeichnung der Abnahmeprüfzeugnisse 3.1 wurde durch den TÜV SÜD verzichtet"
The adherence to the limits of size and the characteristic of the surface of each piece were checked.
The tubes were cleaned and 100% eddy current tested acc. to customer order confirmation.
The delivery is in compliance with AD 2000-Merkblatt W6/2, last edition and your order.
The selection of the material has been received from the client. Certified QM-System acc. Pressure Equipment Directive PED 2014/68/EU,
attachment I, part 4.3; Certificate No. 222/2004/MUC of the notified body - No.0036.
"In agreement with TÜV SÜD (March 2008)"
"Renunciation of countersignature acc. to TÜV SÜD"
buntmetall amstetten Ges.m.b.H. Fabrikstr. 4 A-3300 Amstetten
LUVATA SÖDERKÖPING AB Delivery note no. Item Page

INDUSTRIGATAN 2 4080167685 010 2
Stückzahl/pieces:48 Laufmeter/total meters:36110
Chemical composition as per 3.1 EN 10204 : 2004

____________________________________________________________________________
The sum of the other elements corresponds to what is specified in the chemical standard.
Cu Copper Fe Iron Pb Lead
Ni Nickel Zn Zinc Mn Manganese
Parameter tested CU FE PB NI ZN MN
Unit % % % % % %
Minimum/Reference(R) 1 9
Maximum/Reference(R) 1,81 1 0,05 11
____________________________________________________________________________
Measured values:
Specimen (No.)
EB7089S balance 1,2332 0,0041 9,7458 0,008 0,6907
EB7093S balance 1,2543 0,005 9,8428 0,0088 0,7096
Mechanical testing
____________________________________________________________________________
RP0,2 Rp 0.2 % yield strength RP1,0 Rp 1.0 % proof strength
RT0,5 Rt 0.5 % yield strength RM Tensile strength Rm
A5 Elongation A5 KG Mean grain diameter
Parameter tested RP0,2 RP1,0 RT0,5 RM A5 KG

Unit MPa MPa MPa MPa % µm
Minimum/Reference(R) 90 115 105 290 30 10
Maximum/Reference(R) 50
____________________________________________________________________________
Measured values:
Probennummer
EB7089_1 105 128 118 322 42,0 40
EB7093_1 108 130 116 317 41,0 35
EB7094_1 103 126 114 316 38,0 35
EB7094_2 105 127 115 322 39,0 40
____________________________________________________________________________
Method of control of dimensions
____________________________________________________________________________
D1M Mean outside diameter S Wall thickness and eccentricity
Parameter tested D1M S

Unit mm mm
Minimum/Reference(R) 12,6 0,6
Maximum/Reference(R) 12,8 0,68
____________________________________________________________________________
Measured values:
Specimen (No.)
buntmetall amstetten Ges.m.b.H. Fabrikstr. 4 A-3300 Amstetten
LUVATA SÖDERKÖPING AB Delivery note no. Item Page

INDUSTRIGATAN 2 4080167685 010 3
EB7089_1 12,715 0,60 / 0,68

EB7093_1 12,715 0,62 / 0,66
EB7094_1 12,70 0,64 / 0,66
EB7094_2 12,705 0,62 / 0,67
____________________________________________________________________________
Further inspections
____________________________________________________________________________
WSFS Eddy current test, no. of defects/lwc
Parameter tested WSFS

Unit
Minimum/Reference(R)
Maximum/Reference(R)
6
____________________________________________________________________________
Measured values:
Specimen (No.)
EB7094_1 1
Further inspections
____________________________________________________________________________
Parameter tested Unit Measured Specified / Spec
Reference (R)
Min. Max. Min. Max.
____________________________________________________________________________
Expansion test >30% Result good (4)
Flattening test Result good (1)
Eddy current test 100% Result good (1)
Attestation of conformity
As manufacturer we declare that the products described herein comply with the specifications agreed with the purchaser, with the
above-mentioned standards, description, quantity and the data indicated in this certificate.
These products have been manufactured to our certified quality system which is regularly audited by the certification body Quality Austria -
Trainings-, Zertifizierungs- und Begutachtungs GmbH (Reg. No. 058/0).
____________________________________________________________________________
Dipl.Ing. Dr. Matthias Nöhrer (Supervisor)
Telephone: +43-7472-606-208 Fax: +43-7472-61604-208
e-mail: matthias.noehrer@buntmetall.at
Computer-generated inspection certificate
Batch nr: 13030078, 13030079 Received by: hamn1 2017-01-11
INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
3.1 Acc. to EN 10204:2004
Certificate No. 30560-12 Date 28/10/2016
Regd. Office: Tubesheet Limited. Unit 2, Tel: +44 (0)1773 744755

Denby Hall Way, Ripley, Derbyshire DE5 8JZ, United Kingdom Fax: +44 (0)1773 747273
CUSTOMER Mevera Metall AB CUSTOMER ORDER No.

ITEM No. QUANTITY OUR ORDER No.
DESCRIPTION RN Brass PLATE MARKING D02348/11
THICKNESS 12mm MATERIAL ASTM B171 C46400
WIDTH 950mm
LENGTH 4000mm
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS NOMINAL ACTUAL Cast/ Heat No. D02348/11
COPPER Cu% 60.81 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES RESULT 2 RESULT 1
ZINC Zn% REM TENSILE STRENGTH N/mm² 423 421

TIN Sn% 0.92 0.2% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm² 251 231
ALUMINIUM Al% 0.5% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm² 260 245
NICKEL Ni% 1.0% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm²

IRON Fe% 0.003 ELONGATION % A2”/ A50mm 42 44
MANGANESE Mn% ELONGATION % A5
LEAD Pb% 0.005 REDUCTION IN AREA %

PHOSPHORUS P% HARDNESS H.B.
CARBON C% HARDNESS H.V.
SULPHUR S% TEMPER M20 M20

SILICON Si% ULTRASONIC TEST Report No.
ARSENIC As% DYE PENETRANT Report No.
BISMUTH Bi% IZOD IMPACT (Joules)
MAGNESIUM Mg%
COBALT Co%
BORON B%
Cast/ Heat No. D02348/11
This computer generated certificate is valid without a

signature
WE HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE MATERIAL DESCRIBED ABOVE HAS BEEN TESTED,
AND COMPLIES WITH THE TERMS OF THE CONTRACT OF ORDER.
1) The above information has been transferred from master certificates held in our test certification files.
2) This test certificate is deemed original only if ink signed by an authorised signatory.
3) The material described on this Certificate is of European Origin TEMPLATE REVISION 15/07/2015
Batch nr: 13029615 Received by: parst 2016-12-20
Our Order 1761411-1-1 Your Order Patrick 337462/274978 Packing List 400713-1 (18.11.2016) Img No 456899 (21.11.2016)
.
By Hampus at 1:07 pm, Nov 21, 2016
13028856
Our Order 1761411-1-1 Your Order Patrick 337462/274978 Packing List 400713-1 (18.11.2016) Img No 456899 (21.11.2016)
.
CERTIFICATE
Date: 2016-11-09
LUVATA SÖDERKÖPING AB Our order number: 0850317

ATT: cert skpg Your order ref.: PUR00311628-1
SE-61481 SÖDERKÖPING
Row Article Description Customer Ref. Charge number
1 3101522320 Syraf Plåt EN1.4404 2B 2500x1250x3mm PUR00311628-001 643505
13028738
By Hampus at 2:11 pm, Nov 15, 2016
The requested certificates for the above orders are hereby send to you.
BE Group Sverige AB Telephone: 040-384000
Box 225 Fax: 040-384174
SE-20122 Malmö
Werksbescheinigung / Certificate of Compliance 2.1 DIN EN 10204
Nummer / Number: 17121553
Kunde / Customer : 41003

ATB Schorch GmbH
Postfach 20 11 52
Best.-Nr. / Order-No. : 64507496

Komm.-Nr. / Comm.-No. : 16025313 Datum / Date : 23.11.16
Pos.-Nr. / Pos.-No. : 0020
Art.-Nr. / Art.-No. : 986181116000001

Art.-Bez. / Article : PR-SPA-EX-LTH
IBExU 14 ATEX 1291 X, II 2G Ex ia IIC T6...T3 Gb
Please_note_manual_point_10
WID-TH EXI 2xPT100/200/6 EM38 MS B S
NT7322600
Ihre Art.-Nr. / Your Art.-No. : 7322689

Zeichn.-Nr. / Drawing-No. : 986181116000001,REV.0
Norm / Standard : DIN EN 60751 Klasse B
Losgröße / Quantity : 4
R-Leitung / R-of wire : 0,000 Ohm
Prüfspannung / Ins. voltage: 2.5 kVAC,50Hz / 1 min.
Zuleitung / Conn.-wire : S8x0.5mm², L=6000mm, BK(2xRD/2xWH/2xYE/2xBK)
Es wird bestätigt, dass die Lieferung den bestätigten We certify that the specific items comply with
Bedingungen und den amtlichen Vorschriften confirmed specifications as well as with official
entspricht. Die Spannungs- / Isolationsprüfung wurde regulations of applicable standards.The high-voltage /
an allen Sensoren durchgeführt. insulation test has been performed with all
Wiesbaden, 20.06.2017
Bestätigt durch / Confirmed
Afagh Peiman,
EPHY-MESS GmbH - Berta-Cramer-Ring 1 - D-65205 Wiesbaden-Delkenheim - Tel.: +49 6122 9228-0 - Fax: +49 6122 9228-99 - e-mail: info@ephy-mess.de
Certificate of compliance with PED 97/23/EC
Manufacturer: Luvata Söderköping AB
Industrigatan 2
Tel +46 121 19100
Fax +46 121 10101
Product: QLKE
Hereby Luvata Söderköping AB confirm that all coils included in article 3.3 manufactured by Luvata are designed and manu-
factured in compliance with the requirements of Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) 97/23/EC.
Products from Luvata is designed according harmonized product standards EN 13445 and/or EN13480. Luvata is certified
according EN 3834-2 and welding and brazing operations are co-ordinated by International Welding Specialist (IWS).
We also confirm that all heat exchangers (coils) manufactured by Luvata are pressure tested with a pressure of at least 1,43
times the design/working pressure. The pressure test is performed with dry air under water.
Technical Department
Linus Rimquist
Technical Manager
About Luvata
Luvata is the leading international metals supplier of solutions, services, components
EN Certificate of and materials for manufacturing and construction. Luvata’s solutions are used in
industries such as power generation, architecture, automotive, transport, medicine,
compliance with air-conditioning, industrial refrigeration, consumer products and construction. The
company’s continued success is attributed to its longevity, technological excellence and
PED 97/23/EC strategy of building partnerships beyond metals. Employing over 6 500 staff in
17 countries, Luvata works in partnership with customers such as Siemens, Toyota,
Translation of the original instruktion
CERN, Shaaz, and DWD International.
QLAZ-06-82 Rev G 2015-0811 We reserve the right to alter specifications www.luvata.com

QLAZ-06-60
QLKE-065-057-3-5-6-13-3-A-X0-Z
Luvata ref No SO00022860-3 Typebezeichnung
Serial Type drawing
0014572 R1085372
Serien Typ Zeichnung
1,00 0,6
Anzhal Ber. Druck
0,9
Hersteller SE-614 81 SÖDERKÖPING Druckprüfung
99/0
Klient DE-41238 Mönchengladbach Berechnungstemeratur
Kundorder: Volym L:
64496321/120 11
Kunden requistion Volume
Ref. no Volume
Anlage/Projekt Approval
Klassificering ID:
Classification ID
Klassifizierungs ID
Classification ID

Self Client External,
by Luvata
Granskning av ritning VQM 9371-701
Scrutiny of drawing
Prüfung der Zeichnung ☒ ☐ ☐
Examen de contrôle du plan
Granskning av hållfasthetsberäkning
Scrutiny of strength calculate
Prüfung der Stärkeberechnung ☒ ☐ ☐
Examen de contrôle du calcul de rigidité
Kontroll av svetskompetens & svetsarprövning VQM 9363-741
Check of welding qualifications
Prüfung Schweißlizenz & Schweißerprüfung ☒ ☐ ☐
Contrôle de la licence et test du soudeur
Granskning av materialintyg VQM 9633-703
Check of material certificates. Certificates for pressure exposed
material are in compliance with EN 10204-3.1
Prüfung der Werkstoffzeugnisse
☒ ☐ ☐
Vérification des certificats matériel
Ankomstkontroll VQM 9371-702
Inbound inspection
Wareneingangsprüfung ☒ ☐ ☐
Interne inspection
Oförstörande provning, penetrant VQM 9371-738
Non-destructive examination, penetration
Zerstörungsfreie Prüfung, penetrante ☒ ☐ ☐
Essai d’indestructibilité.
Kontroll av dimensioner enligt måttritning VQM 9371-701
Dimensional check
Prüfung der Hauptabmessungen ☒ ☐ ☐
Contrôle de dimensions

+46 121 191 00
QLAZ-06-60
Oljesköljning genomförd (ALFA/BETA/CETA) ISO 4406(1999)

VPT 9364-710
Oil rinsing performed ☐ ☐ ☐
Ölspülung durchgefürt
Huile de rinçage Implemented
Oförstörande provning Ultraljud
VP 9364-705 ☐ ☐ ☐
Non-destructive testing, Ultrasonic
Tryckprovad mellan tubplattorna 0.03MPa(QDKR) 3-10min
VP 9371-719
Pressure tested between the tubeplates ☐ ☐ ☐
Druckprüfung zwischen platten
Testé sous pression entre les plaques
Tryckprov med luft under vatten, 3-10 min VP 9371-719
Pressure test air under water
Druckprüfung Luft unter Wasser ☒ ☐ ☐
Essai de pression air sous l’eau MPa
In- och utvändig undersökning VQM 9371-701
Visual inspection
Innen und auswendig Untersuchung ☒ ☐ ☐
Contrôle visuel de l’intérieure et l’extérieur
Provkörning och kontroll av motorer och fläktar
VQM 9371-737
Testing and control of motors and fans
Prüfung und Kontrolle von Motoren und Ventilatoren
☐ ☐ ☐
Vérification de fonction des moteurs et des ventilateurs
Emballage och Märkning VQM 9371-701
Packaging and Marking
Packung und Markierung ☒ ☐ ☐
Emballage et létiquetage
Per Karlsson
Quality Controlled
vqm.skpg@luvata.com

+46 121 191 00
QLAZ-06-61
QLKE-065-057-3-5-6-13-3-A-X0-Z
Nr dell’ordinazione SO00022860-3 Desengio di tipo
Serial Type drawing
0014572 R1085372
Seriale Disegno
1,00 0,6
0,9
99/0
Kundorder: Volym L:
64496321/120 11
Ref. no Volume
Klassificering ID:
Classification ID
Classificazione ID
Classification ID
Bilaga nr Beskrivning Material Materialtjocklek Certifikat Nr Anteckning

Enclosure no Description Material Material thickness Certificat No Remark
Innerrör
1 Copper 0,65 mm 13021514
Primary tube
Ytterplatta inloppssida
3 Brass 12.0 mm 13022738
Primary tube plate
Ytterplatta retursida
4 Primary tube plate Brass 12.0 mm 13022737
return side
Kammargavel
7 Steel 5.0 mm 13020613
Chamber gable
Svetsmuff
Welding socket
Kammarprofil
11 Steel 5.0 mm 13017784
Chamber shell
Mellanvägg
12 Steel 3.0 mm 13012777
Partition wall
Svetsfläns
13 Steel DN40 13021623
Welding neck flange

+46 121 191 00
QLAZ-06-61
DWG Z1096559 _1C
Per Karlsson
Quality Controlled
vqm.skpg@luvata.com

+46 121 191 00
By Fredrik Hellman at 8:49 am, Feb 19, 2016
13*21514
3.1 Acc. to EN 10204:2004
Certificate No. 28220-12d Date 22/06/2015

CUSTOMER Mevera Metall AB CUSTOMER ORDER No. 11383/16486 PUR302889-1

ITEM No. 2 QUANTITY 1 off OUR ORDER No. 298/29384
DESCRIPTION R N BRASS PLATE MARKING D01204/17
THICKNESS 12mm MATERIAL ASTM B171 C46400 / 2012
WIDTH 312mm Part No. K5017845 A
LENGTH 686mm
ZINC Zn% REM TENSILE STRENGTH N/mm2 441 437

TIN Sn% 0.88 0.2% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm2 244 240
ALUMINIUM Al% 0.5% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm2 261 259
NICKEL Ni% 1.0% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm2

MAGNESIUM Mg%
COBALT Co%
BORON B%

signature
By Fredrik Hellman at 4:32 pm, Feb 18, 2016
13*22738
3.1 Acc. to EN 10204:2004
Certificate No. 28220-12d Date 22/06/2015

CUSTOMER Mevera Metall AB CUSTOMER ORDER No. 11383/16486 PUR302889-1

ITEM No. 1 QUANTITY 1 off OUR ORDER No. 298/29384
DESCRIPTION R N BRASS PLATE MARKING D01204/17
THICKNESS 12mm MATERIAL ASTM B171 C46400 / 2012
WIDTH 212mm Part No. P3401978-2057 D
LENGTH 646mm
ZINC Zn% REM TENSILE STRENGTH N/mm2 441 437

TIN Sn% 0.88 0.2% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm2 244 240
ALUMINIUM Al% 0.5% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm2 261 259
NICKEL Ni% 1.0% PROOF STRENGTH N/mm2

MAGNESIUM Mg%
COBALT Co%
BORON B%

signature
13*22737
13*21623
MjqísxNsxujhyntsHjwynknhfyj
Fuuwt{ji
G~jwnhxxo>?5616:25>26:
Werksbescheinigung / Certificate of Compliance 2.1 DIN EN 10204
Nummer / Number: 17121443
Kunde / Customer : 41003

ATB Schorch GmbH
Postfach 20 11 52
Best.-Nr. / Order-No. : 64507496

Komm.-Nr. / Comm.-No. : 16025313 Datum / Date : 23.11.16
Pos.-Nr. / Pos.-No. : 0010
Art.-Nr. / Art.-No. : 986130110000001

Art.-Bez. / Article : PR-SPA-EX-LTH
IBExU 14 ATEX 1291 X, II 2G Ex ia IIC T6-T3 Gb
Please_note_manual_point_10
WID-TH EXI 2xPT100/200/4 EM38 MS B S
NT7322600
Ihre Art.-Nr. / Your Art.-No. : 7322606

Zeichn.-Nr. / Drawing-No. : 986130110000001,REV.2
Norm / Standard : EN 60751 Klasse B
Losgröße / Quantity : 3
R-Leitung / R-of wire : 0,000 Ohm
Prüfspannung / Ins. voltage: 2.5kVAC,50Hz/1min.
Zuleitung / Conn.-wire : S8x0.5mm, L=4000mm, BK(2xRD / 2xWH)
Es wird bestätigt, dass die Lieferung den bestätigten We certify that the specific items comply with
Bedingungen und den amtlichen Vorschriften confirmed specifications as well as with official
entspricht. Die Spannungs- / Isolationsprüfung wurde regulations of applicable standards.The high-voltage /
an allen Sensoren durchgeführt. insulation test has been performed with all
Wiesbaden, 20.06.2017
Bestätigt durch / Confirmed
Inge Klimpke, Logistik
EPHY-MESS GmbH - Berta-Cramer-Ring 1 - D-65205 Wiesbaden-Delkenheim - Tel.: +49 6122 9228-0 - Fax: +49 6122 9228-99 - e-mail: info@ephy-mess.de
Prüfprotokoll / Test Report Q065_Rev01
Kunde / Customer ATB Schorch GmbH

Fabriknummer / Fabrication No. 828327/001+002
Auftrag Nr. / Order No. 828327-0010
Artikelnummer / Article No. 50043551
Typ / Type DHG11B03GG/M-2,4-T3
Schutzart / Degree of protection IP 66
Ex-Kennzeichnung & Zündschutzart /
Ex-Marking & Type of Protection EN 60079, EN 61241 (Ex) II 2G / Ex db eb IIC T3
Technische Daten / Technical data
Stufe, Gruppe / Stage, Group 1

Bemessungsleistung / Nominal Power [kW] 2,4
Bemessungsspannung / Nominal voltage 50 / 60 Hz [V] 460/3~/PE
Bemessungsstrom / Nominal current [A] 3
spezifische Oberflächenbelastung / specific surface load [W/cm²] 0,17
Steuerstromkreis / Control circuit max. 16A; 230V 1N/PE 50/60 Hz
Gehäuseheizung / Anticondensation heater n.a.
Schutzsystem / Protection system

Schutz-Temperatur-Begrenzer / Thermal cut out eB*6*** n.a.
Temperaturbegrenzer / Temperature limiter B1 [°C] 0…200 Oberfläche/surface
Temperaturregler / Temperature regulator B2 [°C] 0…190 Oberfläche/surface
Temperaturwächter / Temperature monitor n.a.
Temperaturfühler / Temperature sensor n.a.
Messumformer / Transmitter n.a.
weitere Überwachungsgeräte, Sensoren /
additional monitoring devices, sensors
Temperaturbegrenzer / Temperature limiter n.a.
Temperaturregler / Temperature regulator n.a.
Einbaulage / Mounting Position
beliebig / any H 180 ±45
Heizkörper waagerecht / Heater horizontal V 90
Messungen / Measurements
Widerstand Heizung / Resistance Heater [Ω] 174

Hochspannung / High voltage 60sec. [kV] 1,92
Ableitstrom / Fault current [mA] 26,2
Isolation / Isolation [V] 1000
Isolationswiderstand / Isolation resistance [MΩ] >400
Einstellung Schutz-Temperatur-Begrenzer eB*6*** TB/TR
n.a.
Adjustment Thermal cut out eB*6*** TL/TR
Einstellung Begrenzer / Limiter adjustment B1 [°C] 180 0
Einstellung Regler / Regulator adjustment B2 [°C] 160 0
Einstellung Wächter / Monitor adjustment n.a.
Lage heißester Punkt / Position of Hot Spot LM1 mm Oberfläche
Temperatur heißester Punkt / Hot spot temperature M1 < T3
Prüfung / Test 15.03.2017 durch / by MG
Prüfzeichen - Unterschrift /
M. Grigat
Test mark - Signature
Elmess Thermosystemtechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Nordallee 1, 29529 Uelzen
N:\ETSF\ETSF-Q\Prüffeld\Prüfbuch\828-\828327-0010.xls www.elmess.de 15.03.2017

Abnahmeprüfzeugnis nach EN 10204 - 3.1
Inspection certificate acc. to EN 10204 - 3.1
Zeugnis-Nr. / Certificate no. 3018670210/3023425275_10_1
Seite / page 1 / 2
Es wird bescheinigt, dass die gelieferten Erzeugnisse den Vereinbarungen bei der Bestellung
entsprechen. Darüber hinaus wird bescheinigt, dass bei der Herstellung der nachstehend aufgeführten
Erzeugnisse die vorgeschriebenen Prüfungen und / oder die zusätzlich aufgeführten Prüfungen nach den
bestehenden Prüfvorgaben durchgeführt und die erforderlichen Freigaben erteilt wurden. Die unten
aufgeführten Prüfungen wurden unter Aufsicht einer dazu autorisierten, unabhängigen Stelle
durchgeführt.
It is certified that the products supplied are in compliance with the requirements of the order.
Furthermore, it is confirmed that during the manufacturing of the subsequently listed products the
specified inspections and / or the additionaly ordered inspections have been performed according to the
valid procedures and the necessary releases have been given.
The subsequently listed inspections have been performed by especially authorized personnel.
Kunde / Customer: ATB Schorch GmbH

Breite Straße 131
DE-41238 Mönchengladbach
Kunden Bestell-Nr. / Customer order no.: 64507349
E+H Auftrags-Nr. / E+H order no.: 3023425275
_____________________________________________________________________
Pos / item Menge / Qty Produktbezeichnung / Description
_____________________________________________________________________
0010 1 ST / PC FTL50-D2L5/0
Liquiphant M FTL50
S/N TAG
M3014F01026
Kennzeichnung / Marking 0KAW7

Teil / Part Adapter / adapter
Hersteller / Manufacturer OLARRA
Zeugnis-Nr. / Certificate No. 282534
Schmelze-Nr. / Heat No. 414789
Kennzeichnung / Marking 051A6

Teil / Part Gabel / fork
Hersteller / Manufacturer FEINGUSS BLANK
Zeugnis-Nr. / Certificate No. PZ07309
Schmelze-Nr. / Heat No. 371
Abnahmeprüfzeugnis nach EN 10204 - 3.1
Inspection certificate acc. to EN 10204 - 3.1
Zeugnis-Nr. / Certificate no. 3018670210/3023425275_10_1
Seite / page 2 / 2
13.03.2017
Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG Christian Doll

DE-79689 Maulburg - Abnahmebeauftragter -
- Inspector -
Dieses Zeugnis wurde elektronisch nach EN 10204 erstellt und ist ohne Unterschrift gültig.
Bei Rückfragen wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihre Endress+Hauser-Vertriebszentrale.
This document was generated electronically acc. to EN 10204 and is valid without signature.
If you have any queries, please contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
Larrondo LOIU (VIZCAYA) España
P.O. Box 1.323/48080 Bilbao
Tel. 34-(4) 4 71 13 00
Fax.34-(4) 4 53 16 36
GUENTHER + SCHRAMM GMBH.

HELDENHEIMER STRASSE 65 Trade Mark - Zeichen des Lieferwerkes
Anagrama del suministrador
73447 OBERKOCHEN - ALEMANIA
Works Inspector Stamp - Werkssachverständiger
Sello del Inspector
Certificate type - APZ Nach Certificate nº - Prüf-Nr Date - Datum - Fecha

EN 10204/3.1 282534
Certificado tipo Certificado nº 28 - 07 - 2016
Our order Nº Heat Your order Nº
Werks - Nr 607751 Schmelze 414789 Bestell - Nr 4500297774-2000
Nº de Referencia Colada Pedido Nº
Steel Grade According to
Werkstoff X-2-CRNIMO-18-14-3 / 1.4435 Entsprechend EN 10.272-2007.
Calidad Corresponde
Shape and Size - Gegenstad Tolerance - Toleranz Bundles Bars Weight
Perfil y dimensión Tolerancia Bunde 2 Stäbe Gewitcht 2054 Kg
RUND 35 mm k 12 /ISO 286-1 /10060 Bultos Barras Peso
Requirements - Anforderungen - Exigencias

EN 10.088-3.2014. PED 2014/68/EU, Annex I, Parag.4.3/DGR 2014/68/EU
ASTM A 479 / A 479M-15. Anhang I Absatz 4.3 Certificate/Zertifikat Nr. 348/2008/MUC
AD-2000-W2/W10.
NACE MR-0175/ISO 15156-3 2009.
NACE MR-0103-12.
ASTM A 484 / A 484M-15.
Type 316-Type 316L.
N°.410000144E.
Conformity letter/Zustimmungsschreiben TUV BADEN 28.01.1969
Waiving of Countersign/Gegenzeichnungsverzicht:01.03.1977
Melting process / Erschmelzungsart / Proceso de Fusión Heat treatment / Wärmebehandlung / Tratamiento térmico
1060C 4H/Std WATER/WASSER/AGUA
E.A.F. / A.O.D.
Solution annealed/Abgeschreckt/Hipertemple-Turned/Drehen/Torneado-
Test results - Ergebnis der Prüfungen - Resultados de los ensayos

Dimension of Specimen Rp0,2% Rp 1% Rm A A Z Hardness Impact test / Kersbschlag / Resiliencia
Abmessungen des Probestabes N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 %L 5D %L 4D % Härte ISO V Jules
Medida de las probetas MPA MPA MPA HBw
RD. 10,00 mm. Min. 200 235 500 40 100

Max. 700 215
Temperature ºC Spec. Nº. 1 325 368 595 50 53 74 170 225/230/227
20 Probe Nr.
Pro Nº. 2 327 371 598 50 53 74 170 223/227/224
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni N Co
Min. 17,00 2,50 12,50
Max. 0,030 1,00 2,00 0,045 0,030 19,00 3,00 15,00 0,1000
0,028 0,33 1,48 0,033 0,015 17,95 2,52 12,65 0,0260 0,20
Visual and dimensional inspection Radioactivity inspection Antimixing test Grain Size
Besichtingung und Ausmessung O.K. Radioaktivitätskontrolle O.K. Spektrosk Verwechslungspr O.K. Korngrösse 6-7
Control visual y dimensional Control de Radioactividad Antimezcla Tamaño de grano
Remarks - Bemerkungen - Observaciones
IC test acc./IK prüfung nach EN ISO 3651-2/98 Met.A. OK EDV / EDP
Ferrite % = 1,1 Acc. EN 10.204
IC test acc./IK prüfung nach ASTM A 262 E.14. OK Marian Tejedo
Quality Mng.
Works Inspector
Der Werkssachverständige
Inspector de fábrica
Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG
Postfach/P.O. Box 1261
Final Inspection Report / Endprüfprotokoll
D-79690 Maulburg The manufacturer confirms that all measuring equipment used to assure the quality of the products
has been calibrated and is traceable (e.g. DKD/DAkkS, NIST, NABL...) to national or international
standards.
Der Hersteller bestätigt, dass die zu Qualitätsprüfungen des Erzeugnisses eingesetzten Messmittel
gültig kalibriert waren und auf nationale (z.B. DKD/DAkkS, NIST, NABL...) bzw. internationale
Normale rückführbar sind.
Liquiphant M
TAG number Messstellen-Nummer
Order code Bestellcode FTL50-D2L5/0

Serial number Seriennummer M3014F01026
Extended order code Erweiterter Bestellcode FTL50-KGM2AA5E5C
Output type Ausgang -

Software version Softwareversion -
ATB Schorch GmbH

Customer order number Auftragsnummer des Kunden 64507349
E+H sales order number E+H Auftragsnummer 3023425275/0010
Internal order number Interne Auftragsnummer 3018670210000010
Ambient temperature Umgebungs- Temperatur 24 °C (±5°C)
Test step Testschritt Test result Testergebnisse
Printed circuit boards Funktionstest Leiterplatte (n) Passed Bestanden

function test
Electronic insert test Funktionstest Elektronik Passed Bestanden
Welding inspection Überprüfung Schweißnähte Passed Bestanden
Leakage test (helium) Dichtigkeitsprüfung/ Passed Bestanden
Heliumlecktest
Functional test of sensor Funktionstest Sensor Passed Bestanden
Final check of instrument Endprüfung Passed Bestanden
HV test Hochspannungstest Passed Bestanden
Resonant Frequency uncovered Schwingfrequenz frei 1056.50 Hz
We confirm that all tests, according to the Quality Plan (QP), Wir bestätigen, dass alle Tests aus dem Qualitätsplan (QP),
have been performed successfully. erfolgreich durchgeführt wurden.
At the time of verification, the measuring points of the device Das Gerät entsprach zum Zeitpunkt der Prüfung an den aufgeführten
indicated above were in compliance to the published valid Messpunkten den gültigen technischen Spezifikationen (TI).
technical specification (TI).
TI00328F
This document was generated electronically and is valid Dieses Dokument wurde elektronisch erzeugt und ist ohne Unterschrift
without signature. gültig.
Date of inspection / Prüfdatum 13. Mar 2017

– End of document –
71111808 / 250002944 – Ende des Dokumentes –
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dep.
Name / Name
Labeling
Datum / Date
D - 41238 Mönchengladbach - Breite Strasse 131
Type KU7840G-PL20 IMB3 2017 Nr.44063601/1

Beschilderung
00
E41
3 MOT. IP55 -20°C Tamb +50°C
155/120°C 32,20 t
27.06.2017 Typ
WVU N
Product code
bearing DE: EFEZLB-22-280 INSUL.
60 Hz ±2% oil volume: 23 l
E. Yasar Doku. Nr. / Doc. No

2300 kW oil: ISO VG68
S1
13200 V Y ±10%
144 A bearing NDE: EFKZLB-22-280 INSUL.
cos=0,73 oil volume: 23 l
KU7840G-PL20
358/min oil: ISO VG68
44063601_001_6001001020
Ref. no.
Auftrags-Nr.
EN60034 IEC60034
Made in Germany
Seite / Page
44 063 6 01
1 / 6
Kundenkennung / Item no.: 340-MK-01
Beschilderung
Labeling
D - 41238 Mönchengladbach - Breite Str. 131

0102
Type KU7840G-PL20 IMB3

3 MOT. IP55 2017 Nr.44063601/1
II 2G Ex pxe II T3
TÜV 07 ATEX 553989
KÜHLUNG, REFROIDISSEMENT,
COOLING, RAFFREAMENTO
quantity of water 14,8 m³/h
inlet temperature max. 39 °C
operating pressure max. 9,5 bar
pressure drop 0,8 bar
Abt. / Dep. E41 Kundenkennung / Item no.: 340-MK-01

Datum / Date 27.06.2017 Typ Auftrags-Nr.
KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Rev. / Rev. 00 Product code Ref. no.
Name / Name E. Yasar Doku. Nr. / Doc. No 44063601_001_6001001020 Seite / Page 2 / 6
Beschilderung
Labeling
protective gas in acc. with specs.

purging pressure min.: 5 bar
purging pressure max.: 10 bar
internal free volume: 20 m³
min. purging air flow rate: 300 m³/h
min. qty. of protective gas req. for purging: 200 m³
min. overpressure in service: 10 mbar
leakage rate at mbar: 12 m³/h
max. internal overpressure (purging): 50 mbar
max. internal overpressure (in progress): 30 mbar
min. internal overpressure (in progress): 2 mbar
purge time: 45 min
heating: Typ DHG11B3/M-2,4T3
3 460 V % 6,03 A
4,800 kW 44063601
II2GEEXDEIICT3 IBEXU 15 ATEX 1019
ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
Before lifting the cooler hood,
disconnect plug, pipes and
mounting bolts.

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
Bearing shell
NDE insulated.
ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
Bearing shell
DE insulated and
bridged. Do not remove
earth lead.
Motor housing
overpressure capsuled
Main Terminal Box

340-MK-01

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
Anti-Condensation
Heater Terminal Box
340-HEA-415
RTD Auxiliary
Terminal Box
34-CT-51
Vibration Auxiliary
Terminal Box
34-CV-51
Purging system
Auxiliary T-Box
34-CD-52
Current Transformer
Terminal Box

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
ITEM-No.:
340-MK-01

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
ATB Schorch GmbH
27.06.2017
Manual
Threephase induction machine with squirrel cage
44063601
KU7840GPL20
II 2G Ex pxe II T3
TÜV 07 ATEX 553989
ITEMNo.
340MK01
EN
Translation of original manual
Chapter S1
Safety and commissioning instructions
General
Machines have dangerous, live and rotating parts, and possibly hot surfaces. All work
concerned with transportation, connection to the electrical supply, for commissioning
and maintenance must be carried out by qualified, responsible personnel
(observe the IEC 60364).
Improper acting can cause serious personal injuries and material damages.
Pay attention to the risk of injury to people due to contact voltage higher than 42V.
Before working on the terminal clamps of the machine, short-circuit the winding to
earth.
During operation, static charges can occur on machines with belt drive. The owner of
the machine has to ensure that no static charges occur in the explosion-proof area.
Any works on the machine or the electrical connections of the machine are allowed to
be carried out only by qualified personnel (→ chapter 1.6) and in compliance with the
applicable legal regulations.
- Accident prevention regulations
- (DIN) EN (ISO) (IEC)-codes and standards
- Safety regulations
- Instructions for transport, installation, commissioning and maintenance
- Safety data sheets
Furthermore, all country-specific regulations must be observed.
Intended use
These machines are intended to be used in industrial plants. They comply with the
harmonized standards of the series EN / IEC 60034. Their use in explosion-hazard areas is
prohibited, unless it is not specifically intended for this purpose
(observe additional instructions).
Operating conditions referred to ambient temperature and altitude (→ Data Sheet).
The conditions on site must comply with all specified parameters on the power rating
plate.
Machines are components for the installation as defined in the EC Machine Directive
2006/42. The commissioning is not allowed as long as the conformity of the final product with
this directive is not confirmed (observe the EN 60204 1).
Transport, Storage
Immediately report damages detected after the delivery to the haulage company; if
necessary, do not start up. Tighten screwed in transport eyes before transport. They are
designed for the machine weight. Do not attach additional loads. If necessary, use sufficiently
dimensioned transport means (e.g. rope guides). Remove existing transport securing devices
before commissioning. Reuse them for further transports. If machines are stored, make sure
that their environment is dry, free of dust and only low vibrations occur (veff ≤ 0.2 mm/s)
(storage standstill damages).
Measure the insulation resistance before the commissioning (→ chapter 2.8.4).

Installation
Ensure smooth support, good fixation of foot and flange and accurate alignment in case of
direct coupling. Avoid structure dependent resonance with rotational frequency and the
double mains frequency. Check the direction of rotation when the coupling is not engaged
(→ chapter 5).
Fit on/pull off the pulleys and couplings only with suitable devices (heat up!) and cover them
with a protective guard against accidental contact.
Avoid impermissible belt tension.
The balance status of the machine is specified on the shaft end face or the power rating plate
(H = half, F = complete fitting key). In case of design variants with half fitting key (H), the
coupling has also to be balanced with a half fitting key. Work off the visible supernatant part
of the fitting key.
Connect the tube connections, if necessary.
Cover such designs with shaft ends open to the top to avoid foreign parts from falling
into the ventilation opening.
The ventilation may not be hindered and avoid direct sucking in of the exhaust air,
also from neighbouring units.
~ 1000
L2 ~ 1000
L2
~ 800
L1
~ 800
~ 800 L1 ~ 800
Electrical connection
All works are only allowed to be done by qualified specialist personnel when the
machine stands idle, is disconnected and secured against accidental switching on.
This also refers to auxiliary circuits (e.g. stand still heating).
Check that no electrical voltage is present!
If the tolerances specified in EN 60034-1 are exceeded, heating will increase and the
electromagnetic compatibility will be impacted. Consider the specifications on the power
rating plate, as well as the connection diagram in chapter A.3. Connect the machine that way
that a permanent, safe, electrical connection is maintained (no off-standing wire ends); use
the assigned cable end pieces.
Connect the protective conducting wire safely.
The smallest distance between blank and live parts and to earth may not be shorter than the
following values (→ chapter 3.4.2).
Neither foreign objects nor dirt may be inside the terminal box. It must be dry. Plug the cable
entries which are not needed anymore and close the box and seal them dust and water proof.
Before the test run, secure the fitting key without driven elements. If the machines are
delivered with brakes, check the proper functioning of the brakes before the
commissioning.
Operation
Electromagnetic fields are generated during operation of this machine. Heart
pacemakers can be impaired in their function, which can be harmful to health and
even cause death. Persons with heart pacemakers are NOT allowed to stay near this
machine.
This machine causes operating noise, which can lead to hearing impairment. When
staying near this machine, an ear protection must be used.
Please find the maximum housing vibrations in chapter 9.1.4. If changes referred to the
normal operation occur, e.g. increased temperatures, noises, vibrations, look for the reason
and contact the manufacturer, if necessary (→ chapter 9.1.4).
Do not switch off the protective devices, do not do it in test operation either.
In case of doubt, switch off the machine.
If the environment is very dirty, clean the air passages regularly.

Relubricate the bearings using the re-greasing devices while the machine is running. Pay
attention to the type of saponification.
If the grease outlet boreholes are closed with plugs, remove the plugs before commissioning.
Close the boreholes with grease.
Warranty
The warranty assumes that the instructions for safety and commissioning as well as for
possible additional equipment are observed.
Important Note
Important Note!
It is not permitted to operate a machine in an area with

potentially explosive atmosphere without an approval
for explosion proofness issued by an accredited agency
("Notified Body"). The ATEX approval of the machine
must be recorded on the power rating plate and in the
operating instructions.
Avoid particle flow streams capable of generating

electrical charges.
SCH 8500100_EN
Table of Contents
Chapter Page
A. Technical specifications A.1 Outline drawing ........................................... A-1

A.2 Data sheet .................................................. A-2
A.3 Wiring diagrams .......................................... A-3
0. Introduction 0.1 Description of the machine ......................... 0-1

0.2 Appropriate use .......................................... 0-1
0.3 General instructions ................................... 0-1
1. Safety information 1.1 General instructions ................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Symbols ...................................................... 1-1
1.2 Safety regulations ....................................... 1-1
1.3 Regulations, standards ............................... 1-3
1.4 Connecting conditions ................................ 1-3
1.5 Labelling, warning signs ............................. 1-3
1.6 Trained personnel ....................................... 1-4
2. Transport, installation 2.1 General instructions ................................... 2-1

2.2 Safety precautions ...................................... 2-1
2.3 Regulations -Standards .............................. 2-2
2.3.1 Load handling facility
electrical machine ....................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Load handling facility cooling units ............. 2-2
2.4 Scope of supply .......................................... 2-2
2.5 Packaging ................................................... 2-3
2.6 Transport .................................................... 2-4
2.6.1 Transport damages .................................. 2-4a
2.6.2 Intermediate Storage ................................ 2-4a
2.7 Assembly .................................................... 2-5
2.7.1 General instructions ................................... 2-5
2.7.2 Safety precautions ...................................... 2-5
2.7.3 Preparation of assembly ............................. 2-6
2.7.4 Placing in position ....................................... 2-7
2.7.5 Securing device for transport ..................... 2-8
2.7.6 Coupling ...................................................... 2-9
2.7.7 Alignment .................................................. 2-10
2.8 Connections ............................................. 2-11
2.8.1 General instructions ................................. 2-11
2.8.2 Safety precautions .................................... 2-11
2.8.3 Junction box ............................................. 2-12
2.8.3.1 Alteration of terminal box .......................... 2-13
I
SCH850 2710_EN
Table of Contents
Chapter Page
2.8.4 Insulation resistance ................................. 2-15

2.8.5 Drying ........................................................ 2-16
2.8.6 Electrical connection ................................. 2-17
2.8.6.1 Earthing ..................................................... 2-18
2.8.7 Connections to monitoring / auxiliary units 2-19
2.8.8 Standstill heating ....................................... 2-19
2.9 Cooling system ......................................... 2-19
2.10 Lubrication ............................................... 2-20
3. Initial Operation 3.1 General information .................................... 3-1

3.2 Safety instruction ........................................ 3-1
3.3 Inspection, mechanically ............................. 3-1
3.3.1 Fixture ......................................................... 3-1
3.3.2 Alignment .................................................... 3-1
3.4 Inspection, electrical ................................... 3-2
3.4.1 Insulation resistance ................................... 3-2
3.4.2 Electrical connection, machine ................... 3-3
3.4.3 Monitoring / auxiliary units .......................... 3-4
3.4.4 Checking of the rotation direction ............... 3-4
3.5 Starting-up of the machine .......................... 3-5
3.5.1 General instructions .................................... 3-5
3.5.2 Safety instructions ....................................... 3-5
3.5.3 Switching the machine ON .......................... 3-5
3.5.4 Switching the machine OFF ........................ 3-6
4. Operation, Handling 4.1 General information .................................... 4-1

4.2 Safety instructions ....................................... 4-1
4.3 Operational behaviour of the machine ........ 4-1
4.4 Switching the machine OFF. ....................... 4-1
5. Malfunction, trouble shooting 5.1 General instructions .................................... 5-1

5.2 Safety instructions ....................................... 5-1
5.3 Malfunctions, electrical ................................ 5-2
5.4 Malfunctions, mechanical ............................ 5-3
5.5 Machine is switched off by safety chain ...... 5-4
II
SCH 850 2410_EN_20160704
Table of Contents
Chapter Page
6. Maintenance 6.1 General information .................................... 6-1

6.2 Safety instructions ...................................... 6-1
6.3 Bearings ..................................................... 6-2
6.3.1 Slide bearings ............................................. 6-2
6.3.1.1 Inspection of oil level and oil change
Slide bearings ............................................. 6-2
6.3.1.2 Turning (rotating) of the shaft ...................... 6-2
6.4 Cooling system ........................................... 6-3
6.4.1 Cleaning ...................................................... 6-3
6.5 Junction box and
Cable connections ...................................... 6-4
6.6 Alignment machine ..................................... 6-5
6.7 Labelling, Information signs ........................ 6-6
6.8 Disposal ...................................................... 6-6
6.9 Revision ...................................................... 6-6
6.10 Maintenance plan ....................................... 6-7
7. Repair 7.1 General instructions .................................... 7-1

7.2 Safety instructions ...................................... 7-2
7.3 Replacement parts ..................................... 7-2
III
SCH8500211_GL_OK_EN_20150805
Table of Contents
Chapter Page
8. Ignition protection class 8.1 Assembly .................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Placing in position ....................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Connecting .................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 Protective measures against
overheating ................................................. 8-3
8.1.4 External ventilation ...................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Standstill heating ......................................... 8-3
8.2 Maintenance and Repair ............................. 8-4
8.2.1 Painting ....................................................... 8-4
8.3 Spare parts ................................................. 8-4
9. Appendix 9.1 Instruction Sheets ....................................... 9-1

9.1.1 Torque settings for
fixing screws ............................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Torque settings for
electrical connections .................................. 9-2
9.1.3 Height expansion ........................................ 9-2
9.1.4 Limit value ................................................... 9-3
9.1.5 Preservation ................................................ 9-4
9.1.6 Placing on steel foundation ......................... 9-5
9.1.7 Placing on foundation blocks ...................... 9-6
9.1.8 Installation of the foundation slabs .............. 9-7
9.2 Radial, angular and axial offset ................... 9-8
10. Publications of rules 10.1 Table of applied standards

and regulations ......................................... 10-1
Appendix (optional)
IV
SCH8500211_B_OK_EN_20150506
Technical specifications
A.1 Dimensional drawing
A-1
SCH 901 0001_EN
A.2 Data sheet
A-2
SCH 901 0002_EN
Datenblatt Motor
Data Sheet Motor

Anzahl / Quantity :1 ITEM-No.:340-MK-01
Elektrische Daten / Electrical data Allgemeine Daten / General Data

Bemessungsleistung Maßzeichnung
( kW ): 2300 : 8240473
Rated output Outline drawing
Betriebsart Bauform
: S1 : IMB3
Duty Type of construction
Bemessungsspannung Schutzart
( V ): 13200 : IP55
Rated voltage Degree of protection
Spannungstoleranz Gewicht cirka 32,2
: ±10% ( t ):
Voltage tolerance Weight approx. 32,2
Schaltung Einschaltart direkt
: Y :
Connection Starting d.o.l.
Bemessungsstrom Aufstellungshöhe
( A ): 144 ( m ): ≤1000
Rated current Altitude (above sea level)
Frequenz Kühlart
( Hz ): 60 : IC81W
Frequency Cooling
Frequenztoleranz Drehrichtung links ( auf DE gesehen )
: ±2% :
Frequency tolerance Direction of rotation ccw ( viewed from DE to NDE )
Bemessungsdrehzahl ( min-1 ): Schalldruckpegel
358 LpfA ( dB ): 80 +3
Rated speed ( rpm ): Sound pressure level
Last / Load 100% Laufgüte
: VDI2056 G
Wirkungsgrad Balance quality
( % ): 96
Efficiency Läuferauswuchtung ohne Passfeder
:
Leistungsfaktor Rotor balancing without key
: 0,73
Power factor Umgebungstemperatur im Betrieb
: -20 oC ≤ Tamb ≤ +50 oC
Anzugsstrom Ambient temperature in operation
( % FLC ): 500
Locked rotor current Standards
: EN60034, IEC60034
Anzugsmoment Standards
( % FLT ): 55
Locked rotor torque Kühlmedium / Cooling medium
Kippmoment Kühlmittel Wasser
( % FLT ): 190 :
Breakdown torque Coolant water
Thermische Klasse / Kühlmittelmenge 3
( m /h ): 14,8
Ausnutzung nach thermischer Klasse Amount of coolant
: 155/130; (F/B)
Thermal class / Kühlmitteltemperatur
: ≤39 oC
Exploitation depending on thermal class Coolant temperature
Zündschutz / Protection Statischer Druckabfall
( bar ): 0,8
Ex-Schutz Static pressure drop
II 2G Ex pxe II T3
Explosion protection Betriebsdruck
( bar ): 9,5
Baumusterprüfbescheinigung Operating pressure
: TÜV 07 ATEX 553989
Prototype test certificate Beschilderung / Labeling
Zertifizierungsstelle Sprache englisch
: 0102 :
Certifying body Language English
Anstrich / Paint Lagerung DE / NDE / Bearing DE / NDE
Anstrichsystem K2-Anstrich Lager Gleitlager
: :
Paint finish Paint systems "K2" Bearings sleeve bearing
Farbton Lagerungsart Loslager DE
: RAL5012 :
Shade Type of bearing Floating bearing DE
Isolation Lager DE + NDE
:
Insulation Bearings DE + NDE
Schmiermittel Öl
:
Lubricant Oil
ISO VG68
Lagerung DE / Bearing DE
Lager DE
: EFEZLB-22-280 INSUL.
Bearing DE
1. Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 2000
Weitere Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 8000
( l ): 23
E20161014A20170622N10
„Die technischen Daten in diesem Dokument sind berechnete Daten und unterliegen der Toleranz gemäß EN60034-1, sofern nicht anders vereinbart.“
"The technical details in this document are calculated values and are subject to the tolerances fixed in EN 60034-1, if not otherwise agreed."
Abt. / Dept. PS D
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
Datenblatt Motor
Data Sheet Motor

Anzahl / Quantity :1
Lagerung NDE / Bearing NDE

Lager NDE
: EFKZLB-22-280 INSUL.
Bearing NDE
1. Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 2000
weitere Ölwechsel nach
( h ): 8000
( l ): 23
Hauptanschlusskasten / Main Terminal Box
Anschlusskastenlage links
:
Position of terminal box left
Kabeleinführung Gewinde / thread
:
Cable entries 1x NPT 3"
Überwachungseinrichtungen / Monitoring devices
Wicklung PT100 9; 3 Leiter
:
Winding PT100 9; 3 wires
Warnung
130 oC
Warning
Abschaltung
140 oC
Tripping
Lager DE + NDE 2x (2 PT100; 3 Leiter)
Bearings DE + NDE 2x (2 PT100; 3 wires)
Warnung
95 oC
Warning
Abschaltung
100 oC
Tripping
Zubehör / Accessories
Stillstandsheizung
: 460V; 4800W; 6,03A
Space heater
Abt. / Dept. PS D
KU7840G-PL20 44063601
A.3 Connection diagram
A-3
SCH 901 0003_EN
Introduction
0.1 Description of the machine This is a three-phase-asynchronous motor with squirrel

cage rotor. In this manual it is called machine.
Technical information exceeding the scope of the Reference
Manual can be requested from the manufacturer of the
machine.
0.2 Appropriate The machines are to be operated in compliance with the

use, waiver of liability dimensioning data indicates on the power rating plate.
We do not take over liability for damages and breakdowns
caused by wrong installation, omission of necessary
maintenance and cleaning works, inappropriate transport,
and non-observance of the operating instructions or improper
repair.
The original spare parts are especially designed and tested
for this machine.
We recommend only purchasing the spare parts and
accessories directly from the manufacturer.
The installation and application of foreign products may
possibly cause negative changes of constructively specified
characteristics of the machine and affect safety for people,
machine and other material assets.
Furthermore, the manufacturer shall not be liable for damages
which result from the use of spare parts and accessories
which are not delivered by the manufacturer.
Any unauthorized modifications and changes of the machine
are not permitted for safety reasons and exclude the
manufacturer’s liability for consequential damages.
0.3 General Instructions This Reference Manual makes it easier for the operator to
transport, install, start-up and service the machine safely
and properly.
We reserve the right to technical alterations due to further
development of the machine referring to this Reference
Manual.
Many illustrations and drawings in this Reference Manual
are simplified versions. Because of improvements and
alterations already made, it can be possible that illustrations
do not exactly match with the relevant machine.
All copyrights on this Reference Manual and its including

drawings and belonging documents are reserved.
0-1
SCH 850 0214_EN
Safety information
1. Safety information
1.1 General information Before starting any works referring transport, assembly,
commissioning, operation, repair, and maintenance, read
the Reference Manual and follow the given instructions!
1.1.1 Symbols There are four symbols used in this manual which must be
especially noted:
Danger
Indicates dangerous situations - including possible personal
injury.
Warning
Warns of electrical voltage.
Caution
Points to the fact that damage to the electrical machine and/
or to the auxiliary equipment can occur.
Points to useful advice and explanations.
1.2 Safety instructions Any service works on the machine or the electrical
connections of the machine may be carried out only by
qualified electricians (→chapter 1.6) and according to the
applicable
- (DIN) EN-standards
- IEC-standards
- Transport regulations
- Installation and maintenance instructions.
Also refer to the guidelines on safety and commissioning
(→ chapter S1).
1-1
SCH 850 0213_EN
Safety information
Pole changeable motors may only be switched over

from a small pole number to a larger pole number
when the speed has been fallen below the
synchronous speed of the larger pole number.
Measures for functional safety and for complying with the

temperature class
- For keeping the temperature class, the machine must be

operated with a functionally checked, current controlled
protective device which monitors all three phase
conductors.
This protective device, which is set on the rated current
of the machine, must switch off at the 1.2 fold of the rated
current within 2 hours or earlier. With the 1.05 fold of the
rated current, the machine may not switch off within 2
hours.
- Additionally, the machine is to be equipped with 3
temperature sensors in the windings (one per phase ) if it
is used in a S2- to S10 supply network and on the
frequency converter.
In this case, PTC or PT100 can be used as temperature
sensors.
- These temperature sensors in the windings have to be
connected to a circuit breaker which is functionally
checked by an authorised testing organisation.
During the operation in compliance with the rated values
the three-phase motor must not be switched off by the
circuit breaker.
1-2
SCH 850 0213_EN
Safety information
1.3 Regulations, standards Any service works on the machine or the electrical
qualified electricians (→chapter. 1.6) and according to the
applicable
- IEC-standards
(→ chapter S1).
1.4 Connection specifications Connect the machine according to the applicable guidelines
issued by the local power supply companies, the (DIN) EN
standards as well as the IEC directives.
Any work carried out on the electrical connections

of the electric machine may only be carried out by
professional electricians.
1.5 Labels, Observe all instructions which are directly attached to the
warning signs machine, e.g. rotation direction arrows, information signs,
labels or warning signs, and make sure that they are always
legible . Please find power rating plates and warning signs in
the Appendix.
1-3
SCH 85 0 0215_(d)_EN
Safety information
1.6 Qualified personnel These operating instructions only contain the information
that is necessary for the machines to be used by qualified
personnel in accordance with their intended purpose. Those
responsible for plant safety must ensure the following:
- The basic planning work for the system and all work
relating to transportation, assembly, installation,
commissioning, maintenance and repairs is carried out by
qualified personnel and checked by responsible, suitably
skilled personnel.
- The operating instructions and machine documentation
are always available
- The technical data and specifications relating to installation,

connection, ambient and operating conditions are taken
into account at all times.
- The system-specific installation and safety regulations
are observed.
- Personal protective equipment is used.
- Work on or in the vicinity of these machines by unqualified

persons is prohibited
Commissioning and operation of this machine are to be

carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of the
safety information in this Instruction Manual, a „qualified
person“ is someone who is authorized to energize, ground,
and tag equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with
established safety procedures.
1-4
SCH 850 0215_EN
Transport, Installation
2. Transport, Installation
Only use the provided transport eyes for transporting and
2.1 General information lifting the machine. Load handling attachments and sling
devices must be in good order and condition and may only be
fastened to the provided transport eyes.
Make sure that only those people lift and transport the
machine, who are qualified and
- have read the Reference Manual,
- have understood the safety regulations,
accident prevention regulation, and the instructions
for the transport of the machine,
- are familiar with the lifting equipment, the required
load handling attachments and the sling devices.
2.2 Safety instructions Follow the safety instructions for lifting and
transporting the machine!
- Use lifting equipment, load handling attach-
ments, and sling devices of sufficient load
capacity (Weight → power rating plate).
- Do not knot the steel rope and the steel chain.
- Do not knot the fibre ropes together.
- Do not twist the ropes.
- Turn out twisted chains before lifting the ma-
chine.
- Do not bend the rope on the squeezed clamp.
- Grommets, rope eyes, lifting rings and other
lifting components have to be freely move-
able on the load hook.
- Do not hang loads above people.
Possibly provided auxiliary lifting eyes, e.g. on the
ventilation hood, the cooling equipment etc., are
only suitable for lifting the respective individual
component. (Also refer to the guidelines on safety
and commissioning → chapter S1)
2-1
SCH 850 0216_EN
2.3 Regulations -Standards Any service works on the machine or the electrical
qualified electricians (→chapter. 1.6) and according to the
applicable
- IEC-standards
(→ chapter S1)
2.3.1 Load handling device Lift and transport the machine with the suitable lifting
electrical machine equipment/transport equipment (specified weight→
power rating plate)! At least four transport eyes
must be used for transport.
- Fasten the sling devices only on the transport eyes/
transport lugs!
- Fasten the sling devices that way that no parts can
be damaged. Use lifting beams, if necessary.
- Use sling devices of the same length and pay
attention to the uniform distribution of load!
2.3.2 Load handling device Lift and transport cooling units with suitable lifting/
cooling units transport devices
( Weight data → power rating plate)!
- Disassembly of the fan hood/protective roof (optional).
- Fasten the sling devices only on the transport eyes/
bollards.
- Fasten the sling devices so that no parts can be
damaged!
- Use sling devices of the same length and pay
attention to the uniform distribution of load.
2.4 Scope of delivery The reference manual is included in the scope of delivery.
2-2
SCH850 2720_EN
2.5 Packaging The machine is packed as delivered depending on

- the transport route,
- the storage conditions at the customer’s site,
- the customer’s requirements.
Types of package:
- Machine mounted on vibration dampers and bearing

protection
- Machine mounted on vibration dampers and wood
pallet and bearing protection
- Machine mounted on vibration dampers, wood crate
and bearing protection
- Closed wooden box suitable for sea transport
( → Figure 1).
Transport the machine only with installed securing
devices or on vibration dampers.
Legend:
Keep dry
Top
Figure 1
Fragile
Centre of mass
Fasten here
Image 1 → Example for packaging
2-3
SCH 850 0217_EN
2.6 Transport Observe safety and commissioning instructions

while lifting and transporting the machine! (→ chapter
3 S1).
The electrical machine and cooling unit must be
transported separately.
1
The electric machine must be provided with a
protective cover during transport to prevent dirt and
moisture penetrating into the machine.
The protective cover must be removed before the
2 2
cooling unit is attached.
Fasten sling devices, e.g.:
- Wire ropes (1)
- Fibre ropes (1),
- Steel cables (1)
to the transport eyes / bollards (2) and the load hook (3) (open
the transport packing, if necessary).
Unload the machine/cooling unit using a suitable lifting unit.

Put the machine carefully down, to avoid damages
on the machine, the bearings and other components.
Figure 1
Observe the permitted floor and ceiling load-bearing capacity
for unloading.
After unloading the machine/cooling unit,
- remove the packaging (depends on the type of
shipment),
- check the machine/cooling unit for damage,
- check that all accessories are completely delivered
as listed on the delivery note.
Transport the machine/cooling unit to the assembly site or
the store using a suitable lifting / transport device.
For transporting the machine/cooling unit to the site by truck,
- lift it on the loading platform using an appropriate
lifting device,
- and use tensioning ropes to secure it against slipping/
sliding.
Figure 1 → Fastening example for electrical machine/

cooling unit
2-4
SCH850 2721_EN
2.6.1 Transport damages Document all transport damage and report it to the haulier,
the insurance company, and the manufacturer!
2.6.2 Intermediate Storage

Store the machine in its transport packing in a dry, heatable,
and vibration-less room and protect it from mechanical
damages.
Intermediate storage of the machine without the cover is not
permitted.
After longer down times of the machine (longer than
one year), check the bearings for corrosion damages.
Already the smallest corrosion damage reduces
the lifetime of the bearings.
2 - 4a
SCH850 2721_EN
2.7 Assembly
2.7.1 General information The machine is designed for a maximum ambient temperature
range and an altitude in accordance with the data sheet, in so
far as no other agreements have been reached.
( →power rating plate).
The site where the machine is to be placed must provide
good ventilation, so that the temperature of the cooling airflow
does not exceed the permitted ambient temperature. The
cooling system of the machine must not be hindered.
Machines with attached cooling units may only be

operated as complete unit.
If the machine is used in an other position than the transport

position, it must be turned out of the transport position.
For that, it will be required to turn the machine using a further
load handling attachment as well as ropes and shackles
which are hooked into in the bottom transport eyes (drive
side).
If there is no further load handling attachment available, put
the machine carefully down horizontally on prism timbers or
timber bars and secure them with wood wedges against
rolling away, if necessary.
Never place the machine on the hood of the opposite side.
2.7.2 Safety instructions Any service works on the machine or the electrical
applicable
- IEC-standards
(Also refer to the guidelines on safety and commissioning (→
chapter S1)
We recommend to order our mechanics’ technical
assistance.
2-5
SCH 850 0218_EN
2.7.3 Preparation of installation We recommend a rigid and vibration-free foundation design

according to DIN 4024, Part 2, to prevent damage while
standing still. When dimensioning the foundation, consider
L2 ~ 1000 that the resonant frequency of the system (with motor) is
25-30% above the rotational frequency.
~ 800
Additionally, make sure that the distance to the double supply

frequency has to be
L1
25 -30 %. Please find further hints and evaluation criterions

also in IEC / EN 60034-14 or ISO 10816.
~ 800
Check the foundation dimensions by means of

the dimensional drawing of the machine and the
Legend:
foundation plan and make sure that
– Required work space for installation
and maintenance
- enough space is available for installation, mainte-
L1 – Width of the machine → Technical
details nance and repair work ( → Image 1),
L2 – Length of the machine → Technical
details - enough space is available for intake and exhaust
of cooling air,
- no thermal short circuit exists between the sucked
in and blown out cooling air.
Make any required correction to the foundation and

clean any processed surfaces.
1 Transport the machine to the site using a suitable
lifting/transport device and remove the vibration
dampers ( → Image 2).
The vibration dampers protect the machine from

1 transport shocks. Remove them only before starting
the installation.
Image 2 After removing the vibration dampers, send them

back to the manufacturer.
Image 2 → Example for fastening
2-6
SCH 850 0218_EN
2.7.4 Placing in position The following foundations are suitable for the
machine: steel foundations, foundation blocks,
concrete foundations with cast-in steel plates which
ensure the concussion free, low-vibration and
torsion-stiff operation of the machine.
( → chapter 9.1).
Place the machine on the plane, clean foundation.

Level up the machine horizontally, vertically and
axially (use shims, if necessary) and fix it with
hexagon head screws. (→ chapter 2.7.7 Alignment;
Dimension of hexagon head screw → hexagon
head screw; tightening torques → chapter 9.1)
Mechanics, installation material, e.g. shims,

levelling spindles, fixing screws etc., can be
ordered at the manufacturer’s.
2-7
SCH 8500219_EN
2.7.5 Securing device Securing devices for transport protect the bearings from
damages.
There is an information sign on the machine that indicates the
type and the extent of the securing devices.
Remove the securing devices after placing the

machine!
Hard paper securing strip

- Remove the screws (1)
- Remove sealing holder (2) in direction coupling.
- Remove the srews (3 and 4).
- Remove the upper cover of bearing housing (6) with
shims (6a if avaible). Storage the cover on a clean
place.
- Remove the screws (7) and remove the upper part
bearing (8).
- Pull the hard paper strip (9) from the shaft (10).
- Place the upper part of bearing (8) and tighten with
srews (7), apply the sealing material on the sealing
face. Install the top half of the housing (6) with shims
(6a) and fasten it with the corresponding screws.
- Put sealing material on the sealing faces between
seal ring holder (2) and bearing housing (6) and
tighten with srews (1).
Image 1
Description of bearing (→ Chap. 6.3).
Image 1 → Hard paper securing strip for the machine

equipped with slide bearing
2-8
SCH8500220_GL_EN
2.7.6 Coupling The rotors are dynamically balanced.

The shaft end of the rotor is balanced with full, half or without
fitment key, depending on the type of balancing, and labelled
according to applicable standard.
F ≅ full key,
H ≅ half key,
N ≅ without key.
Balance rotor with full key → Balance coupling with

open fitment key slot
Rotor balanced with half key → Balance coupling
unkeyed.In case of shorter driven end element,
remove the part of the fitment key that rises the
driven end element and the shaft outline.
Before fitting on the coupling, remove the corrosion protection

from the shaft end using an appropriate cleaning agent (e.g.:
benzine).
Do not emery or rub the corrosion protection!
Grease or oil all seat surfaces slightly.

Warm up the coupling according to the manufacturer’s
instructions and shrink it on the cold shaft end.
Avoid impacts and hard bumps when fitting the

coupling. You might damage the bearing and/or the
shaft and exclude the manufacturer’s liability.
Use the thread at the shaft end for fitting the coupling
on (threaded spindle/pressure plate).
2-9
SCH8500221_EN
2.7.7 Alignment Align the machine precisely according to the ready-aligned

driven machine axially and radially. or that, use appropriate
measuring tools, tools (hydraulic cylinders, levelling spindles,
jacking bolts) and shims.
If the machine is installed in chemically aggressi-
ve atmosphere or outdoor, → use shims made of
rustproof material.
Place the hydraulic cylinder only at the points (1)
and lift the machine.
1
If jacking screws are applied, use the provided drill-
1 hole in the machine base.
Image 1 → Example for alignment
For Axial backlash see outline drawing (→ chapter A.1).

The indicator for axial backlash (2) shows the „magnetic
1 centre“ and is set in factory. Set the rotor that way that
1 the indicator for axial backlash and the groove (3) are one
above the other. The groove width defines the permissible
Image 1 axial backlash.
Check the correct reading of the indicator before the machine
alignment. For that, turn the shaft (4) to both directions and
move it axially until it attaches the shaft shoulder. The centre
point between both endpoints is identical with the position
of the magnetic centre of the rotor.
2 To make sure that this centre position of the rotor is ensured
also during operation, it is required to use a coupling that
3 limits the axial backlash.
Set the distance between both coupling halves according to
the specifications given by the manufacturer of the coupling.
Please find the permissible radial, angular, as well as axial
offsets in the Annex (→ chapter 9.2).
4
To achieve these conditions, consider the rise of the machine
Image 2
under warmed-up conditions when adjusting the machine
under cold conditions.
Check the alignment under warmed-up conditions.
For the height expansion of the electrical machine see Ap-
pendix (→ chapter 9.1.3).
The shaft may only be cranked after some oil has
been filled through the oil filler cap into the bearing
cover.
Image 2 → Example for axial backlash indicator
2 - 10
SCH 850 0222_GL_EN_20170103
2.8 Connections
2.8.1 General information Connect the machine according to the applicable guidelines
issued by the local power supply companies, the (DIN) EN
standards as well as the IEC directives.
2.8.2 Safety instructions Any service works on the machine or the electrical
applicable
- IEC-standards
(→ chapter S1).
2 - 11
SCH 850 0223_EN
2.8.3 Terminal box Before connecting the power supply cable,

- compare the values of the available supply voltage with
the details on the power rating plate.
- Match the connection cable to the rated current.
- Check the supply lines to the machine and fix them.
For connecting the terminal box, additionally to the

specified details on the power rating plate, pay also
attention to the wiring diagrams, glued into the cover
of the terminal box, which show the terminal
designation and the terminal connections.
See outline drawing terminal box (→ chapter A1).
Risk of injury due to accidental electric arc!

The predetermined break point intentionally bleeds
off the explosion energy in case an accidental arc
occurs.
People are strictly forbidden to stay within the area
of the machine during operation.
2 - 12
SCH_HS_EN_20150430
2.8.3.1 Terminal box For turning the terminal box contact the
SCHORCH-Service.
SERVICE
Commissioning / Maintenance / Spare Parts / Repairs
+49 (0)2166 925 - 300
service@schorch.de
2 - 13
SCH_SERV_EN_20150430
2.8.3.2 Remounting the For remounting the terminal box on the

terminal box on the opposite side of the machine contact the
opposite side of the SCHORCH-Service.
machine
SERVICE
+49 (0)2166 925 - 300
service@schorch.de
2 - 14
SCH_SERV_EN_20150430
2.8.4 Insulation resistance Before the commissioning of the machine, measure the
insulation resistance
– between all individual phases and
– between each phase and earth!
The measured voltage must be equal or lower than the
machine voltage!
Do not touch the terminal clamps during and after
the measurement. The terminal clamps may con-
duct high voltage!
After the test, connect the terminal clamps to earth
for a short time (5 seconds).
The insulation resistance can be measured with
the connecting cables connected.
The measured insulation resistance shows whether
the winding of a machine is dry enough.
A winding is seen to be dry enough when the insulation

resistance reaches the values listed in the table.
The insulation resistance depends on temperature. The

insulation resistance, which has to be kept at least, results
from the rule that the insulation resistance
– doubles when the temperature is decreased by 10
° Kelvin, or
– halves when the temperature is increased by 10
°Kelvin.
If the specified insulation resistance (take notice of

the rule) is not reached, disconnect the connecting
cables and repeat the measurement. If the required
insulation resistance is not reached repeatedly
despite the new measurement, dry the windings
before commissioning (→ Chapter. 2.8.5).
The following insulation resistances apply for the windings:
Electrical
Operational
machine Winding temperature
temperature of the
measurement when cold
windings
voltage
15 °C 25 °C 35 °C 75 °C
0,5 kV 30 MΩ 15 MΩ 8 MΩ 0,5 MΩ
≤ 1 kV 60 MΩ 30 MΩ 15 MΩ 1 MΩ
3 kV 240 MΩ 120 MΩ 60 MΩ 4 MΩ
6 kV 500 MΩ 250 MΩ 125 MΩ 7 MΩ
10 kV 1000 MΩ 500 MΩ 250 MΩ 15 MΩ
2 - 15
SCH 850 0225_EN_20160912
2.8.5 Drying During longer transport periods or longer down-times,

condensed water can develop within the machine and the
insulation resistance of the winding can fall to impermissibly
low values.
If a standstill heating is delivered with the machine, switch it
on and dry the windings of the machine until the permissible
insulation resistance is reached (→ Insulation resistance).
Drying by current:
The winding is dried using single-phase alternating current.
The heating current shall be about 50% of the rated current.
Apply equal loads to all three phases, and the stator
temperature shall reach 80°C, and be effective for several
hours.
The winding can also be dried in a drying oven (several hours
at about 80 °C).
2 - 16
SCH8500225_EN
2.8.6 Electrical connection When connecting the motor, make sure to carry out the
connections in the junction box carefully . Fasten the nuts
of the connecting screws using the specified torque settings
→ Chapter 9.1.2.
When connecting the power supply cables act very carefully.
Pay special attention to creeping distances and clearances
according to the applicable standards. Use the delivered
cable bushings properly which are provided for strain relief
or as rotation prevention for the power supply cables. Not
used cable inlets must be closed by a tested and certified
thread plug.
In case of explosion proof motors with special specificati-
ons (indentified by an „x“ behind the test number) keep the
parameters specified in the test certificate.
The room where the machine is installed has to be connected
via suitable cable entries or tube systems which comply with
the requirements of the applicable standards and for which
a separate test certificate is provided.
Not used openings shall be closed according to the valid
standards.
2 - 17-a
SCH 850 1026_(d)_(e)_EN_20160920
2.8.6 Electrical connection Connect the connecting cable according to the

standards and regulations, as well as the regulations
of the local power supply companies.
Use earth cable, plastic insulated cables, as well as
compression cable lugs for the electrical connection and
follow the instructions given by the manufacturers of the
cable or cable end sleeves.
The connection cable cross-section depends on the type of
laying, rated voltage, rated current and the short-circuit
power of the machine.
Align the cable ends with the pressed on cable lugs according
to the dimensional drawing of the terminal box
(→ chapter A1) and the connection diagram (→ chapter A3)
and connect it.
Insulate the cable lugs including the transition areas to the

wire insulation wirh thick-walled shrink hose.
The connection cable, i.e. the cable ends, may not

exert any bending or torsional forces to the
connecting bolts during and after completion of the
cable installation.
tightening torques (→ chapter 9.1.2)
Risk of injury due to accidental electric arc!

The predetermined break point intentionally bleeds
off the explosion energy in case an accidental arc
occurs.
People are strictly forbidden to stay within the area
of the machine during operation.
All contact faces of the cover of the terminal box

and the bottom part of the terminal box may not
show any damage.
Before the cover of the terminal box is mounted on
the terminal box, make sure that the seal fits
correctly.
2 - 17
SCH_HS_MD_EN_20150430
2.8.6.1 Earthing Connect the system earth to the earth terminal of the machine.
(see dimensional drawing)
Electrical machine Cross-sectional area of

reference current the earthing conductor (Cu)
25 A 4 mm2
25 A - 40 A 10 mm2
40 A - 100 A 25 mm2
100 A - 200 A 50 mm2
200 A - 315 A 120 mm2
315 A - 400 A 150 mm2
400 A - 630 A 185 mm2
> 630 A 2x150 mm2
2 - 18
SCH900 226_EN
2.8.7 Connections to monitoring / Connect the machine according to the actual operating
auxiliary units diagram which can be found glued into the housing cover.
Please find the max. warning and switch-off values

in the Appendix (→ Chapter 9.1).
2.8.8 Standstill heating Connect the standstill heating according to its performance
and rated voltage.
Design the control unit that way that it
- switches on the standstill heating after the
machine has been switched off,
- and switches off the heating before the machine
is switched on.
2.9 Cooling system Air-water The protective cover must be removed before the
cooler cooling unit is attached.
Mount the cooling water connection (water inlet/outlet)

properly.
Connect the potential earthing (if provided by the

manufacturer) between
- cooler and cooler hood
- cooler and motor hood
properly.
Check the clamping bolts of the cooler for tightness and

retighten them, if necessary.
Fill the cooler with fluid and bleed it via the bleeder screws.
Repeat the bleeding after a short operating time and

bleed the system, if required. If there are several
cooling elements, bleed them separately.
Check the cooler with specified water pressure for leaks and
replace leaking washers.
Seals can be ordered from the manufacturer of the

motors.
The machine is only allowed to be started up when
all parts of the machine are checked for leaks and
the trouble-free water pass is ensured.
2 - 19
SCH850 2734_LW_DE
2.10 Lubrication
2.10.1 Oil lubrication for
slide bearings Fill the slide bearings with oil.
- Unscrew the oil filler cap (1) and fill the sliding bearing with
oil until the middle of the oil inspection glass (2).
- Screw in the oil filler cap.
For oil viscosity and oil quantity see machine rating

1 plate or dimensional sketch.
Figure 1
2 - 20
SCH850 2734_GL_EN
Initial Operation
3. Initial Operation
3.1 General information The commissioning of the machine is carried out after the
installation and after the repair of the machine.
Make sure, that the installation and the operating con-
ditions comply with the specified data on the data sheet
(→ chapter A.2).
3.2 Safety instructions Any service works on the machine or the electrical connec-
tions of the machine may be carried out only by qualified
electricians (→ chapter 1.6) and according to the applicable
- IEC-standards
(→ chapter S1).
3.3 Inspection, mechanically
3.3.1 Fixture Check the fixing screws of the motor for tightness.
For the tightening torques refer to the Appendix
(→ chapter 9.1)
3.3.2 Alignment Check the alignment of the electrical machine in relation to

the aligned driven machine and record it.
(→ chapter 2.7.7 Alignment).
3-1
SCH 850 0240_EN_20170112
Initial Operation
3.4 Inspection, electrical

3.4.1 Insulation resistance Make sure that the machine is electrically discon-
nected from the power supply!
Secure it against accidental restart and indicate
this by a warning sign!
Check for dead circuit!
Connect the winding to earth and short circuit it!
Cover or cordon off any neighbouring live compo-
nents!
Measure and record the insulation resistance of the indivi-

dual windings.
– between all individual phases and
– between each phase and earth
The measured insulation resistance depending on the tem-

perature of the windings must show the values listed in the
table for the windings(→ Chapter 2.8.4 ).
If the required insulation resistance is not rea-

ched, dry the windings before commissioning
(→ Chapter. 2.8.5).
3-2
SCH 850 0240_EN_20160912
Initial Operation
3.4.2 Electrical connection, Check the cable connections for tightness.

machine (→ chapter 2.8.6).
For torque settings see Appendix ( → Chap 9.1).
Connecting cables and cable ends may not exert
any bending or torsional forces to the connecting
bolts!
Check the distances for air clearance before

installing the cover.
Pay attention to the minimum distance (→ Chapter.
2.8.6)
Keep the following values:
at 500 V = 8 mm; for 660 V = 12.5 mm;
at 1 kV = 13 mm; at 3 kV = 32 mm;
at 6 kV = 63 mm; at 10 kV = 100 mm;
Check the sealing of the cable entry for correct fit.
Follow the instructions given by the manufacturers

of the cables or cable end sleeves.
- Check, if the junction box is clean inside.

- Put the cover on and screw together (pay attention to the
locking elements).
- Check, if the earth connections and the connections for
the compensation of potential are created properly.
- Close unused entries and tighten the sealing elements.
The classes for explosion protection and the

protection system have to considered.
3-3
SCH 850 0241_EN_20150925
Initial Operation
3.4.3 Monitoring / Check the connections and the wiring of the monitoring and
Auxiliary units auxiliary units according to the functional diagram (→ cover
terminal box) (→ 2.8.7).
Switch the measuring equipments on and check the func-
tioning of the connected monitoring units.
3.4.4 Checking of the rotation Disengage the driven machine according to the instructions
direction given by the manufacturer of the coupling.
Check if the rotor can be rotated manually.
Switch the machine on and check that the direction of rotation
refers to the direction arrow on the driving side.
Switch the machine off.
The relevant direction of rotation results from the following
stator connection:
Connection L1, L2, L3 Direction of rotation

view from the D-end
U1 - V1 - W1 Clockwise
W1 - V1 - U1 Counterclockwise
When the machine is checked for the correct three-

phase field, only the examiner may stay in the
dangerous area of the machine/driven machine.
Switch the machine on and check the direction of
rotation. Do not restart coasting-down machines.
(Wait until the machine stands still).
For further measures:

Make sure that the machine is electrically discon-
nents!
3-4
SCH 850 0241_EN
Initial Operation
3.5 Commissioning of the Check/inspect the following items during the commissioning:
machine
- Is the machine allowed to be switched on?
3.5.1 General instructions - Is the machine mechanically/electrically checked
and o.k.?
- Are the air inlets free and are the cooling fins or
cooling pipes free from pollution?
- Are the oil-lubricated bearings filled? (Lubricant
quantity/lubricant quality → power rating plate/
lubrication plate)
3.5.2 Safety instructions The commissioning of the machine may only be
done by skilled people who have been authorised
by the responsible person of the plant.
Observe the safety regulations!
Before starting up the machine,
- complete the works on the machine,
- install coverings, protective hoods,
- undo the protective measures carried out (earthing
and short-circuiting of the connecting cable, securing
the machine against switching on, etc.). Also refer
to the guidelines on safety and commissioning (→
chapter S1)
3.5.3 Switching the machine ON Start up the machine without load.

Switch the machine on.
Watch the following items and record:
During starting up
- Current consumption,
- Voltage,
- Vibrations (running smoothness),
- Noise.
1 After finished start up procedure

- Voltage,
- Noise.
- Storage temperature (DE/NDE),
- Winding temperature,
Figure 1 - axial position of the rotor on the axial backlash
indicator (1).
After the start up has been completed, load the driven

machine.
3-5
SCH_GLNK_EN_20151106
Initial Operation
Watch the following items for the loaded machine and record
them:
- Voltage,
- Noise.
- Bearing temperature (DE/NDE) and winding tem-
perature until it reaches the steady condition,
- Axial position of the rotor (axial backlash indicator).
Switching the machine off when:
- Exceeding of the specified values (→ chapter A.2),

- Impermissible vibrations or exceeded noise level of
the machine occur.
- Exceeding of the specified limits (→ chapter 9.1),
When the machine is running up, only switch it off in
an emergency, to protect the switching equipment
and the machine. Do not restart a coasting -down
machine (Wait until the machine stands still).
If the above mentioned malfunctions occur, contact
the service department of the manufacturer.
3.5.4 Switching the machine OFF Relieve the driven machine.

Observe the safety regulations. (→ chapter S1)
Make sure that the machine is electrically discon-

nents!
3-6
SCH_GLNK_EN_20170530
Operation, Handling
4. Operation, Handling
4.1 General information Only qualified personnel who have been authorised by the
responsible person of the plant are allowed to switch the
machine ON/OFF.
Further, the operating instructions of the operating company
apply.
4.2 Safety instructions Also refer to the guidelines on safety and commissioning
(Chapter S1).
During operation the secondary circuit of the transformer
has to be protected against opening.
4.3 Operational behaviour During the operation, regularly carry out the following in-
of the machine spections of the machine:
- Check the current consumption and the voltage
(Values → Power rating plate).
- Pay attention to vibrations and noise of the machine
(Monitoring of vibration → Chapter 9.1),
- Check the bearing/winding temperature using the installed
measuring equipment.
(Warning/switching off temperatures → Chapter 9.1),
- For machines with slide bearings, check the axial
position of the rotor on the axial backlash indicator
( → Chapter 2.7.7.2).
Switch the machine off when:

- The specified values are exceeded for current,
voltage and temperature,
- vibrations or the noise
level of the machine is increased,
- the axial backlash of the rotor is exceeded.
4.4 Switching the machine OFF Relieve the driven machine.

Follow the safety instruction!
Before working on live parts, pay attention to the following

items:
- Make sure that the machine is electrically

disconnected from the power supply!
- Secure it against accidental restart and indi
cate this by a warning sign!
- Check for dead circuit!
- Connect to earth and short circuit it!
- Cover or cordon off any neighbouring live
components!
4-1
SCH 850 0250_EN_20150909
Malfunction, Trouble shooting
5. Malfunction, Trouble
shooting
Malfunctions of the machine may only be repaired by skilled
personnel who have been authorised by the responsible
person of the plant.
For trouble shooting, consider the whole environment of the
machine (driven machine, foundation, type of installation,
switchgear, etc.).
Inform the manufacturer in case of damage within the warranty
period.
5.1 General information

For trouble shooting and repair
5.2 Safety instructions
follow the safety instructions as well as the accident-
prevention regulations
Make sure that the machine is electrically

Secure it against accidental restart and indicate this
by a warning sign!
Cover or cordon off any neighbouring live
components!
5-1
SCH 850 0255_EN
5.3 Malfunction, electrical
Mechanical fault indications

 Motor does not run
 Motor runs up badly
 Runs up with humming noise
 Runs with humming noise
 Humming noise in the rhythm of the double slip frequency
 Heats up to high temperature in no-load operation
 Heats up to high temperature with load
Possible reasons for malfunctions Remedial measures

    Overload Reduce load
      One phase of the supply line is interrupted Check the switch and the supply lines
  After starting, one phase of the supply line is Check the switch and the supply lines
interrupted
     Mains voltage too low, frequency too high Check the parameters of the power supply
network
      Mains voltage too low, frequency too low Check the parameters of the power supply
network
  Stator winding wrongly wired Check the wiring of the winding
  Short-circuited coil or phase in the stator winding Measure resistance of the windings, repair after
the consultation with the manufacturer.
      Asymmetry Repair after consultation with the manufacturer
      Wrong direction of the motor rotation Exchange the power supply connections U and
W
      Not enough cooling due to polluted air passages Clean the air passages, check the seals, check
the cooling unit
      Voltage too high, iron core loss too high Do not exceed 105 % of the rated voltage
Additional for slip ring motor
      Starter not in start-up position Check the control circuit of the starter
      Short circuit plug is not completely disconnected Release short-circuit plug, check the mechanical
functioning
5-2
SCH8500255_EN
5.4 Malfunction, mechanical (slide bearing)
Mechanical fault indications

 − Shuffling noise
− High heating-up
− Strong vibration
− Temperature of bearing too high
− Bearing noise
Possible reasons for malfunctions Remedial measures

    Rotating parts slip Search for reason
    Air inlet throttled, filter clogged, possibly wrong Check air passages, clean filters, replace fan, if
direction of rotation necessary *
    Balance error of the rotor Decouple rotor and rebalance *
    Rotor eccentric, shaft out of shape Contact the manufacturer
    Imperfect alignment Align the machine set, check coupling
    Balance error of the connected machine Rebalance the connected machine
    Impacts from the connected machine Check connected machine
    Disturbance from the gear unit Repair the gear unit
    Resonance with foundation Change the foundation rigidity after consultation
with the manufacturer
    Changes of the foundation Determine the reason of the changes, fix them, if
necessary; realign the machine
    Lubricating oil aged or polluted Clean the bearing housing, replace the oil
    Oil viscosity too high Check viscosity, replace oil
    Malfunction of oil supply, lubricating ring runs Check the machine, replace the lubricating ring
discontinuously
    Bearing shell damaged Switch off, refill or replace *
    Lubricating rings run too slow Oil too coagulated (and cold), too polluted
Replace oil or heat it, check the running surface
of the lubricating ring, replace lubricating rings
    Sealing damaged Replace seals *
    Too much oil Reduce oil quantity
    Oil discharge of seal rings disturbed Clean return orifices
* Inform the manufacturer, if necessary.
5-3
SCH8500257_GL_EN
Malfunction, Rectification
5.5 Machine is switched off After the machine has been switched off by the safety
by safety chain device, the machine is only allowed to be restarted
after it has been checked by qualified personnel.
5-4
SCH_EN_20160628
Maintenance
6. Maintenance
6.1 General information Maintenance und care of the machine may only be done by
skilled people who have been authorised by the responsible
person of the plant.
Keep the specified maintenance intervals and use the
recommended types and quantities of lubricants.
Collect used oil, used grease or cleaning rags full of oil or
grease in appropriately labelled containers and dispose
them correctly.
If the machine is exposed to vibrations, check the

locking elements of the screw connections and, if
necessary, replace the locking elements.
Only perform maintenance works (relubrication

6.2 Safety instructions excluded) when the machine stands still.
Make sure that accidental switching on of the
machine is prevented and this is indicated by an
appropriate warning sign.
Observe safety information and accident prevention
regulations when using oil, lubricants, cleaning
agents and spare parts issued by the relevant
manufacturers!
Only electricians are allowed to perform
maintenance work on the electrical connection of
the machine or on electrical auxiliary/control
connections observing the applicable regulations.

by a warning sign!
components!
6-1
SCH 850 0260_EN
Maintenance
6.3 Bearings
6.3.1 Slide bearings

6.3.1.1 Inspection of oil level and Perform the oil level inspection and the oil change with the
oil change -slide bearings machine switched OFF ( → Chap. 4.4).
Make sure that accidental switching ON of the

machine is prevented and that this is indicated by
4
a warning sign.
Oil level check:

- Check the oil level regularly on the inspection glass(2).
The slide bearing has to be filled with oil up to the middle
of the inspection glass.
- If no oil level is to see, check the slide bearing for leaks,
2 if necessary replace .
Oil change:
3
- Carry out the first oil change after 2000 operating hours,
Image 1 all further oil changes after about 8000 operating hours.
- Discharge oil when it is warm after operation via the
drain plug (3) into appropriate containers and dispose it
correctly.
- Refasten the oil drain plug (3).
- Unscrew the oil filler cap (4) and fill the sliding bearing
with oil until the middle of the oil inspection glass (2).
- Screw the oil filler cap (4) in again.
6.3.1.2 Turning (rotating) If the assembly of the complete unit requires the turning of
of the shaft the motor, this is only allowed with simultaneous oil supply
via the upper oil inspection glass (or the locking screw). The
maximum turn speed should be 3 min-1.
Monitoring of oil level.
6-2
SCH900 0261_GLNK_OL_EN
Maintenance
6.4 Cooling system

6.4.1 Cleaning
Check the cooling system of the machine regularly for dirt
Air-water cooler and dust deposits.
Clean the cooler if the air temperature increases.
Clean the cooling system when the machine is

switched off

by a warning sign!
Connect to earth and short circuit it!
components!
Close the valve for the coolant supply.

Open the discharge valve and empty the cooler.
Collect the coolant in suitable pans and dispose it
correctly.
Screw the collecting chamber off.
Clean the cooling pipes wet with a special brush.
The special brush is available from the motor
manufacturer.
Flush dissolved pollution out with water.
Make sure that the fluid does not get into the motor
housing.
Do not damage the protective coating when cleaning
the machine.
6-3
SCH850 2765_LW_EN
Maintenance
6.5 Junction box and Inspect the junction boxes and the cable connections once
cable connections a year.
by a warning sign!
components!
Remove the cover of the junction boxes.

Check the securing screws of the junction boxes and the
insulators for tightness.
Check the insulators for damage.
Check the seals of the covers (optional) and the cable
bushings for correct seat and tightness.
Replace porous or damaged seals.
Seal porous cable bushings.
Clean the internal area of the junction boxes.

Check the cable connections and the screw connections,
the connections for the auxiliary/monitoring units on the
terminal strip, system earth, earthed connections to the
junction boxes for tightness!
Check the insulation of the connecting cable and the
connections to the auxiliary/monitoring units for damage.
Replace damaged cables/lines!
Put the cover on the junction box/terminal box, pay attention

to the correct seat of the seals and fasten the cover with the
belonging screws.
6-4
SCH 850 0262_EN
Maintenance
6.6 Alignment machine Check the alignment of the machine after 2000 operating
hours.
Switch the machine off and align it under warmed up

conditions.

by a warning sign!
components!
Remove the protective cover of the coupling (machine/

driven machine).
Check the alignment of the machine referred to the driven
machine using appropriate measuring tools
( Chapter 2.7.7).
If working with the coupling engaged, make sure to
keep the clearance between the halves of the
coupling specified by the manufacturer.
If the measured dimensions are within the tolerance limits,

check the fixing screws of the machine for tight fit.
If the tolerance values are exceeded, re-align the machine

( Chapter 2.7.7).
6-5
SCH 850 0263_EN
Maintenance
6.7 Labelling, Clean the labels/information signs

Information signs
- with a rag,
- check them for tight fit and legibility.
6.8 Disposal Collect used oil, used grease or cleaning rags/cleaning wool
which are full of oil or grease in appropriately labelled
containers and dispose them correctly.
6.9 Revision Generally, we think that revision intervals of 4 to 5 years will

be acceptable.
These revision intervals can be used under the following

circumstances:
- The inspections in the course of the commission

and the maintenance works are conducted
consequently.
- All detectable aggravating changes of the operating
condition, which are detected during the continuous
operational monitoring, are traced specifically and
eliminated.
6-6
SCH8500263_EN
Maintenance
6.10 Maintenance schedule for the machine with slide bearings
Component Daily Weekly Every 3 months Yearly Every 5 years
Bearing After each starting Oil level check Visual inspection Check the shaft
up, check the run of the lower sealing and
of the lubricating bearing disc and replace, if
rings as far as the lubricating necessary.
possible. rings
Check the
temperature.
Heat exchanger Check Clean
Air passages
(optional)
Clutch Check the Change the

(Follow the alignment and the grease and the oil
manufacturer's fixation filling.
instructions) In case of
frequent gear
shifting, check the
cam elements and
replace them, if
necessary.
Junction box Clean the
Earthing internally.
Retighten the
screws.
Stator winding Measure the
insulation
resistance.
Check connection
cable for cracking;
Check the seat of
the support and
the slot wedges.
Connections for Record the Functional test
monitoring/ monitored data
auxiliary units
Complete motor Pay attention to Retighten the Remove the rotor;
the operational screws check the rotor
noises and lamination, the fan
running and the stator
smoothness core lamination for
tight fit; check the
rotor bars for
breaks; clean.
Additionally for slip ring motor
Brushes Clean Check the surface

Slip rings of the slip rings
for damages.
Rotor winding Check connection
cable for cracking;
check the seat of
the support
Measure the
insulation
resistance.
6-7
SCH900 265_GL_EN
Repair
7. Repair
Before the installation /disassembly of the roller bearings or
7.1 General instructions
the replacement of the slide bearing shells, prepare the
workplace to ensure a smooth work process.
Use suitable installation/dismantling implements, tools and
heating equipment for the removal/installation of the roller
bearings or slide bearing shells.
Keep the workplace clean for the removal/installation works
of the roller bearings or slide bearing shells.
If the removal/installation work is done at the owner’s
responsibility, only use the bearings recommended or
supplied by the manufacturer and follow the installation
instructions given by the manufacturer of the bearings.
Only install roller bearings of the same type and clearance
class. (Bearing type → Rating sign).
Only use seals of the same type and material.
If the machine is exposed to vibrations, check the

locking elements of the screw connections and ,if
necessary, replace the locking elements.
7-1
SCH 850 0270_EN
Repairs
7.2 Safety instructions Any service works on the machine or the electrical
qualified electricians (chapter. 1.6) and according to the
applicable
- IEC-standards
( chapter S1).
Qualified personnel has to be able

- to assess the assigned jobs, to recognize and avoid
possible danger.
- authorized for the execution of the required works by the
responsible person for the safety of the machine. (chapter
1.6)
Repair works within the warranty period require the
prior authorization from the manufacturer.
Recommendation :
For repair works, call the the customer service of
the manufacturer.
Only perform repair works when the machine stands
still.
Make sure that accidental switching on of the
machine is prevented and this is indicated by an
appropriate warning sign.
Observe safety hints and accident prevention
regulations of the bearing manufacturers!
7.3 Replacement parts Please state the following details for ordering spare parts:
– Exact designation of the parts (part number, if
necessary)
– Machine type and
– the motor ID-number
– year of make
.
Please find the machine type and the order number

on the data sheet ( Chap. 0.1) or the power rating
plate.
If necessary, send a sample of the part to be
replaced to the manufacturer.
7-2
SCH 850 0270_EN
Type of protection
8. Type of protection Ex px For the installation of explosion-protected, three-phase asyn-

chronous machines with short-circuited rotor the following
applies as addition to the manual:
The machines may be used in explosion hazard-

ous rooms and plants only in accordance with the
responsible authorities' stipulation (type of protec-
tion and temperature class, → power rating plate).
The type of protection of the motor is extended by
one or more letters, in case certified components
belong to another protection class, e.g. Ex pxe II - a
junction box of "increased safety e" is installed. The
first mentioned letter is the main protection class.
The manufacturer's special operating instructions
must be observed for the pressurised apparatus
system comprising control system, pressure control
device and purging air control system.
Pay attention to the EC Type Examination Certificate.
8.1 Assembly When installing the explosion-protected machines,

follow the safety instructions, notes and descriptions,
in Chapter "2.7 Installation" and observe chapter
"2.8 Connections".
8.1.1 Placing in position For the assembly of the machine, the applicable national
standards and installation instructions shall be effective.
Place the machines with external fans in a way that

the cooling air can get in and out without restrictions.
For designs with the shaft end facing upwards,
prevent foreign objects from falling into the air inlets
using a suitable cover.
Designs with the shaft end facing downwards have
already been equipped with a protective cover over
the air inlets by the manufacturer.
8-1
SCH 900 0285_(px)_EN_20160908
Class of ignition protection
If machines which include bearings are assembled,

they have to be checked for
– proper running and
– constant air gap between the stator and the
laminated rotor core.
Confirm the proper running and the constant air gap

between the stator and the laminated rotor core on
an additional test label.
If the equipment required for the test is not available,
the installation has to be done at the manufacturer’s
site.
8.1.2 Connecting Compare the values of the available supply voltage with the
details on the power rating plate. Ensure that the dimensions
of the connecting cables comply with the applicable standards
and that their dimensioning meets the current requirements at
the ambient temperature. In accordance with standards, the
connection in the terminal box can be made using connecting
clamps without cable shoes. Connect the machine as per the
wiring diagram provided in the junction box.
Arrange the connection wires in the terminal box uncovered

that way that the protective conductor is longer than necessary
and the wiring insulation is not damaged.
Remove the insulation of the wires in such a way that the
insulation reaches up to the connecting terminal (- 5 mm).
Protect the cable entry with strain relief for loose wiring with
form-fitting securing elements or industrial adhesive against
turning.
8-2
SCH9000280_ Rev2006
8.1.3 Protective measures Protect the machine against overheating on all phases using
against overheating a current depending certified circuit breaker or other equal
devices in compliance with the applicable regulations.For
motors, set the overload protector to the rated current so that
they will be switched off before they reach their temperature
limit, even if the rotor blocks
This protective device, which is set on the rated current of the
three-phase motor, must switch off at the 1.2 fold of the rated
current within 2 hours or earlier. With the 1.05 fold of the rated
current , the motor may not switch off within 2 hours.
Additionally, the three-phase motor is to be equipped with 3
temperature sensors in the windings (one per phase ) if it is
used in a S2- to S10 supply network and on the frequency
converter.
These temperature sensors in the windings have to be
connected to a circuit breaker which is functionally checked
by an authorised testing organisation.
During the operation in compliance with the rated values the
three-phase motor may not be switched off by the circuit
breaker.
For the Zone 2 or the Zone 22, the frequency transformer
may assume the above mentioned protective function.
Widings in D - Protect the circuit against one-phase failure.
For that, connect the releasers or relays in series to the
windings and set them on the 0.85 fold value of the rated
current If this wiring is not possible, use other protective
measures additionally to the protective motor switches.
It is only permissible to protect the windings by temperature
sensors which directly monitor the temperature, if it is specially
certified and stated on the power rating plate.
In case of pole-changeable motors, separated protective
devices are required for each switch position interlocked to
each other.
When not otherwise stated, motors may only be used for
continuous operation and only for normal, not frequently
repeating, starts when they do not essentially heat up during
their starting phase.
If the number of the certificate for explosion protected
machines include „X“, particular measures have to be made
in accordance with the test certificate.
8.1.4 External ventilation If the three-phase motor is cooled using an external fan
which is not part of the main motor, make sure that the main
motor is only operated when the external fan is switched on.
8.1.5 Standstill heating The standstill heating may only heat when the three-phase
motor is not in operation.
8-3
SCH900 0281_ EN
8.2 Maintenance and Repair During repairs or maintenance of explosion

protected machines comply with the safety
instructions, notes and descriptions contained in
Chapters „6. Maintenance“ and „7. Repairs“!
For repair and maintenance works or alterations of
explosion hazardous equipment, comply with the
applicable standards and regulations.
Maintenance, repairs and alterations which influence the
explosion protection should be carried out by the
manufacturer.
When maintenance, repair or alteration works are carried out
in other workshops, indicate the electrical machine with an
additional label which shows the following details:
- Date,
- Executor
- Nature and scope of maintenance, repair or
alteration.
These works have to be inspected and approved by an

authorized person and released by his/her written test
certificate.
Such service works, which can be seen as not influencing
the explosion protection, include, for instance, the replacement
of terminal parts, cable bushings, bearings and fans.
8.2.1 Painting The requirements of conductivity and coat thickness have to

be noted for motors in EX areas.
Insulating colour applications up to 200 ìm protects from
electrostatic charge.
Multiple coat applications with coat thicknesses over 200 ìm
are not approved for explosion group IIC.
8.3 Spare parts Excluded the standardized, commercial parts (roller bearings,
etc.), only original spare parts are allowed to be used.
Please refer to Chapter „7.3 Spare Parts“ when ordering
spare parts.
8-4
SCH9000281_OK_EN_20150506
Technical Data and Tables
9. Technical Data and Tables

9.1 Instruction Sheets
9.1.1 Torque settings for If no other instructions have been given, use the following
fixing screws torque settings for fixing screws and nuts.
Screw Screw Screw Screw

Fixing
Property class 4.6 Property class 5.6 Property class 8.8 Property class 10.9
screws
[Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
M5 - - 5,9 8,6
M6 - - 10,1 14,9
M8 - - 24,6 36,1
M10 - - 48 71
M12 27 35 84 123
M16 65 80 206 302
M20 130 160 415 592
M24 220 275 714 1017
M30 445 560 1428 2033
M36 775 945 2482 3535
M42 1260 1530 3925 5570
M48 1890 2340 5900 8375
Values for the property classes 8.8 and 10.9

according to the applicable standards. Values for
the property classes 4.6. and 5.6 according to this
standard.
Tightening torques for:
μ G = μ K = 0,125.
9-1
SCH 9000290_EN
9.1.2 Torque settings for Torque settings for electrical connections for which the
electrical connections permissible torque is limited by the materials used for the
bolts and/or the load capacity of the insulator material.
1)
Permissible bolt torque
Constant current Thread torques
[A] [d] [Nm]
200 M10 10
315 M12 20
400 M16 40
630 M20 52
800 M24x2 80
1)
Also electrically and mechanically
equal materials are allowed.
9.1.3 Height expansion In case of foot-mounted, horizontal shaft machines, there will
be an increase of the axis height by the values cited below
depending on the difference between the ambient temperature
(20 °C.) and the operational temperature
These values are to be taken into account when aligning the

electrical machine cold:
Axle height Height expansion

[mm] [mm]
400 0,16
450 0,18
500 0,20
560 0,22
630 0,25
710 0,28
800 0,32
900 0,36
1000 0,40
1100 0,44
1250 0,50
1500 0,59
9-2
SCH1085_B_EN_20160301
9.1.4 Limiting values The specified warning and switch off values serve for functional
monitoring:
Measuring location Warning Switch off
Stator coil *:
Heat category / Limit value
of absolute temperature
155/110° C 120° C 135° C
155/120° C 130° C 145° C
155/130° C 140° C 155° C
155 155° C 170° C
180/145° C 155° C 170° C
Roller bearing * 105° C 115° C
Plain bearing * 95° C 100° C
* ETF Measuring method (temperature sensor, e.g. PT100 and

PTC-resistor)
The specified temperatures for warning signals and for
switching-off are maximum values which also can be
exceeded in individual cases. This requires the
manufacturer’s consent. Usually, there are lower holding
temperatures during operation.
To protect the bearings, we recommend to set the warning
value at a temperature value of 10°C and the switch-off
temperature at 20°C above the value of the holding
temperature.
Permissible limits for the monitoring unitsR e s i s t a n c e
thermometer (PT100); max. 10 mA:
PTC-resistor:
- Triple PTC with 2 outputs:
max. 25 mA; max. 5V
-
Single PTC with two outputs each:
max. 25 mA; max. 2.5V
Vibration limits:
Measuring Warning Switch off
Housing vibration
12 mm/s 15,0mm/s
(rigid foundation)
For the evaluation criteria for the housing see Chapter 10.
Should vibration values occur which are between the warning
and the switch off values, the electrical machine may continue
to operate under observation. The possibility of
resulting damages cannot be excluded →, inform the
manufacturer, if necessary.
Limiting values:
Measuring Warning Switch off
shaft vibration 80µm 120µm
9-3
SCH9000291_RF1_EN
9.1.5 Preservation The machine must be covered if building dust or spray water
are likely to affect it. Make sure that air can circulate between
the machine and the covering.
Should the machine be stored or idle for up to 3 months
before commissioning (even if the machines are assembled
and ready for operation), a corrosion protection coating must
be applied to the bearing pin. Connect and switch on any
available heating when the motor is switched off.
Follow the storage instructions.

Should the machine be stored or idle for more than 3 months
before commissioning (even if the machines are assembled
and ready for operation), the separate storage instructions
must be observed. Should the storage instructions not be
available, they can be requested separately.
9-4
SCH9020000_EN_20160307
9.1.6 Placing on Place the motor on the steel foundation and level it up
a steel foundation (→ Chapter 2.7.4).
Fasten the motor on the steel foundation using hexagon

bolts.
Details on fastenings ( → Dimensional drawing).
9-5
SCH 850 0492_EN
9.1.7 Placing on Screw a foundation block (1) each under the machine
foundation blocks foot, with levelling shims (total thickness about 5 mm), in
the centre of the through borehole using hexagon bolts.
Screw jacking bolts into the threaded borehole.
Place the motor on the concrete foundation with the blocked

out anchor holes (2).
1
Lift the motor only at the provided positions with the
jacking bolts! (Jack thread optional)
2
Align the motor roughly using the jacking bolts and grout the
anchor holes/foundation blocks with concrete.
After the concrete has been set, align the motor correctly using
the shims and the jacking bolts and fasten it.
After the alignment procedure has been finished, remove the
Image 1 jacking bolts.
Advantage of this fixing method:

The motor can be displaced during the installation or
the dismantling without lifting, after the fixing screws
have been turned out.
Please find the details on the fixing material, e.g. foundation

blocks or fixing screws→, in the dimensional drawing.
9-6
SCH8500293_EN
9.1.8 Installation of the Screw the foundation slabs with levelling shims (total
foundation slab thickness of about 5 mm) under the machine feet using two
hexagon bolts.
The levelling shims must be within the area of the

through borehole.
Insert the foundation bolts into the boreholes of the foundation

slabs and the machine foot and screw them on slightly.
Turn the fixing nut on the thread of the foundation

bolt. The thread must stick out by the measure „m“.
Place the machine on the levelling spindles and level it

roughly.
The levelling spindles are not in the scope of delivery
and can be ordered from the manufacturer.
Arrange the levelling spindles in the foundation that
way that there is one levelling spindle assigned to
each foot of both foundation slabs. The levelling
spindles remain in the foundation.
Grout the foundation with concrete.
After the concrete has set,

- release the fixing nuts,
- unscrew the hexagon bolts and remove them.
Level up the machine accurately using the levelling spindles

and the levelling shims and fasten the fixing nuts.
(→ chap. 2.7.7)
9-7
SCH850 0294_EN
Technical data and Tables
9.2 Radial, angular and axial

Radial offset Angular offset Axial offset
offset ∆r ∆b ∆a
D < 200 mm
0,02 mm
0,02 mm 0,02 mm
D >= 200 mm
0,02 mm • D / 200
Δr
Image 1: Radial offset

D
Image 2: Angular offset
Image 3: Axial offset

(Only relevant for rigid coupling)
9-8
SCH8500294_EN_20150629
Publications of rules
10.0 Publications of rules

10.1 Table of applicable
standards and regulations
Applied standards and regulations Issued
IEC 60034-(1-n)
Requirements on rotating electrical machines
EN 60034-(1-n)
Degree of protection of the junction box EN 60529 09.2014
Operation of electrical installations EN 50110-1 02.2014
Lifting devices, load handling attachments DIN 15003 02.1970
Eye hooks, quality class 5 DIN 7540 10.1980
Shackles DIN 82101 09.2005
Cast-resin insulators DIN 46264 06.1988
Arrangement of terminals (6 kV) DIN 42962-1 05.2010
Mechanical vibrations DIN ISO 21940-32 08.2012
Power cable DIN VDE 0255 11.1972
Plastic-insulated cable DIN VDE 0273 12.1987
Cable lug for compression connections DIN VDE 46235 07.1983
Hexagon head bolt ISO 4014 06.2011
Hexagon head bolt ISO 4017 03.2006
Tightening torque for fixing screws VDI 2230, Blatt 1 11.2015
Evaluation criteria referred to vibration of housing DIN ISO 10816-1 08.1997
Oil for plain bearings DIN 51524, Teil 1 09.2006

Electrical equipment for potentially explosive atmospheres
EG-Richtlinie 94/9 EG
IEC 60079-0 2011 + Cor.: 2012 + Cor.: 2013
General requirements
EN 60079-0 2012 + A11: 2013
IEC 60079-14 2013
Electrical installations
EN 60079-14 2014
IEC 60079-11 2011 + Cor.: 2012
Intrinsic safety „i“
EN 60079-11 2012
IEC 60079-7 2015
Increased safety „e“
EN 60079-7 2015
IEC 60079-15 2010
Non sparking „nA“
EN 60079-15 2010
IEC 60079-2 2014
Equipment protection by pressurized enclosure „px“
EN 60079-2 2014
IEC 60079-1 2014
Equipment protection by flameproof enclosures „d“
EN 60079-1 2014
IEC 60079-31 2013
Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure
EN 60079-31 2014
IEC 60079-10-1 2008
Explosive gas atmospheres
EN 60079-10-1 2009
Accident prevention instructions
General regulations BGV A1
Electrical installations and equipment BGV A2
Load handling attachment in hoisting gear operation BGV D6
10 - 1
SCH9010000_EN_20170223
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dep.
Name / Name
Labeling
Datum / Date
D - 41238 Mönchengladbach - Breite Strasse 131
Type KU7840G-PL20 IMB3 2017 Nr.44063601/1

Beschilderung
00
E41
3 MOT. IP55 -20°C Tamb +50°C
155/120°C 32,20 t
27.06.2017 Typ
WVU N
Product code
bearing DE: EFEZLB-22-280 INSUL.
60 Hz ±2% oil volume: 23 l
E. Yasar Doku. Nr. / Doc. No

2300 kW oil: ISO VG68
S1
13200 V Y ±10%
144 A bearing NDE: EFKZLB-22-280 INSUL.
cos=0,73 oil volume: 23 l
KU7840G-PL20
358/min oil: ISO VG68
44063601_001_6001001020
Ref. no.
Auftrags-Nr.
EN60034 IEC60034
Made in Germany
Seite / Page
44 063 6 01
1 / 6
Kundenkennung / Item no.: 340-MK-01
Beschilderung
Labeling
D - 41238 Mönchengladbach - Breite Str. 131

0102
Type KU7840G-PL20 IMB3

3 MOT. IP55 2017 Nr.44063601/1
II 2G Ex pxe II T3
TÜV 07 ATEX 553989
KÜHLUNG, REFROIDISSEMENT,
COOLING, RAFFREAMENTO
quantity of water 14,8 m³/h
inlet temperature max. 39 °C
operating pressure max. 9,5 bar
pressure drop 0,8 bar

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
protective gas in acc. with specs.

purging pressure min.: 5 bar
purging pressure max.: 10 bar
internal free volume: 20 m³
min. purging air flow rate: 300 m³/h
min. qty. of protective gas req. for purging: 200 m³
min. overpressure in service: 10 mbar
leakage rate at mbar: 12 m³/h
max. internal overpressure (purging): 50 mbar
max. internal overpressure (in progress): 30 mbar
min. internal overpressure (in progress): 2 mbar
purge time: 45 min
heating: Typ DHG11B3/M-2,4T3
3 460 V % 6,03 A
4,800 kW 44063601
II2GEEXDEIICT3 IBEXU 15 ATEX 1019
ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
Before lifting the cooler hood,
disconnect plug, pipes and
mounting bolts.

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
Bearing shell
NDE insulated.
ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
Bearing shell
DE insulated and
bridged. Do not remove
earth lead.
Motor housing
overpressure capsuled
Main Terminal Box

340-MK-01

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
Anti-Condensation
Heater Terminal Box
340-HEA-415
RTD Auxiliary
Terminal Box
34-CT-51
Vibration Auxiliary
Terminal Box
34-CV-51
Purging system
Auxiliary T-Box
34-CD-52
Current Transformer
Terminal Box

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Beschilderung
Labeling
ITEM-No.:
340-MK-01

KU7840G-PL20 44 063 6 01
Appendix (optional)
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
Generator/Motor Cooler QLKE, QDKE, QDKR

General
The Generator/Motor Cooler QLKE, QDKE and QDKR is used for
the cooling of air by means of circulating water. The cooler can
be installed for either horizontal or vertical airflow. The cooler is
equipped with removable headers that allow cleaning inside the
cooler.
Labelling
The rating plate is placed on the connection side of the cooler and
indicates the following:
• Order number.
• Product code
• Max. working pressure.
• Test pressure.
• Manufacturer.
• Year of manufacture.
• Dry weight.
• Internal liquid volume.
About Luvata
Luvata is the leading international metals supplier of solutions, services, components and
EN User´s Guide materials for manufacturing and construction. Luvata’s solutions are used in industries such
as power generation, architecture, automotive, transport, medicine, air-conditioning, indus-
Translation of the original instructions trial refrigeration, consumer products and construction. The company’s continued success
is attributed to its longevity, technological excellence and strategy of building partnerships
beyond metals. Employing over 7,500 staff in 18 countries, Luvata works in partnership
with customers such as Siemens, Toyota, CERN, Shaaz, and DWD International.
Users Guide_QLKE_QDKE_QDKR_EN_11-08. Subject to alteration.
Abt. / Dept. 36'

Datum / Date Typ ATB Schorch Auftrags-Nr.
.8*3/
Rev. / Rev. Product code ATB Schorch ref. No.
Name / Name +HLGW Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No. BB Seite / Page /
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Safety instructions and Warnings
General Storage
• Read all the maintenance instructions before you begin For storage longer than a month, the following applies:
handling this product. • Spare coolers or coolers that have been dismantled
• The cooler shall be installed at a location where it is need a protective cover over their finned surface to
out of reach of the general public. prevent personal injury or fin damage, as the finned
• Permit only trained persons who have knowledge of the surface has sharp edges.
product and appropriate safety precautions to carry out • Coolers must be completely drained of water before
any work on the cooler. they are stored to prevent freezing or corrosion damage
inside the tubes. Both headers should be dismantled to
make sure that the cooler has been completely drained
Operating Pressure of liquid.
• The cooler must only be used in a system that is rated
for the max. working pressure MWP (MPa) and the Before commissioning (after storage)
maximum working temperature MWT (°C) specified on Before commissioning tightness of the cooler has to be
the rating plate on the cooler. ensured. Gaskets shall be replaced according to page 6.
• The cooler can only be used within the operating values
and environments that the supplier has recommended Lifting
with respect to the gas- and liquid side Lifting is done according to label on cooler. Before lifting
the cooler: Check that the lifting lugs are well tightened
and are not damaged. Check that correct lifting equip-
Assembly and connections ment is used and that the lifting hooks are of the right
• The air cooler has to be secured to its location. The size to fit the lifting lugs.
fixing points of the cooler are sufficiently stable to
carry the dry weight of the cooler and the weight of the Cleaning
liquid in the cooler. Only use environmentally friendly cleaning agents, which
• The pipe connections on the heat exchanger must will not damage the heat exchanger.
not be subjected to the weight of the connecting pipe
system. Or the expansion forces of the pipe system. Quality System
• Loading and impacts may damage the cooler. Luvata Söderköping AB is certified according to the quali-
• Header bolts should be tightened prior to commissio- ty management system ISO 9001:2008 and according to
ning of the cooler. For tightening torque and the order the environment management system ISO 14001:2004.
in which they are to be tightened, see Figure 3, page
6.
The connections must be protected against impact, exter-

nal strain and stress.
Subject to alteration.
2 WWW.LUVATA.COM
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Installation Also see the section safety instructions and warnings, page 2.
Transport
The cooler is designed to withstand normal loads during When testing the pressure of the pipe system with cooler
transport. After unloading, carry out a visual inspection connected, the pressure may not exceed the test pressure
to make sure that the cooler hasn’t been damaged during specified on the rating plate on the cooler. Before com-
transport. It is very important to examine the finned missioning the venting plugs should be loosened, so that
surface of the heat exchanger. Any transport damage existing air in the cooler and pipe system will be removed.
detected must be immediately reported to the shipper and In order to avoid that any remaining air in the pipe system
to Luvata Söderköping AB. Make a note of the damage on stays in the cooler, venting should be done several times
the consignment note as well. during the first period of operation.
Adjust the correct water flow. If the flow is too low there is
Installation and pipe connections risk of deposits accumulating inside the tubes. If the flow
The cooler must be permanently anchored and located to is too high there is risk of erosion.
ensure necessary air supply. The cooler is equipped with
lifting lugs. If the QDKR double tube cooler is fitted with a leakage
detector, the size G 1/4” upper air venting nipple must
The cooler can be installed for either horizontal or vertical be removed to prevent exposing the detector system to
airflow, see Figure 1. The standard cooler is designed an excessive pressure. The leakage detector should be
with cross-flow water circuit. The direction of the airflow fitted to the lowest nipple. We recommend tightening the
through the coil is therefore insignificant. The supply and header bolts before commissioning the cooler. Torque of
return pipes leading to the cooler must be flushed before bolts and the order in which they are to be tightened, see
they are connected to the cooler. Figure 3, page 6.
QLKE
QLKEg=1
g=1, QLKE g=2&&4,4
QLKE g=2
QDKR
QDKRg=1g=1 QDKR g=2
QDKR g=2
Vertical Vertical mounting
Verticalmounting
mounting Vertical mounting
Duct installation Hood installation
QLKE g=3, 5 QLKE g=6

QLKE g=6
QLKE g=3, 5
QDKR g=3 QDKR g=6
QDKR g=3 QDKR g=6
Vertical mounting Horizontal mounting
Hood installation Hood installation
Figure 1. Horizontal and vertical mounting.

WWW.LUVATA.COM 3
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Installation Also see the section safety instructions and warnings, page 2. .
The principal parts of a Generator/Motor Cooler

1. Side panel
2. Finned body
3. Tube plate
4. Connection header
5. Return header
6. Venting plug
7. Drain plug
8. Connection for leak detector
6 4 3 1
8
2
7 8
Figure 2. The principal parts of the Generator/Motor Cooler. .

4 WWW.LUVATA.COM
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Maintenance and Service
Coolers taken out of operation Cleaning the Air Side

If the cooler is drained without being removed from the 1. The finned surface can be cleaned with steam,
system, the drain plug should not be refitted since the compressed air or water. Be careful to hold the nozzle
shut-off valves may leak and refill the cooler with liquid. perpendicular to the fins and not closer than 150 mm
If the system is inoperative for more than one month, to prevent damaging the fins.
the cooler should be completely emptied and cleaned 2. The finned surface can also be cleaned with hot water
to prevent corrosion in the tubes (see storage, page 2). and environmentally compatible detergents. If deter-
gent is used, make sure it does not harm materials
Maintenance constituting the cooler. The finned-tube body may
Contamination on the outside and/or inside of the cooler not contain any traces of detergent after cleaning as
reduces its cooling capacity. The cooler must therefore remaining detergents will bind new dust. If fins are
be cleaned at regular intervals, depending on the consti- deformed after cleaning, use a fin comb made of Nylon
tution of the air and cooling water. The cooler should be to straighten them. The QLAZ-20 Fin Comb is available
inspected regularly (frequency adapted to cooler operating as an accessory.
conditions).
Spare Parts
Luvata guarantee does not cover costs for coolers that are
Cleaning the inside of the tubes
damaged due to improper installation or freezing. When
The cooler can be cleaned internally by temporarily
ordering spare coolers, specify the production number and
increasing the water flow, by adding a chemical cleaning
type number that appear on the data plate of the original
agent to the liquid (provided that the agent isn’t aggres-
cooler.
sive to the metals in the cooler) or mechanical cleaning.
A cooler with copper alloy tubes can be cleaned chemi-
cally with Sulphur amino acid or Potassium hydroxide.
Mechanical cleaning:
1. Drain the cooler thoroughly and remove it from the
motor or generator system, if necessary.
2. Mark the position of the headers to enable correct
reassembly, and then remove the headers.
3. Use a QLKZ/QDKZ-08 brush to clean the inside of
the finned tubes as you flush them with water.
4. Clean the sealing surface of the headers with ethanol
and fit new QLKZ-01 Gaskets according to the in-
structions in Figure 3, page 6. The gasket is made of
selfadhesive EPDM rubber. The U-strip on the partition
wall is reusable if it is in good condition.
5. When refitting the headers, note how they are marked
and refit them to their proper locations. Tighten
according to the pattern in Figure 3, page 6.
WWW.LUVATA.COM 5
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
6 4 Fitting the QLKZ-01 Replacement Gasket

1. Rubber gasket, 10 x 2 mm
(always to be replaced when dismantling the headers).
Fit the rubber gasket so that it borders on the screw holes.
Stretch the gasket outward in the corners. The joint at the
corners is made with overlapping.
2
2. Rubber U-strip
Cut the U-strip angled so that it follows the bending
radius of the header. It should extend inward under
the gasket.
s15
s14
s16
When you refit the headers, tighten the bolts in the order
indicated by s1, s2, s3...
1
Tightening torque after mounting: 70 Nm (7kpm).
s10
s9
2 Retightening of torque shall be done at least 24 h after

initial mounting of headers: 70 Nm (7kpm).
s6
s5
s1
s2
s4
s3
s8
s7
s12
s11
s13
Figure 3. Mounting of gaskets and tightening of bolts (torque 70 Nm) in the

order indicated by s1, s2, etc.
Our products can be ordered with a variety of accessories as well as with other dimensions and materials than the standard.
Contact us for more information.
For more information, please contact:

Luvata Söderköping AB, Afrikalaan 303, Hietzinger Hauptstrasse 38d/2
SE-61481 Söderköping, Sweden, BE-9000 Gent, Belgium AT-1130 Wien, Austria
Phone +46 121 191 00, Phone +32 9 218 71 30, Phone +43 1 81 20 206
Fax +46 121 101 01 Fax +32 9 218 71 39 Fax +43 1 81 20 250 www.luvata.com
6 WWW.LUVATA.COM
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
SERVICE
+49 (0)2166 925 - 300
service@schorch.de
ATB Schorch GmbH
Breite Straße 131
D-41238 Mönchengladbach
Phone: +49 (0) 2166-925-0
Fax: +49 (0) 2166-925-100
E-mail: mail@schorch.de
Internet: http://www.schorch.de
9050000
ATB Schorch GmbH
Storage instructions
EN
ISO 639-1
Translation of original storage instructions
Content Page
1 General 3
1.1 Qualified personnel 3
2 Safety instructions 4
2.1 Regulations, standards 4
2.2 The five safety regulations 5
2.3 Save handling 5
3 Transport 6
3.1 Regulations, standards 6
3.2 Transport damages 6
3.3 Safety instructions 7
3.4 Securing device for transport 8
4 Storage 8
4.1 Storage location 8
4.2 Preservation 8
4.2.1 Notes on storage, intermediate storage and transport 8
4.2.2 Electric band heater 9
4.2.3 Protection of roller bearings 9
4.2.4 Protection of slide bearings 10
4.2.4.1 Storage time of maximum one year 10
4.2.4.2 Storage time longer than one year 10
4.2.5 Air-water heat exchanger (option) 11
4.2.5.1 Storage time of maximum one year 11
4.2.5.2 Storage time longer than one year 11
4.2.6 Coupling 11
4.2.7 Protection from humidity 12
4.2.8 Outdoor storage 12
5 Commissioning after storage 13
5.1 General 13
5.2 Removing of preservation 13

5.2.1 General inspection 14
5.2.2 Roller bearings, lubrication 14
5.2.3 Slide bearings, lubrication 14
5.2.4 Air-water heat exchanger (option) 15
5.2.5 Insulation measurement 15

1 General
Generally, the manual that comes with each machine shall apply. Technical specifications and
handling instructions in these manual shall be binding. The special manufacturer's documents
for components and/or options must always be considered. Also the manufacturer's
specifications for lubricants, grease and oil are binding.
1.1 Qualified personnel
These storage instructions as well as the manual attached only include such instructions that
are required to be observed by the qualified personnel to ensure the intended use of the
machine. The people responsible for the safety of the plant must ensure the following
preconditions:
General planning works of the system as well as all works referring to transport, assembly,
installation, commissioning, maintenance and repair are performed by qualified personnel or
checked by responsible professionals. The manual and the documentation of the machine are
always available for all works. The technical specifications and details on assembly,
connection, environmental and operating conditions are strictly observed. The plant-specific
instructions applicable for erection and safety are met. The use of personal protective
equipment is observed. Unqualified personnel are not allowed to work on this machine or
nearby. Commissioning and operation of this machine are only allowed by qualified personnel.
Qualified personnel in the sense of the safety-related instructions in this documentation are
persons that are authorized to operate, connect to earth, and label devices, systems and
electrical circuits in compliance with the safety-related standards.
3
2 Safety instructions
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high degree of risk that, if not
DANGER avoided, will result in death or severe injuries.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a medium degree of risk that,
WARNING if not avoided, can result in death or severe injuries.
CAUTION indicates a hazard with a low degree of risk that, if not
CAUTION avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.
NOTICE is used when damages to the machine can occur if the

NOTICE respective instruction is not or not sufficiently observed.
2.1 Regulations, standards
Any works on the machine or the electrical connections of the machine are allowed to be
carried out only by qualified personnel (→ chapter 1.1) and in compliance with the applicable
legal regulations.

- Instructions for operation, assembly, commissioning and maintenance
4
2.2 The five safety regulations
For safe working on the machine as well as to prevent property damage observe the five safety
rules as per DIN EN 50110-1:
- Make sure that the machine stands still and is electrically disconnected from the power
supply!
- Secure it against accidental restart and indicate this by a warning sign!
- Check for dead circuit!
- Connect to earth and short circuit it!
- Cover or cordon off any neighbouring live components!
2.3 Save handling
DANGER
Danger to life due to live parts!
Persons can be electrocuted or seriously injured due to electric shock when
touching live parts.
Protective measures: Observe the five safety rules.
DANGER
Danger to life due to suspended loads!
Persons may be injured or killed by falling down suspended loads.
Protective measures: Do NOT stay under suspended loads.
DANGER
Danger to life due to falling machine!
The lifting eyes of the machine are only dimensioned for the weight of the machine.
If a machine set (machine and driven machine) is transported, the lifting eyes of the
machine can break. Persons may be killed or severely injured by the falling down
machine set.
Protective measures: Only use the lifting eyes for the transport of the machine.
Transport the assembled air/air or air/water heat exchangers separately.
5
DANGER
Danger to life due to rotating parts!
Persons can be killed or severely injured when touching rotating parts..
Protective measures: Only remove the coverings of the machine when the machine
stands still. Secure the exposed shaft ends.
WARNING
Injuries due to hot surfaces!
Persons may receive severe burns when touching hot surfaces.
Protective measures: Before starting any works, allow the machine to cool down.
3 Transport
3.1 Regulations, standards
Any works on the machine or the electrical connections of the machine are allowed to be
carried out only by qualified personnel (→ chapter 1.1) and in compliance with the applicable
legal regulations.

- Instructions for operation, assembly, commissioning and maintenance
3.2 Transport damages
Document all transport damages and report them to the haulier, the insurance company, and
the manufacturer.
6
3.3 Safety instructions
DANGER
Danger to life due to suspended loads!
Persons may be injured or killed by falling down suspended loads.
Protective measures: Do NOT stay under suspended loads.
DANGER
Danger to life due to falling machine!
The lifting eyes of the machine are only dimensioned for the weight of the machine.
If a machine set (machine and driven machine) is transported, the lifting eyes of the
machine can break. Persons may be killed or severely injured by the falling down
machine set.
Protective measures: Only use the lifting eyes for the transport of the machine.
Transport the assembled air/air or air/water heat exchangers separately.
Only use the provided lifting eyes for transporting and lifting the machine. Load handling
attachments, lifting gear, and lifting tackle must be certified, proved, and marked. Make sure
that only qualified personnel lift and transport the machine.
Follow the safety instructions for lifting and transporting the machine! Use lifting gear, load
handling attachment, and lifting tackles of sufficient load capacity (weight → rating plate).
- Do not knot the steel ropes, steel chains, and fibre ropes.
- Do not twist the ropes.
- Turn out twisted chains before lifting the machine.
- Do not bend the rope on the squeezed clamp.
- Grommets, rope eyes, lifting rings and other lifting components have to be freely moveable
on the load hook.
- Do not lift loads over people.
Possibly provided auxiliary lifting eyes, e.g. on the ventilation hoods, the cooling equipment
etc., are only suitable for lifting the respective individual component.
7
3.4 Securing device for transport
For the transport of the machine to the place of installation it is required to use the transport
securing devices as well as the vibration dampers (optional). Please find the description of the
transport securing devices in the manual.
4 Storage
4.1 Storage location
NOTICE
Damages of the bearings!
If the machine is not properly stored, the bearings can be damaged due to standstill
and corrosion.
Protective measures: Store the machine in vibration-free rooms and preserve it in
compliance with the specifications.
Store the machine, as well as all components, in a well ventilated, clean, dry dust-free room at
constant temperature. The temperature of the storage rooms may not fall under 0°C. The
relative air humidity may not exceed 50%. To avoid consequential damages in the bearings
due to vibrations during the standstill of the machine, e.g. by adjacent machines and plants, the
machine must be stored in a vibration-free room. Select the storage place in a way that the
machine stands stable and is protected from mechanical load.
4.2 Preservation
Preservation measures are to be taken for machines that shall be stored, but also for mounted
machines that are kept ready for operation. The works required for preservation depend on the
duration of duty, type of packaging, machine condition, version and ambient conditions.
4.2.1 Notes on storage, intermediate storage and transport
The machine must be protected from climatic impacts. Suitable packaging/storage measures
are to be taken during storage, intermediate storage and for transport procedures.This is
possible when the type and the extension of expected climatic conditions are known. If
deviating conditions occur that do not comply with the ones stated in chapter 4.1, please
contact the Service department of Schorch.
8
4.2.2 Electric band heater
DANGER
In case this is a machine with integrated standstill heating, this must be connected and
switched on in accordance with the manual attached. Only qualified personnel are allowed to
do these connection works. Please find connection data of the standstill heating on the rating
plate of the standstill heating or the rating plate of the machine.
4.2.3 Protection of roller bearings
On delivery, a machine with grease-lubricated roller bearings only includes the operational
grease quantity. The external bearing cover and the shaft passages must completely be filled
with grease (protective lubrication). Please find the grease type on the rating plate. To protect it
from dust and humidity, attach external grease caps. Visibly point to the protective greasing on
the machine.
Further turn the rotor by approx. 30 degrees every month to avoid pressure points on the
bearings. In this way, a lubrication film is created by turning. To be able to turn the rotor,
release the attached transport securing device (optional, see manual), but do not remove it.
After the rotation, retighten the transport securing device. It is not possible to ensure an
absolute protection over years because gap corrosion cannot be avoided.
Lubrication grease becomes resinous (de-oil) and the lubrication ability gets lost. If the gaps on
the bearings and bearing shields were sealed with grease, this sealing must be renewed or
repaired after the rotor was turned. It is also necessary to perform a visual inspection of all
storage measures.
9
4.2.4 Protection of slide bearings
On delivery, machines with slide bearings are not filled with oil. The bearings mounted in the
machine must be protected from corrosion.
4.2.4.1 Storage time of maximum one year
If the machine is stored for as long as one year, the following measures are to be taken:
- Demount the bearings.

- Clean the bearings.
- Apply or spray corrosion inhibitor (e.g. Tectyl) on the upper bearing shell, lower bearing
shell, bearing housing, shaft seals, and the shaft in the bearing area.
- Put a bag with desiccant in the bearing.
- Remount the bearing.
- Close open connection holes by screw plugs.
- Protect the gap between the upper bearing shell and the lower bearing shell from
corrosion.
- Protect the gap between the top part and the bottom part of the housing from corrosion.
- Repeat these measures after 6 months.
4.2.4.2 Storage time longer than one year
If the machine is stored longer than one year, the following measures are to be taken:
- Demount the bearings.

- Clean the bearings.
- Demount the bearing shells and replace them by wooden bearing shells.
- Apply or spray corrosion inhibitor (e.g. Tectyl) on the bearing housing, shaft seals, and the
shaft in the bearing area.
- Put a bag with desiccant in the bearing.
- Remount the bearing.
- Close open connection holes by screw plugs.
- Protect the gap between the upper bearing shell and the lower bearing shell from
corrosion.
- Protect the gap between the top part and the bottom part of the housing from corrosion.
- Repeat these measures every 6 months.
10
4.2.5 Air-water heat exchanger (option)
Depending on the size, the machine is shipped completely or in two parts. In some
circumstances, the machine and the hood (air-water heat exchanger) are shipped separately.
The machine as well as the hood is only allowed to be transported on the lifting eyes indicated
in the dimensional drawing. If the machine is equipped with an air-water heat exchanger,
please observe the manufacturer's recommendations (→ manual of the heat exchanger). If the
machine is air-water cooled, the degree of protection as well as the operational safety is only
ensured for the machine with the hood in place. Intermediate storage of the machine without
the hood in place is not permitted.
4.2.5.1 Storage time of maximum one year
If the machine is stored for as long as one year, the following measures are to be taken:
- Empty the air-water heat exchanger.

- Blow through the air-water heat exchanger with hot air, max. 60°C and allow it to dry
completely.
- Close the water connections of the heat exchanger to be air-tight.
- Thoroughly close all other openings.
- Store the machine with air-water heat exchanger as per chapter 4.1.
4.2.5.2 Storage time longer than one year
If the machine is stored longer than one year, the following measures are to be taken:
- Empty the air-water heat exchanger.

- Blow through the air-water heat exchanger with hot air, max. 60°C and allow it to dry
completely.
Fill the heat exchanger with nitrogen and a maximum pressure of 3 bar. If pressure drops
below 1 bar, refill the heat exchanger.
- Thoroughly close all other openings.

- Store the machine with air-water heat exchanger as per chapter 4.1.
4.2.6 Coupling
If the machine is stored with a coupling, observe the storage instructions issued by the
manufacturer of the coupling.
11
4.2.7 Protection from humidity
If the storage room does not meet the conditions specified in chapter 4.1, special packaging will
be required.
- Apply anti-rust agent on all blank parts and repair if necessary.

- Hygroscopic packaging materials (e.g. wood, cardboard, textiles) may not contact the blank
parts. Put blocking material between them.
- Package the machine in a jacket impermeable to water vapour, whereby the enclosed air is
dried to a relative humidity of max. 50%.
- Carefully seal unavoidable holes with adhesive tape.
Jacket material that is relatively impermeable to water vapour is for instance 0.15 - 0.2 mm
thick polyethylene film or A1-polyamid compound film with inspection windows. To monitor the
rate of saturation of the desiccant, it is necessary to integrate hygroscopes in the climatic
jacket. They must be placed in the most possible distance to the desiccant. Check the
hygroscopes every 3 months. Desiccant as per DIN 55473. Put bags with desiccant in all
terminal boxes.
To prevent contacts from corrosion, the bag with desiccant may not get in direct contact with
the machine.
- In countries with especially high humidity and high temperature differences, check the
hygroscopes every month.
- For machine that are ready for operation and must be preserved, carefully seal all gaps on
the bearings, bearing shields and terminal boxes using a temperature-resistant grease.
4.2.8 Outdoor storage
NOTICE
Damages to the machine!
Condensed water can damage the machine.
Protective measures: Provide for sufficient air circulation between the tarpaulin,
protective roof and crates.
If outdoor storage cannot be avoided, the crates must be placed on planks to protect them from
ground humidity and must be covered by tight tarpaulins or protective roofs.
If oscillation is induced in the ground of the place of installation by plants in operation, the
machines with roller-bearings must be placed on vibration dampers, so that storage without
vibration will be ensured.
12
Because in practice, favourable conditions are provided only seldom, these disadvantages
must be compensated by the additional work for preserving. A machine that shall be installed
outdoors comes with special seals on the mounting surfaces of the bearing shields, bearing
covers, cable boxes, etc.. After a possible disassembly, reapply a sealant (e.g. Tectyl) on the
surfaces concerned or insert new seals. Attached measuring devices must be impermeable to
humidity or weather-resistant. All preservative works described before are also required on a
machine stored outdoors.
5 Commissioning after storage
5.1 General
After storage, all machines must be checked mechanically and electrically.
The following measures are to be taken:
- For the transport of the machine to the place of installation it is required to use the transport
securing devices as well as the vibration dampers (optional). Please find the description of
the transport securing devices in the manual.
- Observe all safety instructions for the machine transport (→ chapter 2 and 3).
5.2 Removing of preservation
Undo all preservation measures done before the storage took place. Clean the machine and
perform the individual steps of commissioning. Observe all items in the manual that comes with
the machine.
13
5.2.1 General inspection
- Take the bags with desiccant out of the terminal boxes.

- Open the ventilation and air extraction openings.
- Open the drains for condensed water in case water has been collected there, get the
condensed water drain off and close them again. Check the insulation resistance
(→ manual).
- Check the cable connections, feed through insulators, terminal connections in the terminal
boxes, and retighten them if necessary. Observe the tightening torques (→ manual).
- Visual inspection for mechanical damages.
- Immediately replace damaged machine parts or attachments.
- Visual inspection for corrosion.
- If the machine is secured by transport securing devices, remove them.
5.2.2 Roller bearings, lubrication
Undo all preservation measures referring to the bearing protection done before the storage
took place. Especially completely remove the grease that has been inserted for preservation
into the external bearing cover (protective greasing).
Check the bearings and the condition of the lubricant.
Already the smallest damages from corrosion considerably reduce the lifetime, the bearing
must be replaced. If not required to be replaced, regrease the bearing. Lubricate the bearing
until the new grease has arrived on the bearing. Remove the old grease and lubricate the
bearing with the required type and quantity of grease while the machine is running
(→ rating plate).
Please find the details on the type/quantity of grease and the relubrication intervals on the
rating plate or in the manual.
5.2.3 Slide bearings, lubrication
Undo all measures of corrosion protection. Furthermore, observe all instructions referring to the
slide bearings that are described in the general manual.
14
5.2.4 Air-water heat exchanger (option)
For commissioning of the air-water heat exchanger observe all instructions on commissioning
issued by the manufacturer (→ manual of heat exchanger).
- Check all sealings and connections.

- Replace defective sealings.
- Immediately rectify detected leaks.
- Do not operate the machine with a leaking heat exchanger.
5.2.5 Insulation measurement
DANGER
Before each commissioning after storage, carry out an insulation measurement on the
machine. Any service works on the machine or the electrical connections of the machine are
allowed to be carried out only by qualified personnel (→ chapter 1.1) and in compliance with
the applicable statutory regulations.
Measure the insulation resistance of the machine
- phase against phase and

- phase against earth.
Observe the safety instructions for the measuring device. Do not touch the connection
terminals during and after measuring. Connection terminals may conduct high voltage. After
checking, earth the connection terminals for a short time (5 seconds). Please find the
resistance values required for the respective machine in the manual that comes with the
machine (→ chapter Insulation resistance).
If the required insulation resistance is not reached, dry the machine/windings before
commissioning and repeat the measurement (→ manual).
If the machine is equipped with a standstill heating, switch it on and dry the windings of the
machine until the permissible insulation resistance is reached.
15
ATB Schorch GmbH
Breite Straße 131
Phone: +49 2166 925-0
Fax: +49 2166 925-100
mail@schorch.de
www.schorch.de
Revision: 13.03.2017
7HPSHUDWXUEHUZDFKXQJ:LFNOXQJ
7HPSHUDWXUH0RQLWRULQJ:LQGLQJ
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
7HPSHUDWXUEHUZDFKXQJ/DJHU
7HPSHUDWXUH0RQLWRULQJ%HDULQJ
7HFKQLFDO'DWD6KHHW7'6
5HYLVLRQ 3563$(;/7+
,WHPQXPEHU ,%([8$7(;;,,*([LD,,&77*E
/737%$7(; 3OHDVHBQRWHBPDQXDOBSRLQWB
1HWZHLJKW J8QLW
'HVFULSWLRQ
'HVFULSWLRQ 6FUHZLQUHVLVWDQFHWKHUPRPHWHU
7\SH /7
'HVFULSWLRQ FRQQHFWLRQKHDG(0
6HQVRUGDWD
1XPEHURIVHQVRUV 3LHFH
6HQVRU0DWHULDO 3W
5HVLVWDQFHYDOXH ୶
0RGHRIFRQQHFWLRQ ZLUHFLUFXLW
7ROHUDQFH FODVV%sr&DWr&DFF',1(1
(OHFWULFDOYDOXHV
PD[RSHUDWLQJFXUUHQW P$
5HFRPPHQGHGPHDVXULQJFXUUHQW WR P$
PD[RSHUDWLQJYROWDJH 9'&
,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH ಣ0୶9'&
'LHOHFWULFVWUHQJWK N9$&+]PLQ
7HPSHUDWXUH
0HDVXULQJUDQJHPLQ r&
0HDVXULQJUDQJHPD[ r&
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHPLQ r&
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHPD[ r&
&RQQHFWLRQKHDG
0DWHULDO EUDVVQLFNHOSODWHG
+HLJKW PP
&RQQHFWLRQPRGH VROGHULQJFRQQHFWLRQSODWH
FRQQHFWLRQWHFKQRORJ\ KDUGVROGHULQJ
6HDOHG \HV
/LG \HV
&DEOHFRQQHFWLRQSRUW 0[IRU*૆KRVHV\VWHP
3URWHFWLRQSLSH
0DWHULDO VWDLQOHVVVWHHO
7RWDOOHQJWK PP
,QVXODWLRQ HODVWRPHU
2XWHUGLDPHWHU PP
6XSSO\OLQH
6XSSO\OLQHIL[FRQQHFWHG \HV
9HUVLRQ KRVHOLQH
1XPEHURIOLQHV 3LHFH
1XPEHURIFRQGXFWRUV 3LHFH
0DWHULDO &X
5HILQHPHQW VLOYHUSODWHG
,QVXODWLRQ 73(
2XWHUVKHDWK 73(
&URVVVHFWLRQ PPt
2XWHUGLDPHWHU PP
&RORUVHTXHQFHRIFRQGXFWRU 5'5':+:+%.%.<(<(
&RORUFRGHRIRXWHUVKHDWK %.
/HQJWK PP
:LUHHQG ZLUHHQGVOHHYH
6WULSSHGOHQJWK PP
6FUHHQ
6KLHOGDYDLODEOH QR
1RWH
:KHQPRXQWLQJRQHKDVWRSD\DWWHQWLRQWKDWQRGDPDJHZLOORFFXU
WRWKHVXSSO\OLQHDQGWKHLQVXODWLRQRIWKHVHQVRU
7KHVXSSO\OLQHPXVWEHLQVWDOOHGVWUDLQUHOLHYHG
0HFKDQLFDOVWUHVVWRWKHVHQVRUVKRXOGEHDYRLGHG
)RUYDULDQFHVRIVFUHZLQUHVLVWDQFHWKHUPRPHWHUZLWKFDEOH
FRQQHFWHGE\FXVWRPHULWVKRXOGEHHQVXUHGWKDWWKHFDEOHLV
VXLWDEOHIRURSHUDWLQJFRQGLWLRQVOLVWHGLQWKHUHODWHGGRFXPHQWV
7KH,3SURWHFWLRQFODVVPXVWEHJXDUDQWHHGDIWHULQVWDOODWLRQE\
WKHXVHU
7KHVSHFLDOVHFXULW\KLQWVIRUWKHPRXQWLQJUHJDUGLQJWKH(;
DSSURYDODUHIL[HGLQWKHDERYHQDPHG$7(;DSSURYDOZKLFKLV
DYDLODEOHDW(3+<0(66ZZZHSK\PHVVGH
6HLWH
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
7HPSHUDWXUEHUZDFKXQJ/DJHU
7HPSHUDWXUH0RQLWRULQJ%HDULQJ
6SHFLDOVSHFLILFDWLRQ
6SHFLDOVSHFLILFDWLRQ :,'7+(;,[37(006%6
17
6HLWH
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
7HPSHUDWXUEHUZDFKXQJ:DUPOXIW
7HPSHUDWXUH0RQLWRULQJ:DUPDLU
5HYLVLRQ 3563$(;/7+
,WHPQXPEHU ,%([8$7(;;,,*([LD,,&77*E
/737%$7(;
'HVFULSWLRQ
7\SH /7
6HQVRUGDWD
6HQVRU0DWHULDO 3W
5HVLVWDQFHYDOXH ୶
(OHFWULFDOYDOXHV
,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH !0୶9'&
7HPSHUDWXUH
&RQQHFWLRQKHDG
+HLJKW PP
6HDOHG \HV
/LG \HV
3URWHFWLRQSLSH
7RWDOOHQJWK PP
2XWHUGLDPHWHU PP
6XSSO\OLQH
9HUVLRQ KRVHOLQH
1XPEHURIOLQHV 3LHFH
0DWHULDO &X
,QVXODWLRQ 73(
2XWHUVKHDWK 73(
&URVVVHFWLRQ PPt
2XWHUGLDPHWHU PP
&RORUVHTXHQFHRIFRQGXFWRU [5'[:+[<([%.
/HQJWK PP
6FUHHQ
6FUHHQDYDLODEOH QR
1RWH
1RWH :KHQPRXQWLQJRQHKDVWRSD\DWWHQWLRQWKDWQRGDPDJHZLOORFFXU
7KHSURWHFWLRQFODVVRI,3[PXVWEHJXDUDQWHHGDIWHULQVWDOODWLRQ
17
6HLWH
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
7HPSHUDWXUEHUZDFKXQJ.DOWOXIW
7HPSHUDWXUH0RQLWRULQJ&ROGDLU
5HYLVLRQ 3563$(;/7+
,WHPQXPEHU ,%([8$7(;;,,*([LD,,&77*E
/737%$7(;
'HVFULSWLRQ
7\SH /7
6HQVRUGDWD
6HQVRU0DWHULDO 3W
5HVLVWDQFHYDOXH ୶
(OHFWULFDOYDOXHV
,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH !0୶9'&
7HPSHUDWXUH
&RQQHFWLRQKHDG
+HLJKW PP
6HDOHG \HV
/LG \HV
3URWHFWLRQSLSH
7RWDOOHQJWK PP
2XWHUGLDPHWHU PP
6XSSO\OLQH
9HUVLRQ KRVHOLQH
1XPEHURIOLQHV 3LHFH
0DWHULDO &X
,QVXODWLRQ 73(
2XWHUVKHDWK 73(
&URVVVHFWLRQ PPt
2XWHUGLDPHWHU PP
&RORUVHTXHQFHRIFRQGXFWRU [5'[:+[<([%.
/HQJWK PP
6FUHHQ
6FUHHQDYDLODEOH QR
1RWH
1RWH :KHQPRXQWLQJRQHKDVWRSD\DWWHQWLRQWKDWQRGDPDJHZLOORFFXU
7KHSURWHFWLRQFODVVRI,3[PXVWEHJXDUDQWHHGDIWHULQVWDOODWLRQ
17
6HLWH
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6FKZLQJXQJVEHUZDFKXQJ:HOOH
9LEUDWLRQ0RQLWRULQJ5RWRU
3300 XL 8mm Proximity Transducer System

Bently Nevada* Asset Condition Monitoring
Description
The 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Transducer System consists of:
x One 3300 XL 8 mm probe,
x One 3300 XL extension cable1, and
x One 3300 XL Proximitor* Sensor2.
The system provides an output voltage that is directly proportional to the
distance between the probe tip and the observed conductive surface and can
measure both static (position) and dynamic (vibration) values. The system’s
primary applications are vibration and position measurements on fluid-film
bearing machines, as well as Keyphasor* reference and speed measurements3.
The 3300 XL 8 mm system delivers the most advanced performance in our eddy
current proximity transducer systems. The standard 3300 XL 8 mm 5-metre
system also fully complies with the American Petroleum Institute’s (API) 670
Standard (4th Edition) for mechanical configuration, linear range, accuracy, and
temperature stability. All 3300 XL 8 mm proximity transducer systems provide
this level of performance and support complete interchangeability of probes,
extension cables, and Proximitor sensors, eliminating the need to match or
bench calibrate individual components.
Each 3300 XL 8 mm Transducer System component is backward-compatible and
interchangeable4 with other non-XL 3300 series 5 mm and 8 mm transducer
system components5. This compatibility includes the 3300 5 mm probe, for
applications in which an 8 mm probe is too large for the available mounting
space6,7.
Proximitor Sensor
The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor incorporates numerous improvements over
previous designs. Its physical packaging allows you to use it in high-density DIN-
rail installations. You can also mount the sensor in a traditional panel mount
configuration, where it shares an identical 4-hole mounting “footprint” with older
Proximitor Sensor designs. The mounting base for either option provides
electrical isolation and eliminates the need for separate isolator plates. The 3300
XL Proximitor Sensor is highly immune to radio frequency interference, allowing
you to install it in fiberglass housings without adverse effects from nearby radio
frequency signals. The 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor’s improved RFI/EMI immunity
satisfies European CE mark approvals without requiring special shielded conduit
or metallic housings, resulting in lower installation costs and complexity.
The 3300 XL’s SpringLoc terminal strips require no special installation tools and
facilitate faster, more robust field wiring connections by eliminating screw-type
clamping mechanisms that can loosen.
Specifications and Ordering Information

Part Number 141194-01
Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 1 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Description Notes:
Proximity Probe and Extension Cable
1. One-metre systems do not use an extension cable.
The 3300 XL probe and extension cable also reflect
improvements over previous designs. A patented 2. Proximitor sensors are supplied by default from the
TipLoc* molding method provides a more robust factory calibrated to AISI 4140 steel. Calibration to
other target materials is available upon request.
bond between the probe tip and the probe body.
The probe’s cable incorporates a patented CableLoc* 3. Consult Bently Nevada* Applications Note,
design that provides 330 N (75 lbf) pull strength to Considerations when using Eddy Current Proximity
more securely attach the probe cable and probe tip. Probes for Overspeed Protection Applications, when
considering this transducer system for tachometer or
You can also order 3300 XL 8 mm probes and overspeed measurements.
extension cables with an optional FluidLoc * cable
4. 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically and
option. This option prevents oil and other liquids
physically interchangeable with non-XL 3300 5 mm
from leaking out of the machine through the cable’s and 8 mm components. Although the packaging of
interior. the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor differs from its
Connectors predecessor, its design fits in the same 4-hole
mounting pattern when used with the 4-hole
The 3300 XL probe, extension cable, and Proximitor mounting base, and will fit within the same mounting
sensor have corrosion-resistant, gold-plated space specifications (when minimum permissible
ClickLoc* connectors. These connectors require only cable bend radius is observed).
finger-tight torque (the connectors will "click" when 5. Mixing XL and non-XL 3300-series 5 mm and 8 mm
tight), and the specially-engineered locking system components limits system performance to the
mechanism prevents the connectors from loosening. specifications for the non-XL 3300 5 mm and 8 mm
These connectors require no special tools for Transducer System.
installation or removal. 6. The 3300-series 5 mm probe (refer to Specifications
You can order the 3300 XL 8 mm probes and and Ordering Information p/n 141605-01) uses
smaller physical packaging, but does not reduce the
extension cables with connector protectors already side view clearances or tip-to-tip spacing
installed. We can also supply connector protectors requirements as compared to an 8 mm probe. It is
separately for field installations (such as when an used when physical (not electrical) constraints
application must run the cable through restrictive preclude the use of an 8 mm probe. When your
conduit). We recommend connector protectors for application requires narrow side view probes, use the
all installations to provide increased environmental 3300 NSv* Proximity Transducer System (refer to
protection8. Specifications and Ordering Information p/n 147385-
01).
Extended Temperature Range Applications
7. 8 mm probes provide a thicker encapsulation of the
An extended temperature range (ETR) probe and ETR probe coil in the molded PPS plastic probe tip. This
extension cable are available for applications in results in a more rugged probe. The larger diameter
which either the probe lead or extension cable may of the probe body also provides a stronger, more
exceed the standard 177 qC (350 qF) temperature robust case. We recommend that you use 8 mm
probes when possible to provide optimal robustness
specification. The ETR probe has an extended
against physical abuse.
temperature rating for up to 218 qC (425 qF). The ETR
extension cable rating is up to 260 qC (500 qF). Both 8. Each 3300 XL extension cable includes silicone tape
the ETR probe and cable are compatible with that you can use instead of connector protectors. We
do not recommend silicone tape for applications that
standard temperature probes and cables, for
will expose the probe-to-extension cable connection
example, you can utilize an ETR probe with the to turbine oil.
330130 extension cable. The ETR system uses the
standard 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor. Note that when
you use any ETR component as part of your system,
the ETR component limits the system accuracy to
the accuracy of the ETR system.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 2 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Specifications Nominal Probe

DC Resistance
Unless otherwise noted, the following specifications
Resistance (RPROBE) from Center
are for a 3300 XL 8 mm Proximitor Sensor, extension
Conductor to Outer Conductor
cable and 8 mm probe between +18 qC and +27 qC
(+64 qF to +80 qF), with a -24 Vdc power supply, a 10 Probe Length RPROBE (Ω)
kΩ load, an AISI 4140 steel target, and a probe
gapped at 1.27 mm (50 mils). Performance 0.5 7.45 r 0.50
characteristics apply to systems that consist solely 1.0 7.59 r 0.50
of 3300 XL 8 mm components. The system accuracy 1.5 7.73 r 0.50
and interchangeability specifications do not apply to 2.0 7.88 r 0.50
transducer systems that are calibrated to any target 3.0 8.17 r 0.60
other than our AISI 4140 steel target. 5.0 8.73 r 0.70
9.0 9.87 r 0.90
Electrical
Proximitor
Nominal
Sensor Input
Extension Cable
Accepts one non-contacting DC Resistance
3300-series 5 mm, 3300 8 mm or
Resistance (RCORE) from Center
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probe
Conductor to Center Conductor
and Extension Cable.
Power Length of Extension
RCORE (Ω)
Cable (m)
Requires -17.5 Vdc to -26 Vdc
without barriers at 12 mA 3.0 0.66 r 0.10
maximum consumption, -23 Vdc 3.5 0.77 r 0.12
to -26 Vdc with barriers. 4.0 0.88 r 0.13
Operation at a more positive 4.5 0.99 r 0.15
voltage than -23.5 Vdc can result 6.0 1.32 r 0.21
in reduced linear range. 7.0 1.54 r 0.23
7.5 1.65 r 0.25
Supply 8.0 1.76 r 0.26
Sensitivity
8.5 1.87 r 0.28
Less than 2 mV change in output Resistance (RJACKET) from Outer
voltage per volt change in input Conductor to Outer Conductor
voltage.
Length of Extension
Output RJACKET (Ω)
Cable (m)
Resistance
3.0 0.20 r 0.04
50 : 3.5 0.23 r 0.05
4.0 0.26 r 0.05
4.5 0.30 r 0.06
6.0 0.39 r 0.08
7.0 0.46 r 0.09
7.5 0.49 r 0.10
8.0 0.53 r 0.11
8.5 0.56 r 0.11

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 3 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Extension Cable Extended

Capacitance Temperature
Range (ETR)
69.9 pF/m (21.3 pF/ft) typical
for 5- and
Field Wiring 9-Metre
Systems:
0.2 to 1.5 mm2 (16 to 24 AWG) .
Recommend using 3-conductor 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ± 6.5%
shielded triad cable and tinned including interchangeability error
field wiring. Maximum length of when measured in increments of
305 metres (1,000 feet) between 0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil
the 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor linear range from 0 °C to +45 °C
and the monitor. See the (+32 °F to +113 °F).
frequency response graphs in
Deviation from best fit straight line (DSL)
through Figure 13 (pages 27 and
28) for signal rolloff at high Standard
frequencies when using longer 5- or 1-metre
field wiring lengths. System:
Linear Range Less than ±0.025 mm (±1 mil) with
components at 0 °C to +45 °C
2 mm (80 mils). Linear range
(+32 °F to +113 °F).
begins at approximately 0.25 mm
(10 mils) from target and is from Standard
0.25 to 2.3 mm (10 to 90 mils) 9-metre
(approximately –1 to –17 Vdc). System:
Recommended Less than ±0.038 mm (±1.5 mil)
Gap Setting for with components at 0 °C to +45
Radial Vibration °C (+32 °F to +113 °F).
-9Vdc [approximately 1.27 mm Extended
(50 mils)] Temperature
Range 5 and
Incremental
9-metre
Scale Factor
Systems:
(ISF)
Less than ±0.038 mm (±1.5 mil)
Standard
with components at 0 °C to +45
5- or 1- metre
°C (+32 °F to +113 °F).
System:
Performance
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ± 5%
over Extended
including interchangeability error
Temperatures
when measured in increments of
0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil Standard
linear range from 0 °C to +45 °C 5- or 1-metre
(+32 °F to +113 °F). System:
Standard Over a probe temperature range
9-metre of –35 °C to +120 °C (-31 °F to
System: +248 °F) with the Proximitor
sensor and extension cable
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) ± 6.5%
between 0 °C to +45°C (+32 °F to
including interchangeability error
+113 °F), the ISF remains within
when measured in increments of
±10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil)
0.25 mm (10 mils) over the 80 mil
and the DSL remains within
linear range from 0 °C to +45 °C
±0.076 mm (±3 mils).
(+32 °F to +113 °F).
Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 4 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Over a Proximitor sensor and Minimum

extension cable temperature Target Size
range of –35 °C to +65 °C (-31 °F
15.2 mm (0.6 in) diameter (flat
to +149 °F) with the probe
target)
between 0 °C to +45 °C (+32 °F to
+113 °F), the ISF remains within Shaft Diameter
±10% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil)
Minimum:
±0.076 mm (±3 mils). 50.8 mm (2 in)
Standard Recommended
9-metre Minimum:
System:
76.2 mm (3 in)
Over a probe temperature range
When gapped at the center of the
of –35 °C to +120 °C (-31 °F to
linear range, the interaction
+248 °F) with the Proximitor
between two separate transducer
sensor and extension cable
systems (cross-talk) will be less
between 0 °C to +45°C (+32 °F to
than 50 mV on shaft diameters of
+113 °F), the ISF remains within
at least 50 mm (2 in) or greater.
±18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil)
You should take care to maintain
minimum separation of
±0.152 mm (±6 mils).
transducer tips, generally at least
Over a Proximitor sensor and 40 mm (1.6 in) for axial position
extension cable temperature measurements or 38 mm (1.5 in)
range of –35 °C to +65 °C (-31 °F for radial vibration measurements
to +149 °F) with the probe to limit cross-talk to 50 mV or less.
between 0 °C to +45 °C (+32 °F to Radial vibration or position
+113 °F), the ISF remains within measurements on shaft
±18% of 7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) diameters smaller than 76.2 mm
and the DSL remains within (3 in) will generally change the
±0.152 mm (±6 mils). scale factor.
Extended Effects of 60 Hz
Temperature Magnetic Fields
Range 5 and up to 300 Gauss
9-metre
Output Voltage in Mil pp/Gauss
Systems:
5- or
Over a probe and extension cable 9-metre
Gap 1-metre Ext.
temperature range of –35 °C to Proximitor Probe
(mil) Proximitor Cable
+260 °C (-31 °F to +500 °F) with Sensor
Sensor
the Proximitor sensor between 0
°C to +45 °C (+32 °F to +113 °F), 10 0.0119 0.0247 0.0004 0.0004
the ISF remains within ±18% of 50 0.0131 0.0323 0.0014 0.0014
7.87 V/mm (200 mV/mil) and the 90 0.0133 0.0348 0.0045 0.0045
DSL remains within ±0.152 mm
(±6 mils).
Frequency
Response
(0 to 10 kHz), +0, -3 dB, with up to
305 metres (1000 feet) of field
wiring.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 5 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Compliance and Certifications ATEX/IECEx

EMC 3300 XL
European Community Directives: Proximitor
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Sensor
Standards: ia:
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-4 II 1 G
Ex ia IIC T4/T5 Ga
Maritime T5 @ Ta= -35 qC to +85 qC
ABS 2009 Steel Vessels Rules T4 @ Ta= -51 qC to +100 qC
1-1-4/7.7, 4-8-3/1.11.1, 4-9-7/13
Ui= -28V Ci = 0
Hazardous Area Approvals Ii= 140mA Li =10μH
Pi= 0.91W
Note: For a detailed listing of country and product specific nA:
approvals, refer to the Approvals Quick Reference Guide
(document 108M1756) located at the following website: II 3 G
www.GEmeasurement.com. Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Gc
CSA/NRTL/C T5 @ Ta= -35 qC to +85 qC
T4 @ Ta= -51 qC to +100 qC
3300 XL
Proximitor 3300 XL
Note: Probe entity parameters are
Sensor and 8mm probe
met when used with BN extension
probe, ia: cables and connected to BN Prox.
Ex ia IIC T4/T5; Class I Zone 0 or ia:
Class 1; Groups A, B, C, and D,
Class II, Groups E, F and G, Class
III when installed with intrinsically II 1 G
safe zener barriers per drawing Ex ia IIC T1…T5 Ga, (see Table 1:
141092 or when installed with Temperature Schedule)
galvanic isolators. Ui = -28V Ci = 1.5 nF
3300 XL Ii = 140 mA Li = 210 μH
Proximitor Pi = 0.91 W
Sensor and
probe, nA: nA:
Ex nA IIC T4/T5 Class I Zone 2 or II 3 G

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, Ex nA IIC T1…T5 Gc, (see Table 1:
and D, when installed without Temperature Schedule).
barriers per drawing 140979. Ui = -28V
T5 @ Ta= -35 qC to +85 qC.
T4 @ Ta= -51 qC to +100 qC.
Table 1: Temperature Schedule
Temperature Ambient Temperature
Classification (Probe Only)
T1 -51ºC to +232ºC
T2 -51ºC to +177ºC
T3 -51ºC to +120ºC
T4 -51ºC to +80ºC
T5 -51ºC to +40ºC

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 6 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Hazardous Area Mechanical

Conditions of Probe Tip
Safe Use: Material
CSA/NRTL/C: Polyphenylene sulfide (PPS).
ia: Probe Case
Install per Bently Nevada drawing Material
141092. AISI 303 or 304 stainless steel
nA: (SST).
Install per Bently Nevada drawing Probe Cable
140979. Specifications
ATEX/IECEx: Standard
cable:
ia:
75Ω triaxial, fluoroethylene
The Prox must be installed so as propylene (FEP) insulated probe
to minimize the risk of impact or cable in the following total probe
friction with other metallic lengths: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, or 9
surfaces. metres.
nA: Extended
The Prox must be installed so as Temperature
to provide the terminals with a Range cable:
degree of protection of at least 75Ω triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA)
IP54. insulated probe cable in the
following total probe lengths: 0.5,
1, 1.5, 2, 5, or 9 metres.
Armor
(optional on
both):
Flexible AISI 302 or 304 SST with
FEP outer jacket.
Tensile Strength
(Maximum
Rated):
330 N (75 lbf) probe case to probe
lead.
270 N (60 lbf) at probe lead to
extension cable connectors.
Connector
Material:
Gold-plated brass or gold-plated
beryllium copper.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 7 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Probe Case Connector-to-

Torque: connector
recommended
Maximum
Probe Type Recommended torque:
Rated
Standard Connector Type Tightening Instructions
33.9 Nxm 11.2 Nxm
forward-mounted Two 3300 XL gold
(300 inxlbf) (100 inxlbf)
probes "click" type Finger tight
Standard forward- connectors
22.6 Nxm 7.5 Nxm
mount probes - One non-XL stainless
(200 inxlbf) (66 inxlbf)
first three threads steel connector and Finger tight plus 1/8 turn
Reverse-mount 22.6 Nxm 7.5 Nxm one 3300 XL using pliers
probes (200 inxlbf) (66 inxlbf) connector
Extension Cable Proximitor

Material Sensor Material
Standard A308 aluminum
cable:
Connector
75Ω triaxial, fluoroethylene Material:
propylene (FEP) insulated.
Gold-plated brass or gold-plated
Extended beryllium copper.
Temperature
System Length
Range cable:
5 or 9 metres (including extension
75Ω triaxial, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA)
cable) or 1 metre (probe only).
insulated.
Total System
Minimum
Mass (Typical)
Cable Bend
Radius: 0.7 kg (1.5 lbm)
25.4 mm (1.0 in) Probe:
Note: 3300 XL 8 mm components are both electrically and 323 g (11.4 oz)
physically interchangeable with non-XL 3300 5 mm and 8
mm components when minimum permissible cable bend Extension
radius is observed.. Cable:
34 g/m (0.4 oz/ft)
Connector Armored
Material: Extension
Gold-plated brass or gold-plated Cable:
beryllium copper. 103 g/m (1.5 oz/ft)
Maximum Proximitor
Connector Sensor:
Torque:
246 g (8.67 oz)
0.565 Nxm (5 inxlbf)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 8 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Environmental Limits Extension Cable Temperature Range

Probe Temperature Range Operating and
Operating and Storage
Storage Temperature
Temperature Standard
Standard Cable:
Probe: -51 °C to +177 °C (-60 °F to +350
-51 °C to +177 °C (-60 °F to +350 °F)
°F) Extended
Extended Temperature
Temperature Range Cable:
Range Probe: -51 °C to +260 °C (-60 °F to +500
-51 °C to +218 °C (-60 °F to °F)
+425°F) for the probe tip; -51 °C to Proximitor Sensor Temperature Range
+260 °C (-60 °F to +500 °F) for the
probe cable and connector. Operating
Temperature
Note: Exposing the probe to temperatures below –34 qC (-30 qF)
may cause premature failure of the pressure seal. -51 °C to +100 °C (-60 °F to +212
°F)
Probe Pressure
Storage
3300 XL 8 mm probes are Temperature
designed to seal differential
pressure between the probe tip -51 °C to +105 °C (-60 °F to +221
and case. The probe sealing °F)
material consists of a Viton® Relative
O-ring. Probes are not pressure Humidity
tested prior to shipment. Contact
our custom design department if Less than a 3% change in
you require a test of the pressure Average Scale Factor (ASF) when
seal for your application. tested in 93% humidity in
accordance with IEC standard
Note: It is the responsibility of the customer or user to ensure
that all liquids and gases are contained and safely
68-2-3 for up to 56 days.
controlled should leakage occur from a proximity probe.
In addition, solutions with high or low pH values may Patents
erode the tip assembly of the probe causing media Components or procedures
leakage into surrounding areas. Bently Nevada, Inc. will
not be held responsible for any damages resulting from
described in one or more of the
leaking 3300 XL 8 mm proximity probes. In addition, 3300 following patents apply to this
XL 8 mm proximity probes will not be replaced under the product: 5,016,343; 5,126,664;
service plan due to probe leakage. 5,351,588; and 5,685,884.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 9 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Ordering Information D: Connector and Cable-Type Option

01 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
Note: For a detailed listing of country and product specific connector with connector
approvals, refer to the Approvals Quick Reference Guide protector, standard cable
(document 108M1756) located at the following website:
www.GEmeasurement.com. 02 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
connector, standard cable
Ordering Information Probes 11 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
connector with connector
3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes: protector, FluidLoc cable
330101 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, 12 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
without armor2 connector, FluidLoc cable
E: Agency Approval Option
330102 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, with 00 Not required
armor2 05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx Approvals
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX
A: Unthreaded Length Option 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Metric:
330103 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8 inches less than armor2
the case length.
330104 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with
Order in increments of 0.1 in
armor2
Length configurations:
Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX-EXX
Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in
A: Unthreaded Length Option
Example: 0 4 = 0.4 in
B: Overall Case Length Option
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 20 mm less than the
Order in increments of 0.1 in case length.
Threaded length configurations:
Maximum case length: 9.6 in Order in increments of 10 mm.
Minimum case length: 0.8 in Length configuration:
Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in Maximum unthreaded length: 230
C: Total Length Option mm
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) Example: 0 6 = 60 mm
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) B: Overall Case Length Option
20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) Order in increments of 10 mm.
30 3.0 metres (9.8 feet) Metric thread configurations:
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) Maximum length: 250 mm
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) Minimum length: 20 mm
Example: 0 6 = 60 mm
Notes: 3-metre length option is only available on 330101 probes,
and are designed for use with the 9-metre Proximitor
C: Total Length Option
sensor only. 05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre
Proximitor sensor only. 15 1.5 metres (4.9 feet)
20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet)
Note: 5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre
Proximitor sensor only.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 10 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
D: Connector and Cable-Type Option

01 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc 3300 XL 8 mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case:
connector with connector 330140 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor1
protector, standard cable
02 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc 330141 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor1
connector, standard cable Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
connector with connector Option Descriptions
protector, FluidLoc cable A: Overall Case Length Option
12 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc Order in increments of 0.1 in
connector, FluidLoc cable Length configurations:
E: Agency Approval Option Maximum length: 9.6 in
00 Not required Minimum length: 0.8 in
05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx Approvals Example: 2 4 = 2.4 in
3300 XL 8 mm Reverse Mount Probes B: Total Length Option
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
330105-02-12-CXX-DXX-EXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads2 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
330106-05-30-CXX-DXX-EXX, M10 x 1 threads2 15 1.5 metres (4.9 feet)
Option Descriptions 50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet)
C: Total Length Option Note: 5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) Proximitor sensor only.
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) 90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet) C: Connector and Cable-Type Option
20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) 01 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) connector with connector
Note: 5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre protector, standard cable
Proximitor sensor only. 02 Miniature coaxial ClickLoc
connector, standard cable
D: Connector Option
connector with connector
02 Miniature ClickLoc coaxial
protector, FluidLoc cable
connector
12 Miniature ClickLoc coaxial
connector, FluidLoc cable
connector, FluidLoc cable
D: Agency Approval Option
Note: The FluidLoc cable option –12 is not necessary on the vast 00 Not required
majority of 330105 and 330106 installations due to the 05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx Approvals
presence of the probe sleeve. Consider carefully the
application before ordering the FluidLoc cable option for
these probes.
E: Agency Approval Option

00 Not required
05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx Approvals

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 11 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range 3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range

(ETR) Proximity Probes: (ETR) Proximity Probes, Metric:
330191 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread, 330193 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, without
without armor armor
330194 3300 XL 8 mm Probe, M10 x 1 thread, with armor
330192 3300 XL 8 mm ETR Probe, 3/8-24 UNF thread,
with armor Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX-DXX A: Unthreaded Length Option
A: Unthreaded Length Option Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 20 mm less than the
case length.
Note: Unthreaded length must be at least 0.8 inches less than
the case length. Order in increments of 10 mm.
Length configuration:
Maximum unthreaded length: 230
Length configurations:
mm
Maximum unthreaded length: 8.8 in
Minimum unthreaded length: 0 mm
Minimum unthreaded length: 0.0 in
Order in increments of 10 mm.
Metric thread configurations:
Threaded length configurations:
Maximum length: 250 mm
Maximum case length: 9.6 in
Minimum length: 20 mm
Minimum case length: 0.8 in
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
Note: 5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre Proximitor sensor only.
00 Not required
00 Not required

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 12 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range Aluminum probe clamp bracket1

(ETR) Reverse Mount Probes 137491-AXX
330195-02-12-CXX-DXX, 3/8-24 UNF threads
A: Mounting screw option
330196-05-30-CXX-DXX, M10 x 1 threads 01 10-24 UNC-2A mounting
screws
02 M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet)
The aluminum clamp bracket is an unthreaded
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet)
mounting bracket designed for use with the smooth
15 1.5 metre (4.9 feet)
case probes (330140, 330141, 330197 and 330198).
After gapping the probe, tighten the clamp bracket
by tightening the screws. The mounting screws have
Proximitor sensor only. pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) Aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket
00 Not required 137492-AXX
05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx Approvals A: Thread size
01 3/8-24
3300 XL 8 mm Extended Temperature Range 04 M10 x 1
(ETR) Proximity Probes, Smooth Case: The aluminum probe threaded mounting bracket is
330197 3300 XL 8 mm Probe without armor1 the standard mounting bracket for most 3300 and
3300 XL probe installations. The -01 option includes
330198 3300 XL 8 mm Probe with armor1 two 10-24 UNC-2A mounting screws. The -04 option
Part Number-AXX-BXX-CXX includes two M5 x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The
mounting screws have pre-drilled holes for safety
A: Overall Case Length Option wire.
Length configurations: Phenolic threaded probe mounting bracket
Maximum length: 9.5 in 27474-AXX
Minimum length: 1.0 in
Example: 3 5 = 3.5 in A: Thread size
B: Total Length Option 01 3/8-24
05 0.5 metre (1.6 feet) 04 M10 x 1
10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) We recommend the phenolic threaded mounting
15 1.5 metres (4.9 feet) bracket if your application requires additional
20 2.0 metres (6.6 feet) electric isolation from the mounting location (as in
50 5.0 metres (16.4 feet) some generator and electrical motor bearing
locations). The -01 option includes two 10-24 UNC-
Note: 5-metre probes are designed for use with the 5-metre 2A mounting screws. The -04 option includes two M5
x 0.8-6g mounting screws. The mounting screws
90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) have pre-drilled holes for safety wire.
C: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 13 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Probe Ordering Information Notes:

Ordering Information Proximitor
1. Mounting clamps must be ordered separately for
330140, 330141, 330197, and 330198. Sensor
2. For a shorter delivery time, order commonly
stocked probes. The following part numbers are
3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
currently stocked probes:
330180-AXX-BXX
330101-00-08-05-02-00, 330101-00-08-05-02-05,
330101-00-08-10-02-00, 330101-00-08-10-02-05, A: Total Length and Mounting Option
330101-00-12-10-02-00, 330101-00-12-10-02-05, 10 1.0 metre (3.3 feet) system
330101-00-16-10-02-00, 330101-00-16-10-02-05, length, panel mount
330101-00-20-10-02-05, 330101-00-30-10-02-00, length, DIN mount
330101-00-40-10-02-00, 330101-00-40-10-02-05, length, no mounting hardware
330102-00-20-10-02-00, 330103-00-02-10-02-05, length, panel mount
330104-00-06-10-02-00, 330104-01-05-50-02-00, length, DIN mount
330105-02-12-10-02-00, 330105-02-12-10-02-05, length, no mounting hardware
330106-05-30-05-02-00, 330106-05-30-05-02-05, 90 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system
330106-05-30-10-02-00, 330106-05-30-10-02-05. length, panel mount
91 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system
length, DIN mount
92 9.0 metres (29.5 feet) system
length, no mounting hardware
B: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required
05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx approvals

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 14 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Ordering Information Extension 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range (ETR)

Cables Extension Cable
330190-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Note: Make sure that the extension cable length and the probe
3300 XL Standard Extension Cable length, when added together, equal the Proximitor Sensor
total length.
330130-AXXX-BXX-CXX
Note: Make sure that the extension cable length and the probe A: Cable Length Option
length, when added together, equal the Proximitor Sensor
0 3 0 3.0 metres (9.8 feet)
total length.
0 3 5 3.5 metres (11.5 feet)
A: Cable Length Option 0 4 0 4.0 metres (13.1 feet)
0 3 0 3.0 metres (9.8 feet) 0 4 5 4.5 metres (14.8 feet)
0 7 0 7.0 metres (22.9 feet) B: Cable Option
0 7 5 7.5 metres (24.6 feet) 00 Standard cable
0 8 0 8.0 metres (26.2 feet) 01 Armored cable
0 8 5 8.5 metres (27.9 feet) C: Agency Approval Option
B: Connector Protector and Cable Option 00 Not required
00 Standard cable 05 CSA, ATEX, IECEx Approvals
01 Armored cable
02 Standard cable with connector
protector
03 Armored cable with connector
protector
10 FluidLoc cable
11 Armored FluidLoc cable
12 FluidLoc cable with connector
protector
13 Armored FluidLoc cable with
connector protector
C: Agency Approval Option
00 Not required

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 15 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Accessories 148722-01
141078-01 3300 XL test plug. The 3300 XL
Manual. Test Plug contains 3 small test
pins attached to 3 color-coded 1-
175751 metre wires, each terminated in a
3300 XL Multi-Purpose Stainless banana plug. The 3-pin adapter
Steel Housing. 12”x12”x6”. Can plugs into the test pin holes on
hold up to 8 Proximitor Sensors in 3300 XL-style Proximitor sensors.
a DIN-mount configuration or 6 You can use this test plug to
Proximitor Sensors in a panel- check the performance of the
mount configuration. (Available Proximitor sensor from the test
with ATEX Zone 0 and Zone 1 pin holes in the terminal strip
certifications.) without removing the field wiring.
176467 04310310
3300 XL Multi-Purpose Stainless 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

Steel Housing. 12”x8”x6”. Can panel-mount screw. One 6-32
hold up to 4 3300XL Proximitor UNC thread forming mounting
Sensors in both DIN-mount and screw. Four screws are required
panel-mount configurations. for each Proximitor sensor.
(Available with ATEX Zone 0 and (Screws supplied standard with
Zone 1 certifications.) Proximitor housings [3300 XL
panel-mount option]).
330181
03200006
3300 XL Multi-Purpose Stainless
Steel Housing. 13”x9.5”x7”. Can Silicone self-fusing tape. A 9.1-
hold up to 8 Proximitor sensors in metre (10-yard) roll of silicone
a DIN-mount configuration or 6 tape to protect connectors. This
Proximitor Sensors in a panel- tape is easy to install and
mount configuration. Primarily provides excellent electrical
used by customers requiring isolation and protection from the
hazardous area approvals fro environment. We do not
their installations. Available with recommend using this tape inside
ATEX Zone 0 and Zone 1 and the casing of the machine.
North American Division 1 and 40113-02
Division 2 certifications.
Connector Protector Kit.
02120015 Connector Protector Kit for 3300
Bulk field wire. 1.0 mm2 (18 XL 8 mm probes and extension
AWG), 3 conductor, twisted, cables, including connector
shielded cable with drain wire. protectors and installation tools.
Specify length in feet. 136536-01
138492-01 Connector protector adapter.
Replacement panel-mount This allows you to use connector
mounting pad. protector installation tools
manufactured prior to 1998 with
138493-01 75Ω ClickLoc connectors.
Replacement DIN-mount
mounting pad.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 16 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
40180-02 330153-01
Connector protectors. Package 3300 XL connector kit. Used on
contains 10 pairs of connector 3300 XL 8 mm probes and
protectors for 3300 XL 8 mm extension cables. Contains 1 pair
probes and extension cables. each of male and female ClickLoc
connectors, 2 color-coded
03839410
sleeves, 2 pieces of slit FEP tubing,
75Ω triaxial male connector and 1 strip of silicone tape.
protector. Male connector
protectors install onto the
extension cable and attach to the 330153-09
female connector protector on
3300 XL ETR Connector Kit. Used
the probe, providing
on ETR 3300 XL 8mm probes and
environmental protection of
3300 ETR XL extension cables.
connectors.
Contains one pair of male and
03839420 female ClickLoc connectors, two
color-coded sleeves, two pieces
75Ω triaxial female connector
of high temperature slit FEP
protector. Female connector
tubing, and one strip of silicon
protectors install onto the probe
tape.
lead and attach to the male
connector protector on the 163356
extension cable, providing
Connector Crimp Tool Kit.
environmental protection of
Includes 1 set of multiconnector
connectors. You can also place
inserts and connector installation
the connector protector onto the
instructions. Compatible only
extension cable to slide over the
with 330153 connector kits or
connection to the Proximitor
with probes shipped in 2003 or
sensor to protect that connection
later with ClickLoc connectors
from the environment.
uninstalled. Supplied with
04301007 carrying case.
3/8-24 probe lock nut with
safety wire holes. Single probe
lock nut with 2 holes drilled
through the nut in order to secure
the lock nut in place with safety
wire.
04301008
M10 x 1 probe lock nut with
safety wire holes. Single probe
lock nut with 2 holes drilled
through the nut in order to secure
the lock nut in place with safety
wire.

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 17 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Graphs
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
2 0.05
Referenced to
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
5m @ 25 °C (77 °F) 5m @ 45 °C (113 °F) 5m @ 0 °C (32 °F)
Figure 1: Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5m or 1m System over API 670 Testing Range

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 18 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
9m @ 25 °C (77 °F) 9m @ 45 °C (113 °F) 9m @ 0 °C (32 °F)
Figure 2: Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 9m System over API 670 Testing Range

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 19 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
mV/mil) 2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
1m P ro be @ 25 °C (77 °F) 1m P ro be @ -35 °C (-31°F)
1m P ro be @ 120 °C (248 °F)
Figure 3: Typical 3300 XL 8mm Probe over API 670 Operating Range

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 20 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
6 0.15
4 0.10
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

7.87 V/mm (200
Referenced to
2 0.05
mV/mil)
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
10
Referenced to 7.87
V/mm (200 mV/mil)
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-24
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
TC=25 °C (77 °F) Tc=-34 °C (-30 °F) Tc=-51°C (-60 °F)
Figure 4: Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5m Proximitor Sensor with 4m Extension Cable at Tc (Probe is at 25 qC)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 21 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

Referenced to
4 0.10
200(mV/mil)
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
Referenced to
ISF Error (%)
200(mV/mil)
-5
-10
-15
-20
-18
-16
-14
Output (Volts)
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
25 °C (77 °F) 65 °C (149 °F) 85 °C (185 °F) 100 °C (212 °F)
Figure 5: Typical 3300 XL 8 mm 5m Proximitor Sensor with 4m Extension Cable at Th (Probe is at 25qqC)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 22 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Tc=+25 °C (+77 °F) Tc=-34 °C (-30 °F) Tc=-51°C (-60 °F)
Figure 6: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9 m Proximitor Sensor with 8m of Extension Cable at Tc (Probe is at 25 qC)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 23 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m )
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
8 0.20
DSL Error (mils) 6 0.15
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-22
-20
-18
-16
Output (Volts)
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Gap (m ils)
Th=+25 °C (+77 °F) Th=+65 °C (+149 °F)
Th=+85 °C (+185 °F) Th=+100 °C (+212 °F)
Figure 7: Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m Proximitor Sensor with 8m Extension Cable at Th (Probe is at 25 qC)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 24 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 °C (+77 °F) Th =+260 °C (+500 °F)
Figure 8: Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 4m Extended Temperature Range Extension
Cable at Th (Proximitor Sensor and Probe Tip with 1-foot Cable are at +25 qC)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 25 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Gap (m m ) 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50
10 0.25
8 0.20
6 0.15
DSL Error (mils)
DSL Error (mm)

4 0.10
2 0.05
0 0.00
-2 -0.05
-4 -0.10
-6 -0.15
-8 -0.20
-10 -0.25
15
10
ISF Error (%)
-5
-10
-15
-24
-22
-20
-18
Output (Volts)
-16
-14
-12
-10
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
Gap (m ils) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Th=+25 °C (+77 °F) Th=+260 °C (+500 °F)
Figure 9: Typical 3300 XL Extended Temperature Range Probe and 8m Extended Temperature Range Extension
Cable at Th (Proximitor Sensor and Probe Tip with 1-foot Cable are at +25 qC)

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 26 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths

without Barriers (5 m System)
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' wiring 2000' wiring

5000' wiring 12,000' wiring
Figure 10: Frequency Response, Typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m or 1m System with Varying Lengths of Field Wiring
Attached, No Barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No

Barriers (5 m System)
0
-10
-20
Phase Angle (degrees)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' wiring 2000' wiring
5000' wiring 12,000' wiring
Figure 11: Phase Response, Typical 3300 XL 8mm 5m or 1m System with Varying Lengths of Field Wiring Attached,
No Barriers

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 27 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Frequency Response to Different Field Wiring Lengths without

1
0
Magnitude (dB)
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' field wiring 2000' field wiring

5000' field wiring 12,000' field wiring
Figure 12: Frequency Response, Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m System with Varying Lengths of Field Wiring Attached,
No Barriers
Phase Response with Different Field Wiring Lengths, No

0.00
-10.00
-20.00
Phase Angle (degrees)
-30.00
-40.00
-50.00
-60.00
-70.00
-80.00
-90.00
-100.00
100 1,000 10,000 100,000
Frequency (Hz)
No field wiring 1000' field wiring 2000' field wiring

5000' field wiring 12,000' field wiring
Figure 13: Phase Response, Typical 3300 XL 8mm 9m System with Varying Lengths of Field Wiring Attached, No
Barriers

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 28 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Figures
Note: All dimensions shown in millimetres (inches) except as noted.
4
2
1 3
5
2.5 (0.10) 6
7
8
9
10
1. Probe tip, 8.0 mm (0.31 in) diameter

2. 9/16 in for 3/8-24 threads, M17 for M10 threads (see Note 2)
3. Case thread
4. 5/16 in wrench flats for 3/8-24 threads; 8mm wrench flats for M10 threads.
5. 75Ω cable, 3.68 mm (0.145 in) maximum outside diameter, 3.94 mm (0.155 in) maximum outside diameter for FluidLoc cable,
7.67 mm (0.302 in) outside diameter of armor, 9.5 mm (0.38 in) maximum diameter of armor ferrule
6. Miniature male coaxial connector, 7.24 mm (0.285 in) maximum outside diameter “D”
7. Unthreaded length “A”
8. Case length “B”
9. 6.0 mm (0.235 in) maximum
10. Total length “C”, +30%, -0%3
Figure 14: 3300 XL 8mm Proximity Probes, Standard Mount
330101 and 330191, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, without armor 7
330102 and 330192, 3/8-24 UNF-2A, with armor 6
330103 and 330193, M10X1 thread, without armor 7
330104 and 330194, M10X1 thread, with armor 6

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 29 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
2
3
1
4
2 (0.08)
5 (0.2) 5
6
7
8
9
1. Probe tip, 8.0 mm (0.31 in) diameter

2. 7/16 in or M10 hexagonal
3. Case thread
4. 75Ω cable, 3.68 mm (0.145 in) outside diameter
6. Unthreaded length “A”, 5.0 mm (0.20 in)
7. Case length “B”, 30 mm (1.2 in)
8. 6.0 mm (0.235 in) maximum
9. Total length “C”, +30%, -0%3
Figure 15: 3300 XL 8mm Proximity Probes, Reverse Mount 4, 7

330105 and 330195, 3/8-24 UNF-2A threads
330106 and 330196, M10X1 threads

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 30 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
2 4
1 3
5
2.54 (0.100)
6 7
8
9
1. Probe tip, 8 mm (0.31 in) diameter

2. 9.66 mm (0.38 in) maximum diameter
3. 5/16 in wrench flats, 4 each
4. 75Ω cable, 3.68 mm (0.145 in) maximum diameter, 3.94 mm (0.155 in) maximum diameter for FluidLoc cable, 7.67 mm (0.302
in) outside diameter with armor, 10.2 mm (0.4 in) maximum diameter for armor ferrule
6. Case length “A”,
7. 349.3 (13.75) max. distance
8. 6.0 mm (0.235 in) maximum
9. Total length “C”, +30%, -0%3
Figure 16: 3300 XL 8mm Proximity Probes, Smooth Case
330140 and 330197, without armor 7
330141 and 330198, with armor 6

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 31 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
2
4
83.8 83.8
1 (3.30) (3.30)
5
3
83.8 83.8
(3.30) (3.30) 7
6 8
9

2. Miniature male coaxial connector
3. FEP or PFA coated armor, armor length 300 mm (11.8 in) less than cable length (see Note 6)
4. 75Ω cable, 3.7 mm (0.15 in) maximum outside diameter, 3.94 mm (0.155 in) maximum diameter for FluidLoc cable, 7.67 mm
(0.302 in) maximum outside diameter of armor, 10.2 mm (0.40 in) maximum diameter of armor ferrule
6. Stainless steel ferrules, 10.2 mm (0.40 in) max diameter
7. FEP or PFA insulated triaxial cable
8. Miniature female coaxial connector
9. Cable length, +20%, -0%
Figure 17: Extension Cable without Connector Protectors
330130, 3300 XL Extension Cable (FEP Armor and Insulation)
330190, 3300 XL ETR Extension Cable (PFA Armor and Insulation)
2 3
1 4

2. 51.1 mm (2.01 in) maximum
3. 36.3 mm (1.43 in) maximum.
5. Connector protector (fluorosilicone material) only installed on female end when optioned. Both ends available as accessories.
Figure 18: Extension Cable with Connector Protectors

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 32 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
1. Mounting option “A”, Options –50 or -90

Figure 19: Panel Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor
1. Mounting option “A”, Options –51 or –91

2. 35mm DIN rail (not included)
3. 89.4 mm (3.52 in). Additional 3.05 mm (0.120 in) clearance required to remove DIN rail.
Figure 20: DIN Mount 3300 XL Proximitor Sensor

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 33 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
1. Mounting option “A”, Options –50 or -90

Figure 21: Physical Mounting Characteristics Showing Interchangeability of 3300 and 3300 XL Proximitor Sensors
when 4-hole Mounting Option Is Used8
Figure Notes:
1. All dimensions on figures are in millimetres (inches) unless otherwise noted.
2. Standard mount 8 mm probes supplied with M17 or 9/16 inch lock nut.
3. Probes ordered with 5 or 9 metre integral cables have a length tolerance of +20%, -0%.
4. Reverse mount probes not available with armor or connector protector options.
5. Letters inside quotation marks on figures refer to probe ordering options.
6. Stainless steel armor is supplied with FEP outer jacket for standard probes, PFA outer jacket for ETR probes.
7. FEP jacket is standard non-armored portion of the cable for standard probes, PFA jacket on non-armored portion
for ETR probes.
8. Use M3.5 or #6 screws for panel-mount Proximitor Sensors (screws provided when purchasing Bently Nevada
housings).

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 34 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
* Denotes a trademark of Bently Nevada, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of General Electric Company.
Viton is a trademark of E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company.
© 1999-2016 Bently Nevada, Inc. All rights reserved.
Printed in USA. Uncontrolled when transmitted electronically.
1631 Bently Parkway South, Minden, Nevada USA 89423

Phone: 775.782.3611 Fax: 775.215.2873
www.GEmeasurement.com

Rev. AA (01/16)
Page 35 of 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
BA 141F/00/en/12.01 (b)
52012215 Electronic insert FEL 50 A
Valid as of software version:
V 1.0
for Liquiphant M/S (HT)
PROFIBUS PA
Operating Instructions
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Brief operating instructions Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
Brief operating instructions

These brief operating instructions (KA) show you how to configure your measuring
device quickly and easily:
Safety instructions page 4.
Mounting See KA ...

(Basic device),
table
"Supplementary
documentation" p. 39
Wiring page 9.
Commissioning / addressing page 18/29
Operating elements page 17.
Configuration page 30.
Trouble-shooting page 34.
Always commence trouble-shooting with the checklist on page 34., and the
trouble-shooting instructions in the Operating Instructions of the basic device
(see table page 39.) if errors occur during commissioning or operation. The
routine takes you directly to the cause of the problem and the appropriate
remedial measures.
Returning devices
If you return a device to Endress+Hauser for repairs or calibration, please note
the information in the Operating Instructions ... (basic device), see also the table
on "Supplementary documentation" page 39
2 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA Contents
Contents
Brief operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9.5 Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser . . . . . 36
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

10.1 Technical data at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 Intended application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Mounting, commissioning, operation . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5 Notes on safety conventions and icons . . . . . 5
2 Identification ..................... 6
2.1 Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Mounting ......................... 8
3.1 Incoming acceptance, transport and storage 8
3.2 Use and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 Wiring ............................ 9
4.1 PROFIBUS PA Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2 Connection of the limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3 Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.4 PROFIBUS PA M12 plug connector . . . . . . . 13
4.5 Potential equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.6 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.7 Post connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.1 Operation at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.2 On-site configuration/operation . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3 Communication with PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . 20
6 Commissioning .................. 29
6.1 Mounting and function testing . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.2 Commissioning with Commuwin II . . . . . . . . . 29
7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
9 Trouble-shooting ................ 34
9.1 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
9.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9.3 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9.4 Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Endress+Hauser 3
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
1 Safety instructions Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
1 Safety instructions
1.1 Intended application

The Liquiphant M FTL 50 (H)/51 (H)/51 C and Liquiphant S (HT*), FTL 70/71 with
electronic insert FEL 50 A may only be used as a limit switch for liquids.
Other applications are not permitted. They may violate the appropriate regulations,
particularly in explosion-hazardous areas.
1.2 Mounting, start-up, operation

The Liquiphant M and Liquiphant S (HT) with electronic insert FEL 50 A is built to the
state-of-the-art and to be fail-safe and meets the appropriate rules and EC directives.
However, if you use it improperly or other than for its designated use, it may pose
application-specific hazards, e.g. product overflow through incorrect mounting or
configuration. Mounting, electrical connection, start-up, operation and maintenance of
the measuring device must therefore be carried out exclusively by trained specialists
authorised by the system operator. Technical personnel must have read and understood
these operating instructions and must adhere to them. You may only undertake
modifications or repair work to the device when it is expressly permitted by the
operating manual.
1.3 Operational safety

Explosion-hazardous area
When using the measuring system in explosion-hazardous areas, you must keep to the
appropriate national standards. The device possesses separate Ex documents
(XA 154F, XA 158F, XA 159F) which form a component part of this documentation.
Always follow the mounting regulations, connection data and safety instructions
therein.
x Make sure that the specialist personnel have received sufficient training.
x Always keep to the measuring and safety conditions at the measuring points.
* HT = High temperature
4 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 1 Safety instructions
1.4 Return
See KA ... (Basic device), table "Supplementary documentation" page 39
1.5 Notes on safety conventions and icons

To highlight safety-relevant or alternative procedures, we have set the following
safety instructions for which each individual instruction is indicated with an
appropriate pictogram.
Safety instructions Icon Meaning

Warning!
# "Warning" indicates activities or processes which - if improperly executed -

could lead to serious injury to persons, to a safety risk or to destruction of the
device.
"
Caution!
"Caution" indicates activities or processes which - if improperly executed -
could lead to injury to persons or to incorrect functioning of the device.
!
Note!
"Note" indicates activities which - if improperly executed - could have an
indirect impact on operation or trigger unexpected instrument actions.
0
Type of protection Explosion protected, design tested apparatus
If this symbol appears on the nameplate of the device, the device can be used
in a hazardous area or in a non-hazardous area, according to the approval.
Hazardous area
-
In the drawings of these operating instructions, this symbol indicates
hazardous areas.
– Devices located in hazardous areas or lines for such devices must possess
an appropriate type of protection.
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
.
In the drawings of these operating instructions, this symbol indicates
non-hazardous areas.
– Devices in non-hazardous areas must also be certified, if the connecting
lines run through a hazardous area.
Electrical symbols
% DC voltage
A terminal at which DC voltage is applied or through which DC flows.
&
AC
A terminal at which (sine-form) alternating voltage is applied or through which
AC flows.
)
Ground connection
A grounded terminal, which, from the user's point of view, is already grounded
using a grounding system.
* Protective earth connection

A terminal which must be grounded before other connections may be set up.
Equipotential connection
+ A connection which must be connected to the grounding system of the

equipment: this can, for example, be a potential matching line of a starshaped
grounding system, depending on national or company practice.
Endress+Hauser 5
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
2 Identification Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
2 Identification
2.1 Device designation
2.1.1 Nameplate
On the nameplate, you can find the following technical information:
ENDRESS+HAUSER
LIQUIPHANT M
Order Code
FTL 5#–######A### #### mm

in FTL 51
Process Connection
-Length
Protection Type
L
Electronics Insert
Certificate
Version
Fig. 1 Information on the nameplate of the Liquiphant M with electronic insert FEL 50 A (Example)
2.1.2 Product structure

See KA ... (Basic device), table "Supplementary documentation" page 39.
2.2 Delivery
" Caution!
Always note the instructions in chapter "Incoming acceptance, transport and storage"
on page 8 concerning the unpacking, transport and storage of devices!
The delivery consists of:

x Installed device
x poss. accessories (see Chapter 8)
Supplementary device documentation:

x Operating Instructions KA ... (Basic device)
x Operating manual (this booklet)
x Approval documentation: as far as not given in the operating manual
2.3 Certificates and approvals

CE symbol, Declaration of conformity
The instrument has been designed and tested according to the state of the art and left
the factory in perfect functioning order. The device meets all the appropriate standards
and regulations according to EN 61010 "Safety regulations for electrical measurement,
control, and laboratory devices". Thus, the device meets the statutory requirements of
6 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 2 Identification
EC directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing the

CE mark.
PNO Certification
The device was certified according to the PNO standard (Profile 3.0).
2.4 Registered trademarks

PROFIBUS ®
is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Karlsruhe, Germany.
Endress+Hauser 7
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
3 Installation Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
3 Installation
3.1 Incoming acceptance, transport and storage
3.1.1 Incoming acceptance

Check the packaging and the contents for damage.
Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply
matches your order.
3.1.2 Storage
For storage and transport purposes, pack the instrument so that it is protected against
impacts. The original packaging provides optimum protection.
The permissible storage temperature is –50 °C…+80 °C.
3.2 Use and Mounting

8 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 4 Wiring
4 Wiring
# Warning!
x When connecting Ex-certified devices, see the notes and wiring diagrams in the
Ex-specific supplement to these Operating Instructions. Please do not hesitate to
contact your E+H representative if you have any questions.
4.1 PROFIBUS PA Cable specifications

Always use a twisted, screened two-wire cable. When installing in the hazardous area,
keep to the following characteristic values (EN 50020, FISCO model):
Type A Type B
Cable structure twisted pair, one or more twisted pairs,

screened fully shielded
Wire size 0.8 mm2 0.32 mm2

(AWG 18) (AWG 22)
Loop resistance
44 :/km 112 :/km
(DC)
Impedance at 31.25 kHz 100 : ± 20% 100 : ± 30%
Attenuation constant
3 dB/km 5 dB/km
at 39 kHz
Capacitive asymmetry 2 nF/km 2 nF/km
Envelope delay distortion

1.7 Ps/km *
(7.9 through 39 kHz)
Shield coverage 90% *
Maximum Cable length

1900 m 1200 m
(incl. spurs > 1 m)
* not specified
The following cable types are suitable, for example:
Non-Ex area:
x Siemens 6XV1 830-5BH10 (grey)
x Kerpen CEL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST)YFL (grey)
x Belden 3076F (orange)
Ex area:
x Siemens 6XV1 830-5AH10 (blue)
x Kerpen CEL-PE/OSCR/PVC/FRLA FB-02YS(ST+C)YFL (blue)
Maximum overall cable length

The maximum network expansion depends on the type of explosion protection and the
cable specifications. The overall cable length is made up of the length of the main cable
and the length of all spurs (> 1 m). Note the following points:
x The highest permissible cable length is dependent on the cable type used:
Type A 1900 m
Type B 1200 m
Endress+Hauser 9
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
4 Wiring Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
x If repeaters are used the maximum permissible cable length is doubled.

A maximum of four repeaters are permitted between user and master.
Maximum spur length

The line between distribution box and field unit is described as a spur.
In the case of non Ex-applications the maximum length of a spur depends on the
number of spurs (> 1 m):
Number of spurs 1 ... 12 13... 14 15... 18 19... 24 25... 32
Maximum length per spur 120 m 90 m 60 m 30 m 1m
Number of field devices

In systems that meet FISCO in the EEx ia type of protection, the line length is limited a
maximum of 1000 m.
Up to 32 stations are possible per segment in non-Ex areas or maximum 10 stations in
hazardous area (EEx ia IIC). The actual number of users must be determined during
configuration.
Bus termination
The start and end of each field bus segment are always to be terminated with a bus
terminator. With various junction boxes (not Ex-rated) the bus termination can be
activated via a switch. If this is not the case a separate bus terminator must be installed.
Note the following points in addition:
x In the case of a branched bus segment the device furthest from the segment coupler
represents the end of the bus.
x If the field bus is extended with a repeater then the extension must also be terminated
at both ends.
Shielding and grounding

When planning the shielding and grounding for a field bus system, there are three
important points to consider:
x Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
x Explosion protection
x Safety of the personnel
To ensure the optimum electromagnetic compatibility of systems, it is important that the

system components and above all the cables, which connect the components, are
screened and that no portion of the system is unscreened.
Ideally, the cable screening will be connected to the field devices' housings, which are
usually metal. Since these housings are generally connected to the protective earth, the
shield of the bus cable will thus be grounded many times.
This approach, which provides the best electromagnetic compatibility and personnel
safety, can be used without restriction in systems with good potential matching.
In the case of systems without potential matching, a mains frequency (50 Hz) equalising
current can flow between two grounding points, which in unfavorable cases, e.g. when
it exceeds the permissible shield current, may destroy the cable.
To prevent low-frequency equalising currents, it is wise with systems without potential
matching system to connect the cable screening only on one side with the local ground
(or protective earth) and connect all further ground points capacitively.
Further information
General information and further notes regarding the wiring can be found in the
BA 198F.
10 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
4.2 Connection of the limit switch
4.2.1 Connection with cable gland
Procedure:
1. Unscrew connection compartment cover from transmitter housing.
2. Run the PROFIBUS cable through the appropriate cable entries.
3. Connect the cables in accordance with the wiring diagram: see Fig. 5 and Fig. 6
" Caution!
– The PROFIBUS cable can be damaged!
In systems without additional potential matching systems, line-frequency
equalising currents may occur which damage the cable and/or the screen,
should the cable screening be grounded at several points.
In such cases the shielding of the cable is to be grounded on only one side,
i.e. it must not be connected to the ground terminal of the housing. The shield
that is not connected should be insulated!
– We recommend that the PROFIBUS not be looped using conventional cable
glands. If you later replace even just one measuring device, the bus
communication will have to be interrupted.
! Note!
– The terminals for the PROFIBUS connection (1/2) possess integrated reverse
polarity protection. This ensures correct signal transmission via the field bus even
if lines are confused.
– Conductor cross-section: maximum 2.5 mm2
– Observe the system's grounding concept.
– Select the Bus address using the miniature switch.
4. Screw the connection compartment cover back onto the housing.
FEL 50 A
M 20 x 1.5
ø5 … 9 mm
(ø0.2 … 0.35 in)
max. 2.5 mm²

(max. AWG 14)
max. 4 mm²
(max. AWG 12)
3 mm
(1/8 in)
Fig. 5 Connection of transmitter with cable gland
Endress+Hauser 11
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
FEL50A
Address
ON SW
OFF HW
PA - PA + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
PA– PA+
– : 9 V…32 V (DC)
U…
Fig. 6 Assignment of screw terminals
PROFIBUS PA line:
Terminal No. 1: PA –
Terminal No. 2: PA+
conductor cross-section: maximum 2.5 mm2
4.2.2 Connection with PROFIBUS PA M12 plug-in connector

The Liquiphant PROFIBUS PA version with M12 plug-in connector is supplied
completely wired. All you need to do is connect it to the bus with a pre-terminated cable.
A B
3 4
PA–
5
C Socket insert (female)
2 1
PA+
6
3
BK 4 BU
PA–
D Device plug on housing (male)
BN 1 2
PA+
7
Fig. 7 PROFIBUS PA M12 pin assignment
A = Protection cap for device plug

B = Fieldbus device plug
C = Socket insert (female)
D = Device plug on housing (male)
Pin assignment / Colour codes:
1 = Brown wire: PA+
2 = Unconnected
3 = Blue line: PA–
4 = Black line: Ground (Notes for connection see page 15)
6 = Positioning slot
12 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
7 = Positioning lug
4.3 Connection data
Connection data PROFIBUS PA
Ui d 30 VDC
Ii d 500 mA
Pi d 5.5 W
Li d 10.0 PH
Ci d 5 nF
Cable entry
Cable gland: M20x1.5 or Pg 13.5
Cable entry: G ½ or ½ NPT
PROFIBUS PA M12 plug-in connector
Supply voltage
All the following voltages are terminal voltages directly at the device:
Variant Terminal voltage
Minimum Maximum
Standard 9V 32 V
EEx ia (FISCO model) 9V 17.5 V
EEx ia (Entity concept) 9V 24 V
Current consumption
Current consumption over the whole voltage area is approx. 11 mA.
4.4 PROFIBUS PA M12 plug-in connector
! Note!
This connector can only be used for a PROFIBUS PA device.
With PROFIBUS PA the connection system allows you to connect devices to the fieldbus
using standardised mechanical connections such as branches and distributor
elements. This connection technology using prefabricated distribution modules and
plug-in connectors offers substantial advantages over conventional wiring:
x Field devices can be removed, replaced or added at any time during normal
operation. Communications will not be interrupted.
x This simplifies mounting and maintenance significantly.
x Existing cable infrastructures can be used and expanded instantly, e.g. when
constructing new star distributors using 4-channel or 8-channel junction boxes.
Optionally, the Liquiphant can be supplied from the factory with a pre-installed fieldbus
device plug-in connector. Field bus connectors for retrofitting can be ordered from E+H
as a spare part (see page 35).
Endress+Hauser 13
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
A B
45.0 mm
3 4 (1.766") 150/300 mm
PA–
C 5
2 1
PA+ M 12 x 1 M20*1.5
6
4 3
BK BU
PA–
D
BN 1 2
PA+
7
Fig. 8 Connectors for connecting to the PROFIBUS PA
A = Protection cap for device plug

B = Fieldbus device plug
C = Socket insert (female)
D = Device plug on housing (male)
Pin assignment / color codes:

1 = Brown wire: PA+
2 = Unconnected
3 = Blue line: PA–
4 = Black line: Ground (Notes for connection see page 15)
6 = Positioning slot
7 = Positioning lug
Technical data (field bus connector):

Connection cross section 0.75 mm2
Connector thread M20x1.5
Degree of protection IP 67 in accordance with DIN 40050 IEC 529
Contact surface CuZnAu
Housing material CuZn, surface Ni
Flammability V - 2 in accordance with UL - 94
Nominal current per contact 3A
Nominal voltage 125...150 V DC in accordance with the VDE standard 01 10/ISO Group 10
Resistance to tracking KC 600
Volume resistance d8 m: in accordance with IEC 512 Part 2
Insulation resistance d 1012 : in accordance with IEC 512 Part 2
14 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
4.5 Potential matching system

For maximum EMC protection, e.g. near frequency convertors, it is advisable to connect
the housing and cable screening using a potential matching line (PAL)
(maximum wire cross-sectional area: 4 mm², fixed conductor).
Please pay attention to the following points:

x Ground the device using the external ground terminal
(only for devices in hazardous areas).
x The bus cable screening may not be interrupted.
x Ground the screening at each end of the cable, and always try to keep the connecting
cable between the screening and ground as short as possible.
x With large potential differences between the individual ground points, only one point
is connected with the reference ground. All the other screening ends are connected
with an HF-compatible condenser with reference potential
(e.g. ceramic condenser 10 nF/250 V~).
" Caution!
Applications subject to explosion protection only have approval under certain
conditions for multiple grounding of the protective screening, see EN 60079-14.
You can find further information on the structure and the grounding of the network in the
operating manual BA 198F "PROFIBUS PA: Guideline on project planning and
commissioning" and the PROFIBUS PA specification EN 50170 (DIN 19245).
4.6 Degree of protection

x Electronic insert: IP 20, NEMA 1
x Housing: depending on version, see KA ... (Basic device)
table "Supplementary documentation" page 39
Endress+Hauser 15
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
4.7 Post connection check

Perform the following checks after completing electrical mounting of the measuring
device:
Device condition and specifications Notes
Are cables or the device damaged (visual inspection)?
Electrical connection of meter Notes
Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?

9...32 V DC
Do the cables comply with the specifications? see page 9
Do the cables have adequate strain relief?
Are the cables correctly segregated by type?

Without loops and crossovers?
Are the fieldbus cables correctly connected? See the wiring diagram
inside the cover of the
terminal compartment
Are all screw terminals firmly tightened?
Have all the measures pertaining to grounding and potential matching see page 15
been carried out correctly?
Are all cable entries installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed?
Cables looped as “water traps”?
Are all housing covers installed and firmly tightened?
PROFIBUS PA electrical connection Notes
Are all the connecting components (T-boxes, junction boxes, –

connectors, etc.) connected together correctly?
Has each field bus segment been terminated at both ends with a bus –
terminator?
Has the maximum length of the field bus cable been observed in see page 9
accordance with the PROFIBUS specifications?
Has the maximum length of the spurs been observed in accordance see page 10
with the PROFIBUS specifications?
Is the field bus cable fully shielded and correctly grounded? see page 10
16 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 5 Operation
5 Operation
5.1 Operation at a glance

You have a number of options for configuring and commissioning the measuring device:
1. Configuration programs
The profile and device-specific parameters are primarily configured using the
PROFIBUS DP/PA interface. For this, there are special configuration and/or operating
programs from different manufacturers available to the user.
2. Miniature switch
The settings from the PROFIBUS PA device bus address can be made using the
miniature switch on the surface of the FEL 50 A.
2
FEL50A
Address
ON SW
OFF HW
PA - PA + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON SW
OFF HW
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 9 Operation options for Liquiphant PROFIBUS PA
1 Configuration/operating programs for operation using PROFIBUS PA

2 Miniature switch for addressing
Endress+Hauser 17
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
5 Operation Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
5.2 On-site configuration/operation

Only the device address can be set on the electronic insert.
The two light emitting diodes indicate standby or the status of the tuning
fork (covered/free).
Address
FEL50A
Address ON SW
OFF HW
ON SW
OFF HW
PA - PA + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Plug for Service Tool

1 2
Yellow LED on: Tuning fork covered

Yellow LED flashing: Fault
Green LED on: Ready for operation
Green LED flashing: Communication
Fig. 10 On-site operation for Liquiphant PROFIBUS PA
5.2.1 Setting the device address
Choice of device address

x An address must be assigned to each PROFIBUS PA device. The process control
system only recognises the device when the address is set correctly.
x In a PROFIBUS PA network, each address may be assigned only once.
x Valid device addresses are inside the range of 0 to 126. All the devices are supplied
from the factory with the value 126.
x The factory-set address 126 can be used for a functional test of the device and for
connections to a PROFIBUS PA network in operation. Subsequently, this address must
be changed to be able to include additional devices.
Software Addressing
Software addressing is only effective if DIP switch 8 is in the "ON" position
(factory setting).
For additional information on the addressing procedure, please consult operating
manual BA198F, Chapter 5.7.
18 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Hardware Addressing
Example: 2 + 8 = 10 = Address
FEL50A
Address
ON SW
PA - PA +
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HW
ON SW
OFF HW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
Hardware
addressing
Fig. 11 Device addressing for Liquiphant PROFIBUS PA

(Example: Address 10 Hardware Addressing)
Hardware addressing is only effective if DIP switch 8 is in the "OFF" position.

The address is then set using DIP switches 1 to 7 according to the following table:
Switch no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Value in "ON" position 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 SW
Value in "OFF" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HW
position
Example address 0 2 0 8 0 0 0 HW
The newly set address becomes valid 10 seconds after the change.
Endress+Hauser 19
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
5.3 Communication PROFIBUS PA
5.3.1 System architecture
Personal computer
with Commuwin II, PLC
Proficard or Profiboard
Segment coupler
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS PA
Fig. 12 System architecture PROFIBUS DP/PA
A maximum of 32 transmitters (10 in hazardous area EEx ia IIC acc. to FISCO model)
can be connected to the bus per segment. The bus voltage is supplied by the segment
coupler. Both on-site and remote operation are possible.
For more detailed information on the PROFIBUS PA standard, please consult the
operating instructions BA198F, and the standards EN 50170/DIN 19245
(PROFIBUS PA) and EN 50020 (FISCO model).
20 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
5.3.2 Device data bases (GSD)

The device data base (x.gsd) contains a description of the properties of a
PROFIBUS PA device, e.g. which data transmission rate is supported by the device
or which digital information in which format the PLC receives from the device.
In addition, for project planning of a PROFIBUS DP network, you also require bitmap
files with which the appropriate measuring point can be represented graphically in the
project planning software.
Each device receives an ID number from the PROFIBUS User Organisation (PNO).
The name of the device data base (GSD) and the appropriate files are derive from this.
The Liquiphant has the ID number 0x152b (hex) = 5419 (dec).
Reference sources
x Internet (ftp server): ftp://194.196.152.203/pub/communic/gsd/fel50a.exe
x CD-ROM with all GSD files for E+H devices; Order No.: 50097200
x GSD library of the PROFIBUS User Organisation (PNO): http://www.PROFIBUS.com
Directory structure
The files are stored in the following directory structure:
FEL50A/PA/Profile3/Revision1.0/
BMP
Eh152b_d.bmp
Eh152b_n.bmp
Eh152b_s.bmp
DIB
Eh152b_d.dib
Eh152b_n.dib
Eh152b_s.dib
GSD
Standard/Eh3_152b.gsd
Typdat5x/Eh3152bx.200
Info
Liesmich.pdf
Readme.pdf
x The GSD file in the "Standard" directory is used for PLCs which do not support an
"Identifier Format" but only an "Identifier Byte", e.g. PLC5 from Allen-Bradley.
General database file

Alternatively to the specific GSD, the PNO makes a general database file available with
the designation PA139720.gsd for devices with a discrete input block. This file supports
the transmission of the main measured value.
When using the general database file, in the function "Ident Number" (V6H0) you must
select the setting "Profile".
Endress+Hauser 21
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
5.3.3 Cyclical data exchange
Block model of the Liquiphant M/S (HT) with FEL 50 A

Measured variable
Sensor Physical Bock

Signal evaluation Device-specific properties,
e.g. measuring point
designation
Primary value
063 OUT_D
Transducer block Discrete Input Function Block Value Status
Device-descriptive Parameter for processing of
parameter measured variable, e.g. Status
e.g. Calibration PV_D
inversion etc.
e.g.
PLC
Fig. 13 Block model
The block model shows which data can be continuously exchanged during continuous
operation (i.e. in cyclical data traffic) between the Liquiphant and the PLC.
x In the transducer block, a switching status and a status are derived from the
measured variable (frequency of the oscillating fork) and the discrete input function
block made available. There, it can be inverted and output to the PLC via OUT_D.
Configuration with Network Design Tool

Data exchange can be configured using a network design tool.
Use the network design tool for you PLC and add the Liquiphant to the network. Make
sure that the assigned address agrees with the set device address.
22 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant oPLC (Input data)

With the Data_Exchange service, a PLC can read input data from the Liquiphant in the
form of an answer mail. The cyclic data telegram has the following structure:
Index Data Access Data format/Remarks

Input data
0 Main measured value -> Read 1 Byte (0,1)
limit level: covered (1) / uncovered (0)
1 Status code for main measured value Read see "Status Codes"
Status Codes
The Status Codes OUT_D and PV_D are each 1byte in size and have the following
meaning:
OUT_D (Discrete Input Function Block)
Status Device status Meaning Main

code measured
value
80 Hex GOOD OK x
(error-free)
84 Hex GOOD Parameter changed x

(Static revision was increased)
51 Hex UNCERTAIN Signal conversion inaccurate x

Sensor EEPROM OK
(Jam frequency reached, fork blocked or highly-viscous
medium)
4C Hex BAD Initial value Failsafe

(Fail-safe-Mode aktiv)
44 Hex BAD Last usable value Failsafe

(Fail-safe-Mode aktiv)
10 Hex BAD Sensor Failure Failsafe
PV_D (Transducer Block)
Status Device status Meaning Main

code measured
value
80 Hex GOOD OK x
(error-free)
84 Hex GOOD Parameter changed x

(Static revision was increased)
51 Hex UNCERTAIN Signal conversion inaccurate x
Sensor EEPROM OK
(Jam frequency reached, fork blocked or highly-viscous
medium)
12 Hex BAD Sensor error x

(Corrosion alarm, frequency too high, fork corroded)
0D Hex BAD Device error x

(Jam frequency reached, Sensor EEPROM
not OK, fork removed from EEPROM blocked)
04 Hex BAD Fork exchanged or false CS in the sensor EEPROM x
Endress+Hauser 23
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
5.3.4 Acyclical data exchange

With acyclic data exchange access, the instrument parameters in the physical,
transducer and discrete input block can be accessed as can the device management
with as PROFIBUS DP master class 2 (e.g. Commuwin II).
Slot/Index tables
The device parameters are listed in the table below. You can access the parameters
using the slot and index numbers.
The individual blocks contain standard parameters, block parameters and
manufacturer-specific parameters.
Device management
Parameter E+H Matrix Slot Index Size Type Read Write Storage
(CW II) [bytes] Class
DIRECTORY_OBJECT_ 1 0 12 Array of x constant
HEADER UNSIGNED16
COMPOSITE_LIST_DIR 1 1 24 Array of x constant
_ENTRIES UNSIGNED16
Discrete Input Function Block

Standard parameter
BLOCK OBJECT 1 16 20 DS-32* x constant
ST_REVISION 1 17 2 UNSIGNED16 x non-vol.
TAG_DESC 1 18 32 OSTRING x x static
STRATEGY 1 19 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
ALERT_KEY 1 20 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
TARGET_MODE 1 21 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
MODE_BLK 1 22 3 DS-37* x dynamic
ALARM_SUM 1 23 8 DS-42* x dynamic
BATCH 1 24 10 DS-67* x x static
Gap 1 25
Block parameter
OUT_D V6H2 (value) 1 26 2 DS-34* x dynamic
V6H3 (Status)
CHANNEL 1 30 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
INVERT V3H3 1 31 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
FAIL_SAFE_TYPE V1H0 1 36 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
FAIL_SAFE_VAL_D 1 37 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
SIMULATE 1 40 3 DS-51 x x static
E+H Parameter
VIEW_1 FB 1 56 13+2 OSTRING x
Discrete Input Transducer Block

Standard parameter
24 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Block parameter
PV_D V0H0 1 73 DS-34 constant
E+H Parameter
FREQ_ACT_BASE V0H8 1 84 4 FLOAT x dynamic
DENSITY_SWITCH V3H2 1 85 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
FREQ_AIR_BASE V7H0 1 86 2 UNSIGNED16 x non-vol.
FREQ_SWITCH_LOW_LD V7H1 1 87 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
FREQ_SWITCH_HIGH_LD V7H2 1 88 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
FREQ_SWITCH_LOW_HD V7H1 1 89 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
FREQ_SWITCH_HIGH_HD V7H2 1 90 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
TIME_DELAY_COVER V3H0 1 95 4 FLOAT x x static
TIME_DELAY_FREE V3H1 1 96 4 FLOAT x x static
OVERFILL_PROTECTION V1H8 1 100 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
VIEW_1 TB 1 105 13 x
Physical Block
Standard Parameter
SOFTWARE_REVISION 0 24 16 OSTRING x constant
HARDWARE_REVISION 0 25 16 OSTRING x constant
DEVICE_MAN_ID 0 26 2 UNSIGNED16 x constant
DEVICE_ID 0 27 16 OSTRING x constant
DEVICE_SER_NUMBER VAH5 0 28 16 OSTRING x constant
DIAGNOSIS 0 29 4 OSTRING x dynamic
DIAGNOSIS_EXTENSION 0 30 6 OSTRING x dynamic
DIAGNOSIS_MASK 0 31 4 OSTRING x constant
DIAGNOSIS_MASK_ 0 32 6 OSTRING x constant
EXTENSION
DEVICE_CERTIFICATION 0 33 32 OSTRING x constant
WRITE_LOCKING V9H9 0 34 2 UNSIGNED16 x x non-vol.
FACTORY_RESET V9H5 0 35 2 UNSIGNED16 x x static
DESCRIPTOR VAH0 0 36 32 OSTRING x x static
DEVICE_MESSAGE 0 37 32 OSTRING x x static
DEVICE_INSTAL_DATE 0 38 8 OSTRING x x static
LOCAL_OP_ENA 0 39 0 not supported x x non-vol.
IDENT_NUMBER_ V6H0 0 40 1 UNSIGNED8 x x static
SELECTOR
Endress+Hauser 25
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
E+H Parameter
ACTUAL_ERROR 0 54 2 Uinteger16 x dynamic
LAST_ERROR 0 55 2 Uinteger16 x x dynamic/
non-vol.
UP_DOWN_FEAT_ 0 56 1 OSTRING x constant
SUPPORT
DEVICE_BAS_ADDRESS 0 59 1 Integer8 x dynamic
DEVICE_SOFTWARE_NR 0 60 2 Uinteger16 x constant
DEVICE_ID_NUM 0 70 2 Uinteger16 x constant
VIEW_1 PB 0 71
26 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
5.3.5 Parameter access with Commuwin II

Using a PROFIBUS DP master class 2 such as Commuwin II, you can access the block
parameters. Commuwin II runs on an IBM compatible PC or Notebook.
The computer must be equipped with a PROFIBUS interface, i.e. PROFIBOARD for PCs
and PROFICARD for Notebooks. During system integration, the computer is logged-on
as a master class 2.
Connection
x Profiboard for connection to PC
x Proficard for connection to laptop
Creation of device list

x Operation requires the mounting of the server PA-DPV1. Selecting "PA-DPV1" in the
menu "Connection setup" sets up the connection and an empty device list appears.
x The device list with the tags is generated with the "Create with tag" checkbox.
x There are two operating modes:
Click here for

standard operation
Click here for profile

operation of the
Discrete Input Block
– Select E+H standard operation by clicking the device name.

– Select the profile operation of the PROFIBUS standard blocks by clicking the
appropriate block (e.g. "DI" for the discreet input block of the Liquiphant).
You can specify a tag name for each block.
x Configure the system using the "Device Data" menu.
"Device Data" menu

You can select between operation using a matrix or the graphic desktop using the
Device Data menu.
x With matrix operation, the devices and/or the profile parameters are loaded into a
matrix. In the case of standard option, this is the E+H standard matrix, in the case of
profile operation, this is the block matrix of the selected block.
You can change a parameter when the appropriate matrix field has been selected.
x With graphical operation, the operation sequence is represented in a series of
images with parameters. The images "Status" and "Calibration" are available.
The meaning of the parameters and configuration sequence are described in Chap. 6.
Endress+Hauser 27
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Fig. 14 Graphic operation with "Status"
Fig. 15 Graphic operation with "Calibration"
! Note!
You can find further information on the Commuwin II operating program in the operating
instructions BA 124F.
28 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 6 Commissioning
6 Commissioning
6.1 Mounting and function check

Make sure that the Mounting and connection checks have been carried out before you
commission your measuring point:
x "Connection check" checklist (see page 16).
6.2 Commissioning with Commuwin II

As soon as you have connected the device to the PA bus and switched on
the power supply, the Liquiphant limit switch is operational. This is indicated
by the green operation LED. If the LED is flashing, then the device is communicating.
The device was preset before leaving the factory.
1. Start Commuwin II and set up the connection to the bus via the server PA-DPV1.
After this, create the device list, define the device address and select "Liquiphant"
by clicking.
2. Click the matrix icons. The Commuwin II operating matrix is displayed.
Fig. 3 Commuwin II user interface
Endress+Hauser 29
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
6 Commissioning Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
6.2.1 Operation using Commuwin II matrix
Matrix field Meaning Selection/Input
V3H2 Changing the density factor >0.7 g/cm³

>0.5 g/cm³
V3H3 Inversion of the output value Not inverted: Sensor covered oOutput "1"
Inverted: Sensor covered oOutput "0"
V3H0 Setting the delay times 0.5...60 seconds

V3H1
VAH0 Assignment of the TAG Maximum 32 characters
V1H0 Failure response FSAFE VALUE:o

Output of fail-safe value a
VH21 input in the Discrete Input Block
(FSAFE_VAL_D)
WRONG VALUE:o
Output of detected value
LAST_GOOD_VALUE:o
Output of the last valid value
See page 23: oOUT_D
Device status = BAD
VH99 Unlocking the matrix 0 - xxxx locks 2457

33998 enables VH18 selection
VH18 Operating mode STANDARD

WHG
VH96 Simulation DISABLE

ENABLE (VH00 is manipulated
via VH97 (0.1))
VH97 Simulation value 0,1 oSimulation from VH00
Note:
If the device has been put into WHG mode, the matrix is automatically locked.
This lock can only be lifted with VH99 = 33998 + VH18 = STANDARD.
30 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU

/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
+HLGW
36'
Endress+Hauser

Typ
H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9
6.2.2
V0 PRIMARY VALUE MEASURED FREQ.
Product code
CALIBRATION (Display) (Display)
FSAFE VALUE
V1 OVERSPILL PROT.
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

FAIL-SAFE MODE
SAFETY SETTINGS (Options)
(Selection)
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
V2
V3 ON DELAY TIME OFF DELAY TIME DENSITY FACTOR INVERT

EXTENDED CAL. (Input) (Input) (Selection) (Selection)
.8*3/
V4
V5
MANUFACT. GSD
V6 DEVICE ADDRESS OUT VALUE OUT STATUS DEVICE PROFILE
IDENT NUMBER
Commuwin II operating matrix
PROFIBUS PARAM: (Display) (Display) (Display) (Display)

(Selection)
SWITCH-OFF
V7 ZERO FREQUENCY SWITCH-ON VALUE
VALUE
SENSOR DATA (Display, Service) (Display, Service)
(Display, Service)
BB
V8
ATB Schorch ref. No.

SIMULATION SECURITY
V9 DIAGNOSTIC CODE LAST DIAGN. CODE SOFTWARE NO. SOFTWARE RESET SIMULATION
VALUE LOCKING
ATB Schorch Auftrags-Nr.

SERVICE / SIMULATE (Display, Service) (Display, Service) (Display, Service) (Input, Service) (Selection, Service)
(Input, Service) (Selection)
VA DESCRIPTOR SERIAL NUMBER

COMMUNICATION (Input) (Display)
31
6 Commissioning

Seite / Page /
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
7 Maintenance Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
7 Maintenance
32 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 8 Accessories
8 Accessories
There is a range of accessories available for the Liquiphant. These can be ordered
separately from Endress+Hauser.
Commuwin II
Operating program for intelligent devices o Order No.: FXS 113-###
Proficard
For connection of a laptop to the PROFIBUS o Order No.: 016570-5260
Profiboard
For connection of a PC to the PROFIBUS o Order No.: 52005721
For additional accessories for the Liquiphant, see KA ... (Basic device) table page 39..
Endress+Hauser 33
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
9 Troubleshooting Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 System error messages
Code Error description Cause Action
101 A Checksum error • Reset

Total reset and recalib. • If alarm still present after
req. reset, replace electronics
102 A Checksum error • Device switched off before • Reset

Total reset and recalib. data was saved
req. • EMC problem • Avoid EMC problems
• E2PROM defective • If alarm still present after
reset, replace electronics
125 A Sensor defective • Fork removed • Insert fork

• Chopping frequency reached • Check fork for blockage and
remove same as necessary
W103 Initialisation active Device start-up after reset Wait
Tab. 1 System error messages
For other error possiblilities, see KA ... (Basic device) table page 39.
34 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 9 Troubleshooting
9.2 Spare parts

For spare parts KA ... (Basic device) table "Supplementary documentation" page 39.
! Note!
You can order spare parts directly from your E+H service organisation using the serial
number which is printed on the transmitter nameplate (see page 6). The corresponding
spare part number is found on every spare part. Installation instructions are printed on
the enclosed package insert.
If the device designation changes, you must order a changed nameplate. You must then
transfer the data for the new device to the changed nameplate and then fix the plate to
the housing of the Liquiphant. See information in package insert.
" Caution!
x It is not possible to convert a standard device into an Ex-system by replacing parts.
x When repairing certified device, keep to the appropriate regulations.
x With FM approved devices, it is forbidden to make changes to the device which are
not expressly approved in the operating instructions. A violation of this ban may make
the approval for operating this device null and void.
9.3 Return
See KA ... (Basic device) table "Supplementary documentation" page 39.
Endress+Hauser 35
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
9 Troubleshooting Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
9.4 Software history
Software version / Changes to software Changes to documentation

date
V 1.00 / 10.2001 Original software.

Compatible with:
– Commuwin II
(version 2.05.03 and higher)
9.5 Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser

On the rear page of these operating instructions, you can find the contact addresses of
Endress+Hauser, to whom you should address your queries.
36 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 10 Technical data
10 Technical data
10.1 Technical data at a glance
Application
Application Maximum or minimum detection in tanks or piping with fluids of all types,
also in hazardous areas and in the food and pharmaceuticals industries.
Function and system design
Measuring principle The tuning fork of the sensor oscillates in resonance frequency. This
frequency is reduced when covered with liquid. The change in frequency
then activates a limit switch.
Measuring device The device possesses a digital output with PROFIBUS PA protocol.
Input variables
Measured variable Level (limit value)
Fluid density Configuration using Commuwin II: > 0.5 g/cm3 or > 0.7 g/cm3
Output variables
Output signal • PROFIBUS PA
FEL 50A
Setting Level limit GN YE
OUT_D = 0
PA-Bussignal
not inverted
OUT_D = 1
PA-Bussignal
OUT_D = 1
PA-Bussignal
inverted
OUT_D = 0
PA-Bussignal
Signal on alarm Failure information can be opened using the following interfaces:
• Flashing yellow LED
• Status code
• Diagnosis code
Power supply
Electrical connections • 3 screw terminals

• PROFIBUS PA M12 plug-in connector
Cable entries Cable gland: M20x1.5 or Pg 13.5

Cable entry: G ½ or ½ NPT
PROFIBUS PADiscrete-Input-Block M12 plug-in connector
Supply voltage Two-core cable connection, 9...32 V DC
Power consumption 100...350 mW
Endress+Hauser 37
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
10 Technical data Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA
Measuring accuracy
Reference operating • Ambient temperature: 23 °C

conditions • Medium temperature: 23 °C
• Fluid density: 1 g/cm3 (water)
• Medium viscosity: 1 mm2/s
• Medium pressure: 0 bar
• Sensor Mounting: vertical from above
• Density setting: > 0.7
Accuracy • Measuring error: specified constructively max. ±1 mm

• Repeatability: 0.1 mm
• Switching hysteresis: approx. 2 mm
• Impact of medium temperature: max. +1.4...–2.8 mm (–50...+150 °C)
• Impact of medium density: max. +4.8...–3.5 mm (0.5...1.5 g/cm3)
• Influence of medium pressure: max. 0...–2.5 mm (0 ...64 bar)
Operating conditions
Installation conditions
Installation instructions See KA ... (Basic device) table page 39.
Environment conditions
Ambient temperature –50... +70 °C

For operation outdoors with strong sunlight penetration, you should use a
protective cover.
Storage temperature –50...+80 °C
Climate class IEC 68, Part 2-38, Fig. 2a
Degree of protection Polyester, steel and aluminium housing: IP 66 / IP 67 to EN 60529

Aluminium housing (EEx d, EEx de): IP 66 / IP 68 to EN 60529 (1 m, 24h)
Vibration resistance IEC 68, Part 2-6; (10...55 Hz, 0.15 mm, 100 cycles)
Electromagnetic • Interference emission to EN 61326; Equipment Class B

compatibility (EMC) • Interference immunity to EN 61326; Appendix A (Industrial sector, 10 V/m)
and NAMUR recommendation NE 21 (EMC).
Process conditions
Process temperature Liquiphant M: –50...+150 °C

range Liquiphant S (HT): –60...+280 °C (optionally 300 °C)
(For exceptions, see Process Connections)
Process pressure limits –1...+64 bar across complete temperature range

(For exceptions, see Process Connections)
State of aggregation Fluid
Density min. 0.5 g/cm3
Viscosity maximum 10’000 mm2/s
Solid matter maximum dia. 5 mm
Mechanical construction
Design / dimensions See KA ... (Basic device) table "Supplementary documentation" page 39.
Weight See KA ... (Basic device) table "Supplementary documentation" page 39.
Materials See KA ... (Basic device) table "Supplementary documentation" page 39.
38 Endress+Hauser
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Liquiphant M/S (HT), FEL 50 A PROFIBUS PA 10 Technical data
Process connection See KA ... (Basic device) table page 39.
User interface
Operating concept • On-site operation: Miniature switch for addressing

• Commuwin II
Display 1 green LED: Standby/communication

1 yellow LED: Covered status of tuning fork/error display
Certificates and approvals
CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the
EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by
affixing the CE mark.
Overspill protection to WHG
External standards and EN 60529

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP code)
EN 61010
Protection Measures for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control,
Regulation and Laboratory Procedures.
EN 61326
Interference emission (Equipment Class B), interference immunity
(Appendix A - Industrial sector)
NAMUR
Association for Standards for Control and Regulation in the Chemical
Industry
Ex Approvals ATEX II 1/2 G+D EEx ia IIC T6 _________________________________ XA 154F

ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6
( Including warning "Electrostatic discharge") __________________ XA 158F
ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 ______________________________________ XA 159F
ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6 _____________________________________XA 031F
ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6 ____________________________________XA 108F
Ordering information
The E+H service organisation can provide detailed ordering information and
information on the order codes on request.
Accessories
See page 33.
Supplementary documentation
Documentation • SI 027F "PROFIBUS" (Systeminformation)
• TI 328F "Liquiphant M FTL 50/FTL 51 H" (Technical Information)

• TI 347F "Liquiphant M FTL 51 C" (Technical Information)
• TI 354F "Liquiphant S FTL 70/FTL 71" (Technical Information)
• KA 143F "Liquiphant M FTL 50/FTL 51" (Operating Instructions)

• KA 144F "Liquiphant M FTL 50 H/FTL 51 H" (Operating Instructions)
• KA 162F "Liquiphant M FTL 51 C" (Operating Instructions)
• KA 163F "Liquiphant M FTL 50-########7#" (Operating Instructions)
• KA 164F "Liquiphant M FTL 50 H-########7#" (Operating Instructions)
• KA 172F "Liquiphant S FTL 70/FTL 71" (Operating Instructions)
• KA 173F "Liquiphant S FTL 70/71 -########7##" (Operating Instructions)
• BA 198F "PROFIBUS DP/PA: Guidelines on project planning

and commissioning" (Operating Instructions)
Endress+Hauser 39
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
/HFNDJHZlFKWHU
/HDNDJH'HWHFWLRQ
Netherland Bolivia Pakistan

Europe ❑ Endress+Hauser B.V. Tritec S.R.L. Speedy Automation
Naarden Cochabamba Karachi
Austria Tel. (035) 6958611, Fax (035) 6958825 Tel. (042) 56993, Fax (042) 50981 Tel. (021) 7722953, Fax (021) 7736884
❑ Endress+Hauser Ges.m.b.H. Brazil Papua-Neuguinea
Norway
Wien ❑ Samson Endress+Hauser Ltda.
Tel. (01) 88056-0, Fax (01) 88056-35 ❑ Endress+Hauser A/S SBS Electrical Pty Limited
Tranby Sao Paulo Port Moresby
Belarus Tel. (032) 859850, Fax (032) 859851 Tel. (011) 50313455, Fax (011) 50313067 Tel. 3251188, Fax 3259556
❑ Belorgsintez Canada Philippines
Poland
Minsk ❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd. ❑ Endress+Hauser Philippines Inc.
Tel. (0172) 263166, Fax (0172) 263111 ❑ Endress+Hauser Polska Sp. z o.o.
Burlington, Ontario Metro Manila
Warszawy
Belgium / Luxembourg Tel. (905) 6819292, Fax (905) 6819444 Tel. (2) 3723601-05, Fax (2) 4121944
Tel. (022) 7201090, Fax (022) 7201085
❑ Endress+Hauser N.V. Chile
Portugal Singapore
Brussels ❑ Endress+Hauser Chile Ltd. ❑ Endress+Hauser (S.E.A.) Pte., Ltd.
Tel. (02) 2480600, Fax (02) 2480553 Tecnisis - Tecnica de Sistemas Industriais
Linda-a-Velha Santiago Singapore
Bulgaria Tel. (21) 4267290, Fax (21) 4267299 Tel. (02) 3213009, Fax (02) 3213025 Tel. 5668222, Fax 5666848
INTERTECH-AUTOMATION Colombia
Sofia Romania South Korea
Colsein Ltda.
Tel. (02) 664869, Fax (02) 9631389 Romconseng S.R.L. ❑ Endress+Hauser (Korea) Co., Ltd.
Bogota D.C.
Bucharest Seoul
Croatia Tel. (01) 2367659, Fax (01) 6104186
Tel. (01) 4101634, Fax (01) 4101634 Tel. (02) 6587200, Fax (02) 6592838
❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. Costa Rica
Zagreb Russia Taiwan
EURO-TEC S.A.
Tel. (01) 6637785, Fax (01) 6637823 ❑ Endress+Hauser Moscow Office San Jose Kingjarl Corporation
Moscow Tel. (02) 961542, Fax (02) 961542 Taipei R.O.C.
Cyprus Tel. (095) 1587564, Fax (095) 1589871 Tel. (02) 27183938, Fax (02) 27134190
I+G Electrical Services Co. Ltd. Ecuador
Nicosia Slovakia Insetec Cia. Ltda. Thailand
Tel. (02) 484788, Fax (02) 484690 Transcom Technik s.r.o. Quito ❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd.
Bratislava Tel. (02) 269148, Fax (02) 461833 Bangkok
Czech Republic Tel. (7) 44888684, Fax (7) 44887112 Tel. (2) 9967811-20, Fax (2) 9967810
❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. Guatemala
Praha Slovenia ACISAAutomatizacionYControlIndustrial S.A. Vietnam
Tel. (026) 6784200, Fax (026) 6784179 ❑ Endress+Hauser D.O.O. Ciudad de Guatemala, C.A. Tan Viet Bao Co. Ltd.
Ljubljana Tel. (03) 345985, Fax (03) 327431 Ho Chi Minh City
Denmark
Tel. (061) 1592217, Fax (061) 1592298 Tel. (08) 8335225, Fax (08) 8335227
❑ Endress+Hauser A/S Mexico
Søborg Spain ❑ Endress+Hauser S.A. de C.V. Iran
Tel. (70) 131132, Fax (70) 132133 ❑ Endress+Hauser S.A. Mexico City PATSA Co.
Sant Just Desvern Tel. (5) 5682405, Fax (5) 5687459 Tehran
Estonia
Tel. (93) 4803366, Fax (93) 4733839 Paraguay Tel. (021) 8754748, Fax(021) 8747761
ELVI-Aqua
Tartu Sweden Incoel S.R.L Israel
Tel. (7) 441638, Fax (7) 441582 ❑ Endress+Hauser AB .Asuncion Instrumetrics Industrial Control Ltd.
Tel. (021) 213989, Fax (021) 226583 Tel-Aviv
Finland Sollentuna
Tel. (08) 55511600, Fax (08) 55511655 Uruguay Tel. (03) 6480205, Fax (03) 6471992
❑ Endress+Hauser Oy
Espoo Circular S.A. Jordan
Switzerland Montevideo
Tel. (09) 8676740, Fax (09) 86767440
❑ Endress+Hauser AG Tel. (02) 925785, Fax (02) 929151 A.P. Parpas Engineering S.A.
France Reinach/BL 1 Amman
USA Tel. (06) 4643246, Fax (06) 4645707
❑ Endress+Hauser S.A. Tel. (061) 7157575, Fax (061) 7111650
Huningue ❑ Endress+Hauser Inc.
Turkey Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Tel. (389) 696768, Fax (389) 694802 Greenwood, Indiana
Intek Endüstriyel Ölcü ve Kontrol SistemleriIs- Tel. (317) 535-7138, Fax (317) 535-8498 Anasia Ind. Agencies
Germany tanbul Jeddah
Tel. (0212) 2751355, Fax (0212) 2662775 Venezuela Tel. (02) 6710014, Fax (02) 6725929
❑ Endress+HauserMesstechnik GmbH+Co.
Controval C.A. Lebanon
Weil am Rhein Ukraine Caracas
Tel. (07621) 975-01, Fax (07621) 975-555 Network Engineering
Photonika GmbH Tel. (02) 9440966, Fax (02) 9444554
Kiev Jbeil
Great Britain
Tel. (44) 26881, Fax (44) 26908 Tel. (3) 944080, Fax (9) 548038
❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd.
Manchester
Asia Sultanate of Oman
Yugoslavia Rep.
Tel. (0161) 2865000, Fax (0161) 9981841 Meris d.o.o. Mustafa & Jawad Sience & Industry Co. L.L.C.
China
Beograd Ruwi
Greece ❑ Endress+Hauser Shanghai
Tel.(11) 4441966, Fax (11) 4441966 Tel. 602009, Fax 607066
I & G Building Services Automation S.A. Instrumentation Co. Ltd.
Athens Shanghai United Arab Emirates
Tel. (01) 9241500, Fax (01) 9221714 Tel. (021) 54902300, Fax (021) 54902303 Descon Trading EST.
Africa Dubai
Hungary
Egypt ❑ Endress+Hauser Beijing Office Tel. (04) 2653651, Fax (04) 2653264
Mile Ipari-Elektro
Budapest Anasia Beijing
Tel. (010) 68344058, Fax: (010) 68344068 Yemen
Tel. (01) 2615535, Fax (01) 2615535 Heliopolis/Cairo YemenCompany for Ghee andSoapIndustry
Tel. (02) 4179007, Fax (02) 4179008 Hong Kong Taiz
Iceland
BIL ehf Morocco ❑ Endress+Hauser HK Ltd. Tel. (04) 230664, Fax (04) 212338
Reykjavik Oussama S.A. Hong Kong
Tel. (05) 619616, Fax (05) 619617 Casablanca Tel. 25283120, Fax 28654171
Tel. (02) 241338, Fax (02) 402657 Australia + New Zealand
Ireland India
Flomeaco Company Ltd. South Africa ❑ Endress+Hauser (India) Pvt Ltd. Australia
Kildare ❑ Endress+Hauser Pty. Ltd. Mumbai ALSTOM Australia Limited
Tel. (045) 868615, Fax (045) 868182 Sandton Tel. (022) 8521458, Fax (022) 8521927 Milperra
Tel. (011) 4441386, Fax (011) 4441977 Tel. (02) 97747444, Fax (02) 97744667
Italy Indonesia
❑ Endress+Hauser S.p.A. Tunisia PT Grama Bazita New Zealand
Cernusco s/N Milano Jakarta EMC Industrial Group Limited
Controle, Maintenance et Regulation Tel. (21) 7975083, Fax (21) 7975089
Tel. (02) 921921, Fax (02) 92107153 Tunis Auckland
Tel. (01) 793077, Fax (01) 788595 Tel. (09) 4155110, Fax (09) 4155115
Latvia Japan
Rino TK ❑ Sakura Endress Co. Ltd.
Riga Tokyo All other countries
Tel. (07) 312897, Fax (07) 312894
America Tel. (0422) 540613, Fax (0422) 550275
❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co.
Lithuania Argentina Malaysia Instruments International
UAB "Agava" ❑ Endress+Hauser Argentina S.A. ❑ Endress+Hauser (M) Sdn. Bhd. D-Weil am Rhein
Kaunas Buenos Aires Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan Germany
Tel. (07) 202410, Fax (07) 207414 Tel. (01) 145227970, Fax (01) 145227909 Tel. (03) 7334848, Fax (03) 7338800 Tel. (07621) 975-02, Fax (07621) 975345
❑ Members of the Endress+Hauser Group
BA 141F/00/en/12.01 (b)
52012215
CCS / FM6
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH

General
The Generator/Motor Cooler QLKE, QDKE and QDKR is used for
the cooling of air by means of circulating water. The cooler can
be installed for either horizontal or vertical airflow. The cooler is
equipped with removable headers that allow cleaning inside the
cooler.
Labelling
The rating plate is placed on the connection side of the cooler and
indicates the following:
• Order number.
• Product code
• Max. working pressure.
• Test pressure.
• Manufacturer.
• Year of manufacture.
• Dry weight.
• Internal liquid volume.
About Luvata
Luvata is the leading international metals supplier of solutions, services, components and
EN User´s Guide materials for manufacturing and construction. Luvata’s solutions are used in industries such
as power generation, architecture, automotive, transport, medicine, air-conditioning, indus-
Translation of the original instructions trial refrigeration, consumer products and construction. The company’s continued success
is attributed to its longevity, technological excellence and strategy of building partnerships
beyond metals. Employing over 7,500 staff in 18 countries, Luvata works in partnership
with customers such as Siemens, Toyota, CERN, Shaaz, and DWD International.
Users Guide_QLKE_QDKE_QDKR_EN_11-08. Subject to alteration.
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Safety instructions and Warnings
General Storage
• Read all the maintenance instructions before you begin For storage longer than a month, the following applies:
handling this product. • Spare coolers or coolers that have been dismantled
• The cooler shall be installed at a location where it is need a protective cover over their finned surface to
out of reach of the general public. prevent personal injury or fin damage, as the finned
• Permit only trained persons who have knowledge of the surface has sharp edges.
product and appropriate safety precautions to carry out • Coolers must be completely drained of water before
any work on the cooler. they are stored to prevent freezing or corrosion damage
inside the tubes. Both headers should be dismantled to
make sure that the cooler has been completely drained
Operating Pressure of liquid.
• The cooler must only be used in a system that is rated
for the max. working pressure MWP (MPa) and the Before commissioning (after storage)
maximum working temperature MWT (°C) specified on Before commissioning tightness of the cooler has to be
the rating plate on the cooler. ensured. Gaskets shall be replaced according to page 6.
• The cooler can only be used within the operating values
and environments that the supplier has recommended Lifting
with respect to the gas- and liquid side Lifting is done according to label on cooler. Before lifting
the cooler: Check that the lifting lugs are well tightened
and are not damaged. Check that correct lifting equip-
Assembly and connections ment is used and that the lifting hooks are of the right
• The air cooler has to be secured to its location. The size to fit the lifting lugs.
fixing points of the cooler are sufficiently stable to
carry the dry weight of the cooler and the weight of the Cleaning
liquid in the cooler. Only use environmentally friendly cleaning agents, which
• The pipe connections on the heat exchanger must will not damage the heat exchanger.
not be subjected to the weight of the connecting pipe
system. Or the expansion forces of the pipe system. Quality System
• Loading and impacts may damage the cooler. Luvata Söderköping AB is certified according to the quali-
• Header bolts should be tightened prior to commissio- ty management system ISO 9001:2008 and according to
ning of the cooler. For tightening torque and the order the environment management system ISO 14001:2004.
in which they are to be tightened, see Figure 3, page
6.
The connections must be protected against impact, exter-

nal strain and stress.
2 WWW.LUVATA.COM
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Installation Also see the section safety instructions and warnings, page 2.
Transport
The cooler is designed to withstand normal loads during When testing the pressure of the pipe system with cooler
transport. After unloading, carry out a visual inspection connected, the pressure may not exceed the test pressure
to make sure that the cooler hasn’t been damaged during specified on the rating plate on the cooler. Before com-
transport. It is very important to examine the finned missioning the venting plugs should be loosened, so that
surface of the heat exchanger. Any transport damage existing air in the cooler and pipe system will be removed.
detected must be immediately reported to the shipper and In order to avoid that any remaining air in the pipe system
to Luvata Söderköping AB. Make a note of the damage on stays in the cooler, venting should be done several times
the consignment note as well. during the first period of operation.
Adjust the correct water flow. If the flow is too low there is
Installation and pipe connections risk of deposits accumulating inside the tubes. If the flow
The cooler must be permanently anchored and located to is too high there is risk of erosion.
ensure necessary air supply. The cooler is equipped with
lifting lugs. If the QDKR double tube cooler is fitted with a leakage
detector, the size G 1/4” upper air venting nipple must
The cooler can be installed for either horizontal or vertical be removed to prevent exposing the detector system to
airflow, see Figure 1. The standard cooler is designed an excessive pressure. The leakage detector should be
with cross-flow water circuit. The direction of the airflow fitted to the lowest nipple. We recommend tightening the
through the coil is therefore insignificant. The supply and header bolts before commissioning the cooler. Torque of
return pipes leading to the cooler must be flushed before bolts and the order in which they are to be tightened, see
they are connected to the cooler. Figure 3, page 6.
QLKE
QLKEg=1
g=1, QLKE g=2&&4,4
QLKE g=2
QDKR
QDKRg=1g=1 QDKR g=2
QDKR g=2
Vertical Vertical mounting
Verticalmounting
mounting Vertical mounting
Duct installation Hood installation
QLKE g=3, 5 QLKE g=6

QLKE g=6
QLKE g=3, 5
QDKR g=3 QDKR g=6
QDKR g=3 QDKR g=6
Hood installation Hood installation
Figure 1. Horizontal and vertical mounting.

WWW.LUVATA.COM 3
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Installation Also see the section safety instructions and warnings, page 2. .
The principal parts of a Generator/Motor Cooler

1. Side panel
2. Finned body
3. Tube plate
4. Connection header
5. Return header
6. Venting plug
7. Drain plug
8. Connection for leak detector
6 4 3 1
8
2
7 8
Figure 2. The principal parts of the Generator/Motor Cooler. .

4 WWW.LUVATA.COM
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
Coolers taken out of operation Cleaning the Air Side

If the cooler is drained without being removed from the 1. The finned surface can be cleaned with steam,
system, the drain plug should not be refitted since the compressed air or water. Be careful to hold the nozzle
shut-off valves may leak and refill the cooler with liquid. perpendicular to the fins and not closer than 150 mm
If the system is inoperative for more than one month, to prevent damaging the fins.
the cooler should be completely emptied and cleaned 2. The finned surface can also be cleaned with hot water
to prevent corrosion in the tubes (see storage, page 2). and environmentally compatible detergents. If deter-
gent is used, make sure it does not harm materials
Maintenance constituting the cooler. The finned-tube body may
Contamination on the outside and/or inside of the cooler not contain any traces of detergent after cleaning as
reduces its cooling capacity. The cooler must therefore remaining detergents will bind new dust. If fins are
be cleaned at regular intervals, depending on the consti- deformed after cleaning, use a fin comb made of Nylon
tution of the air and cooling water. The cooler should be to straighten them. The QLAZ-20 Fin Comb is available
inspected regularly (frequency adapted to cooler operating as an accessory.
conditions).
Spare Parts
Luvata guarantee does not cover costs for coolers that are
Cleaning the inside of the tubes
damaged due to improper installation or freezing. When
The cooler can be cleaned internally by temporarily
ordering spare coolers, specify the production number and
increasing the water flow, by adding a chemical cleaning
type number that appear on the data plate of the original
agent to the liquid (provided that the agent isn’t aggres-
cooler.
sive to the metals in the cooler) or mechanical cleaning.
A cooler with copper alloy tubes can be cleaned chemi-
cally with Sulphur amino acid or Potassium hydroxide.
Mechanical cleaning:
1. Drain the cooler thoroughly and remove it from the
motor or generator system, if necessary.
2. Mark the position of the headers to enable correct
reassembly, and then remove the headers.
3. Use a QLKZ/QDKZ-08 brush to clean the inside of
the finned tubes as you flush them with water.
4. Clean the sealing surface of the headers with ethanol
and fit new QLKZ-01 Gaskets according to the in-
structions in Figure 3, page 6. The gasket is made of
selfadhesive EPDM rubber. The U-strip on the partition
wall is reusable if it is in good condition.
5. When refitting the headers, note how they are marked
and refit them to their proper locations. Tighten
according to the pattern in Figure 3, page 6.
WWW.LUVATA.COM 5
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
$XIEDXNKOHU
&RROLQJ'HYLFH
EN
6 4 Fitting the QLKZ-01 Replacement Gasket

1. Rubber gasket, 10 x 2 mm
(always to be replaced when dismantling the headers).
Fit the rubber gasket so that it borders on the screw holes.
Stretch the gasket outward in the corners. The joint at the
corners is made with overlapping.
2
2. Rubber U-strip
Cut the U-strip angled so that it follows the bending
radius of the header. It should extend inward under
the gasket.
s15
s14
s16
When you refit the headers, tighten the bolts in the order
indicated by s1, s2, s3...
1
Tightening torque after mounting: 70 Nm (7kpm).
s10
s9
2 Retightening of torque shall be done at least 24 h after

initial mounting of headers: 70 Nm (7kpm).
s6
s5
s1
s2
s4
s3
s8
s7
s12
s11
s13
Figure 3. Mounting of gaskets and tightening of bolts (torque 70 Nm) in the

order indicated by s1, s2, etc.
Our products can be ordered with a variety of accessories as well as with other dimensions and materials than the standard.
Contact us for more information.
For more information, please contact:

Luvata Söderköping AB, Afrikalaan 303, Hietzinger Hauptstrasse 38d/2
SE-61481 Söderköping, Sweden, BE-9000 Gent, Belgium AT-1130 Wien, Austria
Phone +46 121 191 00, Phone +32 9 218 71 30, Phone +43 1 81 20 206
Fax +46 121 101 01 Fax +32 9 218 71 39 Fax +43 1 81 20 250 www.luvata.com
6 WWW.LUVATA.COM
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6WLOOVWDQGVKHL]XQJ0RWRU
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Enddokumentation
Final Documentation
Hersteller/Manufacturer : ELMESS Thermosystemtechnik

Nordallee 1
D-29525 Uelzen
Fabrik.-Nr./Fabr. No.: 828327 / 001+002
Projekt/Project : ATB Schorch GmbH
Bestell-Nr./Order No. : 64507198
Objekt/Object : Ex-Flanschheizkörper
Ex Flanged Heater
Type DHG11B03GG/M-2,4-T3
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Inhaltverzeichnis / Table of contents Auftrag / Project K-828327

ATB Schorch Seite / Page 1 von 1
Projekt / Project : ATB Schorch GmbH

Bestell-Nr. / P.O. No. : 64507198
Datum / Date : 11.11.2016
Objekt / Object : Ex-Flanschheizkörper / Ex Flanged Heater

Typ / Type: DHG11B03GG/M-2,4-T3
Fabr. N°.: 828327 / 001+002
Dokument Dokument-Nr. Blatt Anzahl

Document Document No. Sheet Quantity
1. Betriebsanleitung DHF / DHG / DHK 17 1x

Operating manual
- Beschreibung der Heizung / Description of heater
- EU-Konformitätserklärung /EU-Declaration of Conformity
- Spezifikation / Specification
- Maßbild / Dimension drawing
- Anschlussschaltbild / Wiring diagram
2. EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigung IBExU 15 ATEX 1019 X 6 1x
EC-Type Examination Certificate
3. Prüfprotokoll 828327/001+002 1 1x
Test Report
N:\Auftragsdoku\828-\828327 Schorch\5) Dokumentation\Inhaltsverzeichnis.doc 17.03.2017 Pe
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Betriebsanleitung / Operating manual

Original Deutsch
Heizung für Flüssigkeiten, Gase und im Festkörper

Typ DHF… , DHG… und DHK…
Die Betriebsanleitung besteht aus - Beschreibung der Heizung mit
EG Konformitätserklärung
- Spezifikation
- Maßbild
- Anschlussschaltplan
- ggf. Beschreibung des Druckgerätes mit
EG Konformitätserklärung
Hersteller:
ELMESS-Thermosystemtechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Nordallee 1
29525 Uelzen / Deutschland
e-Mail: et@elmess.de Tel.: +49 581 9083-0
www.elmess.de Fax: +49 581 908344
DHF DHG DHK für A0... und B0... IBExU 15 1019 X_Rev-25-11-2015
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Beschreibung der Heizung

Description of heater
Inhalt
1. Aufbau und Verwendung………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
2. Bedingungen für den sicheren Betrieb der Heizung .............................................................................
3. Montage, Errichtung und Installation ...................................................................................................
4. Einstellungen .........................................................................................................................................
5. Wartung, Austausch von Ersatzteilen und Störfall ................................................................................
1. Aufbau und Verwendung

Die Heizung ist in explosionsgeschützter Ausführung für den Betrieb in Kategorie II 2 G oder 2 D
gebaut.
Die Heizung muss für die Anwendung geeignet sein und darf nur bestimmungsgemäß verwendet
werden.
Die Heizungen Typ DHF… dienen zur direkten Erwärmung von betriebsmäßig nicht brennbaren
Flüssigkeiten innerhalb der Kategorie 2 G bzw. 2 D.
Die Heizungen Typ DHG… dienen zur direkten Erwärmung von betriebsmäßig nicht explosionsfähigen
Gasen innerhalb der Kategorie 2 G bzw. 2 D.
Die Heizungen Typ DHK… sind unverlierbar in einem festen Körper eingebaut und dienen zur indirekten
Erwärmung von betriebsmäßig nicht brennbaren Flüssigkeiten oder von betriebsmäßig nicht
explosionsfähigen Gasen innerhalb der Kategorie 2 G bzw. 2 D.
Die Heizungen Typ DH..41… und DH..42… dienen zur Erwärmung von nicht brennbaren oder
explosionsfähigen Medien in einem geschlossenen System, in dem zu keiner Zeit explosionsfähige Gase
oder Stäube auftreten. Die sichtbaren oder außen liegende Teile der Heizung, wie zum Beispiel der
Flansch und das Anschlussgehäuse können sich innerhalb der Kategorie 2 G oder 2 D befinden.
Der Typ der Heizung, die technischen Daten und die Zündschutzart sind in der Spezifikation und
teilweise auf dem Typschild, Anschlussschaltplan und Maßbild eingetragen.

DHF DHG DHK für A0... und B0... IBExU 15 1019 X_Rev-25-11-2015 Seite / Page 1
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

Der Betrieb der Heizung ist nur unter Anwendung eines auf die zuverlässige
Funktion beurteilten Schutzsystems zulässig.
Für die Heizung Typ DHF11… und DHF41… sowie DHG11… und DHG41… sowie DHK15… und DHK16…,
DHK45… und DHK46… besteht das Schutzsystem mindestens aus einem auf die zuverlässige Funktion
beurteilten Temperaturbegrenzungssystem und einer Isolations- bzw.
Fehlerstromüberwachungseinrichtung.
Für die Heizung Typ DHF21… , DHF 22… , DHF23… und DHF42… besteht das Schutzsystem mindestens
aus einem auf die zuverlässige Funktion beurteilten Temperaturbegrenzungssystem, einer auf die
zuverlässige Funktion beurteilten Niveauüberwachungseinrichtung und einer Isolations- bzw.
Fehlerstromüberwachungseinrichtung.
Für die Heizung Typ DHF31… und DHF32… sowie DHG31… , DHG32… und DHG42… besteht das
Schutzsystem mindestens aus einem auf die zuverlässige Funktion beurteilten
Temperaturbegrenzungssystem, einer auf die zuverlässige Funktion beurteilten
Strömungsüberwachungseinrichtung und einer Isolations- bzw. Fehlerstromüberwachungseinrichtung.
Für die Heizung Typ DHF57… und DHF60… sowie DHG57… und DHG60… sowie DHK57… und DHK60…
besteht das Schutzsystem mindestens aus einer Isolations- bzw. Fehlerstromüberwachungseinrichtung
und einem einstellbarem Schutzschalter.
Vom Hersteller eingebaute Kapillarrohrfühler mit Schaltkontakt bzw. Temperaturfühler zusammen mit
dem mitgelieferten elektronischen Schutz-Temperatur-Begrenzer Typ eB*6*** sind entsprechend
RL 94/9 EG geprüft und geeignet.
Alle Überwachungsgeräte müssen durch andere Schutzgeräte, z.B. Sicherungen und Schaltschütze,
Isolations- bzw. Fehlerstromüberwachungseinrichtungen zu einem kompletten Schutzsystem ergänzt
werden. Ein Ansprechen einer oder mehrerer Schutzeinrichtungen muss direkt und zwangsweise zu
einem potentialfreien Trennen der Heizung vom Netz führen.
Zusätzlich kann die Heizung mit anderen Temperaturbegrenzungs- oder Regeleinrichtungen bzw.
Temperaturmessfühlern ausgerüstet sein. Dienen diese Geräte ebenfalls zur Überwachung der Heizung
sind sie in das Schutzsystem zu integrieren.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

2. Bedingungen für den sicheren Betrieb der Heizung

x Die Heizung ist nur in der vorgegebenen Gebrauchslage und in dem vorgegebenen
Umgebungstemperaturbereich zu betreiben. Beim Betrieb der Heizung ist eine ungehinderte und
gleichmäßige Wärmeabgabe sicherzustellen.
x Die Heizung darf nur unter Anwendung eines Schutzsystems betrieben werden. Als
Sicherheitseinrichtungen für Temperatur, Strömung, Niveau usw. sind funktions- bzw.
zuverlässigkeitsgeprüfte Ausführungen entsprechend den einschlägigen Bestimmungen zu
verwenden.
x Die Anordnung der für den Explosionsschutz notwendigen Fühler der Temperaturbegrenzer muss die
durch einen Phasenausfall bei Drehstromnetzen geänderten Betriebsbedingungen mit einschließen.
x Die Beheizung von Flüssigkeiten ist nur mit genügender Überdeckung zulässig. Das kann durch eine
Niveauüberwachungseinrichtung oder vergleichbare Schutzmaßnahmen erfüllt werden.
x Für strömende Medien kann zusätzlich eine Überwachung durch einen Strömungswächter
erforderlich sein, der einen Mindestdurchsatz sicherstellt.
x Bei Einsatz im Staub-Ex-Bereich sind Staubablagerungen auf heißen Oberflächen durch geeignete
Maßnahmen zu vermeiden.
x Eine Reparatur an den zünddurchschlagsicheren Spalten darf nur durch den Hersteller erfolgen. Eine
Reparatur entsprechend den Werten von Tabelle 2 und 3 der IEC EN 60079-1 ist nicht zulässig.
x Die Heizung wird standardmäßig vom Hersteller mit Kabel- und Leitungseinführung für eine feste
Installation bestückt. Durch den Betreiber ist eine entsprechende Zugentlastung zu gewährleisten.
x Bei der Ausführung mit direkter druckfester Kabel- und Leitungseinführung (ohne Ex e
Anschlussraum) sind die vom Hersteller in der Betriebsanleitung festgelegten Kabel zu verwenden.
Wenn die vom Hersteller gelieferten bzw. vorgeschriebene Kabel- und Leitungseinführung und
festgelegten Kabel nicht verwendet werden, sind die Anforderungen der IEC EN 60079-14, Abschnitt
10.6.2 zu beachten. Die direkten Kabel- und Leitungseinführungen in das Gehäuse DH..A0… müssen
bei Verwendung innerhalb der Gasgruppe IIC und unter minus 20 °C mit mindestens 45 bar geprüft
worden sein.
x Nicht verwendete Kabel- und Leitungseinführungen bzw. Öffnungen müssen entsprechend
IEC EN 60079-14 mit zugelassenen Verschlussschrauben dauerhaft verschlossen sein.
x Die maximale Betriebstemperatur an ex-relevanten Komponenten (Dichtungen,
Leitungsdurchführungen, Anschlussklemmen) darf 80 °C nicht überschreiten. Bei Verwendung im
verringerten Temperaturbereich von < -20 °C bis zu -60 °C müssen die Kabel- und Leitungseinführung
und die Anschlussleitung für die entsprechende Einsatztemperatur geeignet sein.
x Bei Verwendung von zertifizierten Teile bzw. Geräten mit der Zündschutzart Ex i, sind die in dem
entsprechenden Zertifikat genannten besonderen Bedingungen einzuhalten.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

3. Montage, Errichtung und Installation

Wird die Heizung nicht sofort errichtet und betrieben, sind die jeder Heizung beiliegenden
Lagerungsvorschriften zu beachten. Besonders ist die Heizung vor eindringender Feuchtigkeit zu
schützen.
Für die Errichtung und Installation ist für diese Kategorie geeignetes Material zu verwenden.
Für die Errichtung, Installation und den Betrieb sind die jeweils gültigen Vorschriften z.B. DIN IEC 60364
zu beachten. Es gilt die Norm IEC EN 60079-14 und in Europa die Richtlinie 1999/92/EG. In Deutschland
gelten zusätzlich die Ex-Regeln der Berufsgenossenschaft Chemie sowie die
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung.
Die Aufstellung/Errichtung der Heizung muss gemäß den Angaben auf dem Maßbild und geschützt vor
direkter Sonneneinstrahlung erfolgen. Besonders ist die auf dem Maßbild vorgegebene Gebrauchslage
zu beachten. Flansche, ggf. Ein- und Austrittsstutzen müssen mit für den Verwendungszweck geeigneten
Befestigungselementen und Dichtungen spannungsfrei und geschützt gegen mechanische
Beanspruchung, ggf. unter Beachtung der Strömungsrichtung an das bauseitige Rohrsystem montiert
werden.
Das druckfeste Gehäuse muss mit Schrauben der Festigkeitsklasse von mindestens 8.8 verschlossen
werden. Das Anzugsdrehmoment beträgt 10 Nm.
Der elektrische Anschluss der Heizung erfolgt im Anschlussraum.

Die elektrische Installation im Anschlussgehäuse erhöhter Sicherheit erfolgt an den vorgesehenen
Klemmen unter Einhaltung von mindestens 12 mm Luftstrecke. Dazu dient unter anderem eine
mitgelieferte Abdeckplatte, die verwendet werden muss.
Wenn die Heizung kein Ex e Anschlussgehäuse hat, erfolgt die Installation direkt im druckfesten Gehäuse
an den vorgesehenen Klemmen.
Das Anzugsdrehmoment für Klemmen beträgt 2 Nm.
In diesem Anschlussraum erfolgen ebenfalls der Anschluss der vom Hersteller eingebauten
Temperaturfühler, Kapillarrohrschaltgeräte und die Bedienung der vom Hersteller eingebauten
Kapillarrohrfühler mit Schaltkontakt.
Der Anschluss muss mit fest verlegten Kabeln bzw. Leitungen entsprechend harmonisierter Normen mit
dem in der Spezifikation angegebenen Querschnitt erfolgen.
Die Heizung ist mit der entsprechenden Vorsicherung zu sichern.
Für jede eingeführte Leitung ist ein Schutzleiteranschluss vorhanden, der angeschlossen werden muss.
Die geforderte Einbindung in den äußeren Potenzialausgleich erfolgt über die Ex e
Potenzialausgleichsklemme, wenn diese nicht vorhanden ist, über den Einbaustutzen, Flansch oder
Passhülse.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

4. Einstellungen
Die Arbeitspunkte der mitgelieferten Überwachungsgeräte sind fest eingestellt und gegen Manipulation
geschützt.
Die für die Temperaturklasse relevante Arbeitstemperatur der Temperaturbegrenzungseinrichtung ist

an dieser angegeben. Die im Rahmen der thermischen Stückprüfung beim Hersteller festgelegte
Werkseinstellung darf nicht verändert werden.
Im Fehlerfall, z. B. bei Erreichen der Temperaturklasse, schaltet die Temperaturbegrenzungseinrichtung

bleibend ab. Die Temperaturbegrenzungseinrichtung kann durch „Reset“ zurückgesetzt werden. Davor
muss die Heizung um mindestens 20 K abkühlen und die Ausschaltursache muss ermittelt und beseitigt
werden. Das Rücksetzen erfolgt durch kurzzeitiges Drücken des Rückstellknopfes im Anschlussgehäuse
oder am mitgelieferten Schutz-Temperatur-Begrenzer. Bei Ausführung der Heizung mit einem externen
Reset ist darauf zu achten, dass dieses durch die Kappe abgedeckt ist.
Der Arbeitspunkt eines Temperaturreglers ist entsprechend der Skala frei wählbar. Er sollte jedoch
mindestens 10 K unterhalb des Arbeitspunktes der Temperaturbegrenzungseinrichtung liegen. Ein
kurzes Abschalten des Reglers ist normal, wenn von der Umgebungstemperatur ausgehend geheizt wird.
Der Temperaturregler kann im Anschlussgehäuse oder am mitgelieferten Schutz-Temperatur-Begrenzer
eingestellt werden.
Der Arbeitspunkt einer erforderlichen Niveauüberwachungseinrichtung ist entsprechend dem in der

Spezifikation angegebenen Wert zu justieren. Dabei ist zu berücksichtigen, dass zu jedem Zeitpunkt auch
bei bewegten Flüssigkeitsoberflächen die minimale Überdeckung aller heißen Oberflächen und
Temperaturfühler sichergestellt ist.
Der Arbeitspunkt einer erforderlichen Strömungsüberwachungseinrichtung ist entsprechend dem in der

Spezifikation angegebenen Wert zu justieren. Dabei ist zu berücksichtigen, dass zu jedem Zeitpunkt die
minimale Strömung an allen heißen Oberflächen und an dem für die Einhaltung des Explosionsschutzes
erforderlichen Temperaturfühler sichergestellt ist.
5. Wartung, Austausch von Ersatzteilen und Störfall

Die Wartung der Heizung hat regelmäßig entsprechend IEC EN 60079-17 durch fachkundiges Personal
unter dessen Verantwortung zu erfolgen.
Die Wirksamkeit des Schutzsystems ist bei der Inbetriebnahme und danach im Rahmen der
wiederkehrenden Anlagenprüfungen, spätestens jedoch alle drei Jahre, zu überprüfen.
Von außen sichtbare Beschädigungen bzw. Korrosion an Gehäuseteilen sowie an Anschlussteilen sind
umgehend mit Originalersatzteilen durch den Hersteller, die Firma ELMESS-Thermosystemtechnik GmbH
& Co. KG, Nordallee 1, D-29525 Uelzen, oder durch fachkundiges Personal (IEC EN 60079-19, Anhang B)
unter dessen Verantwortung nach Montageanleitung zu beheben.
Es dürfen nur Originalersatzteile des Herstellers verwendet werden.
Weitere Information unter www.elmess.de

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

Operating manual
Translation, original German
Heater for liquids, gases and in a solid body

Type DHF…, DHG… and DHK…
The operating manual consists of - Description of heater with
EC declaration of conformity
- Specification
- Dimension sheet
- Wiring diagram
- if applicable: Description for pressure equipment
together with EC declaration of conformity
Manufacturer:
ELMESS-Thermosystemtechnik GmbH &Co. KG
Nordallee 1
29525 Uelzen / Germany
e-Mail: et@elmess.de Tel.: +49 581 9083-0
www.elmess.de Fax: +49 581 908344

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

Table of content
1. Design and application ..........................................................................................................................
2. Conditions for safe operation of the heater .........................................................................................
3. Mountig, fitting and installation............................................................................................................
4. Adjustments ..........................................................................................................................................
5. Maintenance, exchange of spare parts and malfunctions ....................................................................
1. Design and application

The heater is manufactured in explosion proof design for operation in category II 2 G or 2 D.
The heater must be suitable for the specified application and may only be used in a manner appropriate
to its purpose.
The heater type DHF… serve for direct heating fluids which are not-flammable under operating
conditions within category 2 G or 2 D.
The heater type DHG… serve for direct heating gases which are not-explosive under operating
conditions within category 2 G or 2 D.
The heater type DHK…, which is not detachable mounted in a solid body serve for indirect heating fluids,
which are not-flammable under operating conditions or for indirect heating gases, which are not-
explosive under operating conditions within category 2 G or 2 D.
The heater type DH.41… and DH.42… serve for heating of not flammable or not explosive medium in a
closed system, in which at no time any explosive gas or dust atmosphere is existing. The visible and
outside parts of heater, such as flange or connection box, may be within category 2 G or 2 D.
Heater type, technical data and the type of protection are included in the specification, in part on
nameplate, wiring diagram and dimension sheet.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

It is only permitted to operate the heater in conjunction with a safety system

acknowledged to be reliable in its function.
For heater type DHF11… and DHF41… as well as DHG11… and DHG41… as well as DHK15…, DHK16…,
DHK45… and DHK46… the safety system must consist at least of a temperature limiting system, which
has been successfully acknowledged to be reliable and an isolation resp. residual current device.
For heater type DHF21…, DHF22…, DHF23… and DHF42… the safety system must consist of at least a
temperature limiting system and a level monitoring device, which all have been successfully
acknowledged to be reliable and an isolation resp. residual current device.
For heater type DHF31… and DHF32… as well as DHG31…, DHG32… and DHG42… the safety system
must consist of at least a temperature limiting system and a flow monitoring device, which all have been
successfully acknowledged to be reliable and an isolation resp. residual current device.
For heater type DHF57… and DHF60… as well as DHG57… and DHG60… as well as DHK57… and DHK60…
the safety system must consist of at least an isolation resp. residual current device and an adjustable
protection switch.
Capillary temperature probes with a switching contact installed by the manufacturer or temperature
sensors, together with the delivered thermal cut-out type eB*6*** have been inspected and approved
according to directive 94/9 EC.
All monitoring devices must be fitted with other protective devices, e.g. fuses and relays or contactors,
RCD’s, to form a complete safety system. Should one or more of the safety devices be activated, the
heater must, without exception, be immediately physically disconnected from the electrical mains
supply.
The heater can also be fitted with other temperature limiters, regulators or temperature sensors. If
these devices are also used for monitoring purposes, they should be integrated into the safety system.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

2. Conditions for safe operation of the heater

x The heater may only be operated in the specified mounting position and under the specified ambient
temperature conditions. It should be ensured that the heat emission is evenly distributed and not
obstructed during operation.
x The heater may only be operated in conjunction with a safety system. The design of safety devices,
devices of the safety system used for temperature, level, flow etc. must have been tested for
function and reliability on the basis of the relevant rules and regulations.
x The position of the temperature sensors of the temperature limiters must include the changed
operating conditions caused by a phase failure in a three-phase system.
x Heating of liquids is only allowed with enough liquid overlap. That can be fulfilled by a level
monitoring device or comparable protective measures.
x For flowing media, additionally a flow monitoring device may be required to secure a minimum flow.
x When used in explosive dust atmospheres, adequate measures must be taken to prevent dust
deposits on the hot surfaces.
x Only the manufacturer is permitted to carry out repairs on the flame-proof gaps or openings. A repair
according values of table 2 and 3 of IEC EN 60079-1 is not permitted.
x The heater is, as manufacturer standard, equipped with cable glands for fixed installation. Stress
relief has to be assured by the operator.
x Cables as specified by the manufacturer in the operating instructions have to be used for heater
design with direct Ex d cable entry (without Ex e connection box). If the supplied cable glands and
cables are not being used, requirements of IEC EN 60079-14, paragraph 10.6.2, have to be observed.
The direct cable glands in the heater enclosure DH..A0... for use in gas group IIC and below -20°C
have to be tested with 45 bar at minimum.
x Unused openings for cable entries must be closed durably with certified screw plugs according to EN
IEC 60079-14.
x The maximum operating temperature on ex-relevant components (seals, cable bushings, connection
terminals) must not exceed +80°C. At operation with lower ambient temperature less than -20°C
down to -60°C, the cable gland and connecting cable must be suitable for the operating temperature.
x At use of certified components or devices in type of protection Ex i, the special conditions of the
respective certificate have to be noticed.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

3. Mounting, fitting and installation

If the heater is not to be immediately fitted and operated, the storage instructions included with every
heater delivery must be observed. The heater must be protected from moisture entering the device in
particular.
Material appropriate to the category is to be used when fitting and installing the device.
Applicable regulations, e.g. DIN IEC 60364 must be observed when fitting, installing and operating the
device. Following standard IEC EN 60079-14 and in Europe the EC directive 1999/92/EC must apply.
Furthermore, local regulations, such as the explosion protection regulations of the Chemical Industry
Employer's Liability Insurance Association and the Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health for
Germany, have to be observed.
The erection of the heater is to be done in accordance to the dimensional drawing and protected
against solar radiation. Especially the mounting position has to be considered. Flanges, respectively in-
and outlet nozzles must be mounted with suitable bolts, nuts and sealing without tension and protected
against any kind of mechanical stress, if applicable under observing the flow direction in the piping
system on site.
Flameproof enclosure must close with screws by strength category at least 8.8. The tightening torque is
about 10 Nm.
The electrical connection of heater must be in the connection box.

The electrical installation in a connection box with type of protection increased safety must be done on
provided terminals and concerning a 12 mm air distance in between. For that serves an included cover
plate, which must be used.
If the heater does not have an Ex e connection casing, the electrical installation must directly be done in
the flameproof enclosure on provided terminals.
The tightness of terminals is about 2 Nm.
This connection box serves also for connecting the incorporated temperature sensors and handling of
capillary probes with switching contact.
Wiring must realized with fix laid cables and by observing harmonised standards, with a cross-section
according to the specification.
For each cable leading in there is an earth conductor, which must be connected.
The heater must be protected with an appropriate back-up fuse.
For integration in the outer potential equalisation, an Ex e terminal e is on the exterior of each casing
available. If such terminal is not available, the outer potential equalisation must be done with fixing
bracket, flange or fitting.

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

4. Adjustments
The operating points of delivered monitoring devices are fixed in place and are protected against
tampering of any kind.
The working temperature for the temperature limiting system relevant for the temperature class is
specified on the device. Manufacturer's setting, adjusted during the thermal test, must not be changed.
In the event of a malfunction, e.g. if the temperature class is reached, the temperature limiting system
shuts off. The temperature limiting system can be reset using the "Reset" button. The heater must cool
off by at least 20 K before this is done and the reason for the shut-down must be determined and
remedied. The reset function can be done by a short push of the Reset button inside the heater
connection box or at the separately delivered Thermal cut-out. If the heater has an external reset
button, the protection cap has to be closed again after reset.
The operating value of the temperature regulator can be selected depending on the scale. It should,
however, be at least 10 K below the set point of the temperature limiting system. It is perfectly normal
for the regulator to shut down for a brief moment while the heater is being heated up. The temperature
regulator can be adjusted inside the heater connection box or at the separately delivered Thermal cut-
out.
If a level monitoring system is necessary, the operating point has to be adjusted according to the value
named in the specification. It has to be taken into account that all heated surfaces and temperature
sensors have to be covered by a minimum of fluid at all times, even if the position of the fluid surface
has changed.
If a flow monitoring system is necessary, the working point has to be adjusted according the value
named in the specification. It has to be taken into account that all heated surfaces and temperature
sensors are submerged by a minimum of flow at all times.
5. Maintenance, exchange of spare parts and malfunctions

The heater must be maintained in accordance with IEC EN 60079-17 by and in responsibility of qualified
personnel.
The efficiency of the protecting system must be examined when commissioning the device and
thereafter with the repeating system checks, latest every 3 years.
Externally visible damage or corrosion of components of the flame proof enclosure or of connector
components must be repaired immediately using genuine spare parts by the manufacturer, ELMESS-
Thermosystemtechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Nordallee 1, D-29525 Uelzen, Germany, or by qualified
personnel (IEC EN 60079-19, app. B) at its responsibility acc. to mounting instructions.
Only genuine spare parts of manufacturer may be used.
Further information available under www.elmess.de

Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU


Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Heizkörper Spezifikation
Kunde ATB Schorch GmbH Datum 22.02.2017 Rev00
Fabrik Nr. 828327/001+002 Anzahl 2
Auftrag Nr. / Position 828327-0010 Kunden Material Nummer: 6093052
Artikel Nr. 50043551 Angaben Bestell Nummer: 64507198
Bezeichnung Ex-Flanschheizkörper Typ DHG11B03GG/M-2,4-T3
1 Schutzart IEC/EN 60529 IP 66

2 Ex-Kennzeichnung Zündschutzart
IEC/EN 60079 (Ex) II 2G Ex db eb IIC T3
IEC/EN 60079-31
EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigung | IECExZertifikat IBExU 15 ATEX 1019 X ----
EU Konformitätserklärung ELM 15-006
3 Elektrische Daten und Anschluss
Leistungsgruppen E1 Gesamt Gruppe 1 Gruppe 2 Gruppe 3 Gruppe 4
Bemessungsleistung 2,4 kW
Bemessungsstrom 3,0 A
Vorsicherung 10 A
Bemessungsspannung 460 V 3/PE 50/60 Hz
Spezifische Oberflächenbelastung 0,17 W/cm²
Steuerstromkreis Temperaturüberwachung max. 16 A; 230 V 1/N/PE 50/60 Hz
Steuerstromkreis weitere Überwachungsgeräte ----
Gehäuseheizung E2 ----
Anschlussschaltplan 16-1461-40
Anschlussquerschnitt Laststromkreis / Kabeltyp 6/4 mm² ----
Anschlussquerschnitt Steuerstromkreis / Kabeltyp max. 6/4 mm² ----
Kabeleinführung Laststromkreis / Material 1x M25x1,5; für Kabel-ø 10…17 mm / PA Anzugsdrehmoment: 2,0 Nm
Kabeleinführung Laststromkreis / Material ----
Kabeleinführung Steuerstromkreis / Material 1x M25x1,5; für Kabel-ø 10…17 mm / PA Anzugsdrehmoment: 2,0 Nm
Kabeleinführung Gehäuseheizung / Material ----
4 Schutzsystem
Temperaturüberwachung B1 TB = T3 - wirksam auf Heizelementoberfläche
Isolations- bzw. Fehlerstromüberwachung min. 50 ȍ pro Volt bzw. max. 100 mA

Strömungsüberwachung B3 nicht erforderlich
weitere Überwachungsgeräte bzw. Sensoren

Temperatur Wächter, Regler B2 TR = 0...190 °C - wirksam auf Heizelementoberfläche
Temperatur Wächter, Regler B4 ----
5 Abmessungen
Massblatt / Zeichnung HK8D
Einbaulänge L 1490 mm
Unbeheizte Länge Lu 50 mm
Temperaturabfall Länge Lt ----
Heizbündeldurchmesser 125 mm
Scheibenabstand 335 mm
Flansch EN 1092-1 / 05 / B1 / DN125 / PN16
6 Werkstoffe / Oberfläche
Heizbündel 1.4541 metallisch blank
Patronenmantel ---- ----
Flansch P250GH (C22.8) lackiert mit Hammerschlag
Gehäuse EN-GJL-250 (GG25) lackiert mit Hammerschlag
7 Betriebsdaten
Medium / Volumenstrom Luft / ----
Betriebsdruck atm.
Arbeitstemperatur ca. +40 °C
Umgebungstemperatur / max. Gehäuseinnentemperatur -40 ... +50 °C / 80 °C
Einbau im Aggregat, Tank oder Behälter; Heizkörper waagerecht; „OBEN“ markiert;
Kabeleinführung unten; H 180 ± 45, V 90
8 Auslegungsdaten
Auslegungscode AD 2000
Maximal zulässiger Betriebsüberdruck (PS) 0,5 bar
Zulässige Temperatur min. / max. (TS) ----
Fluidgruppe / Diagramm ----
Kategorie / Modul ----
Abnahme / Zeugnis / Protokoll Druckprobe / ---- / K-828327-0010
9 Dokumentation
Sprache deutsch / englisch
Betriebsanleitung DHF…, DHG… und DHK… IBExU 15 ATEX 1019 X
10 Bemerkungen Motor-Stillstandsheizung
11 Interne Angaben Prüfdruck: 5,0 bar

RHK: Anzahl Form; Schaltung; Typ 6 DH; YP; NR 600V 12G / 270W / 266V + 6 H; YP; NR 312V 12G / 135W / 266V
Lot / Schweißzusatz / RHK-ø Fontargen AF 314 D / 1.5424 / 8,5 mm
Projektleiter / Sachbearbeiter Hr. Konradt Hr. Löw
N:\Auftragsdoku\828-\828327 Schorch\5) Dokumentation\50043551.xlsm 22.02.2017
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Heater Specification
Translation, Original German
Client ATB Schorch GmbH Date 22.02.2017 Rev00

Fabric No. 828327/001+002 Piece 2
Order No. / Position 828327-0010 Client details Material number: 6093052
Article No. 50043551 Order number: 64507198
Name Ex-Flanged Heater Type DHG11B03GG/M-2,4-T3
1 Degree of Protection IEC/EN 60529 IP 66

2 Ex Marking and Type of Protection
IEC/EN 60079 (Ex) II 2G Ex db eb IIC T3
IEC/EN 60079-31
EC Type Examination Certificate | IECEx Certificate IBExU 15 ATEX 1019 X ----
EU Declaration of Conformity ELM 15-006
3 Electrical data and connection
Power groups E1 Complete Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Rated power 2,4 kW
Rated current 3,0 A
Back up fuse 10 A
Rated voltage 460 V 3/PE 50/60 Hz
Specific surface load 0,17 W/cm²
Control circuit temperature monitoring max. 16 A; 230 V 1/N/PE 50/60 Hz
Control circuit additional monitoring devices ----
Anti condensation heater E2 ----
Connection diagramm 16-1461-40
Connection cross section power circuit / Cable type 6/4 mm² ----
Connection cross section control circuit / Cable type max. 6/4 mm² ----
Cable entry power circuit / material 1x M25x1,5; for cable-ø 10…17 mm / PA tightening torque: 2,0 Nm
Cable entry power circuit / material ----
Cable entry control circuit / material 1x M25x1,5; for cable-ø 10…17 mm / PA tightening torque: 2,0 Nm
Cable entry anti condensation heater / material ----
4 Protection system
Temperature monitoring B1 TL = T3 - effective on heating element surface
Isolation resp. residual current device min. 50 ȍ per voltage resp. max. 100 mA
Flow monitoring device B3 not necessary
Additional monitoring devices or sensors

Temperature monitor, regulators B2 TR = 0...190 °C - effective on heating element surface
Temperature monitor, regulators B4 ----
5 Dimensions
Dimension sheet / drawing HK8D
Installation length L 1490 mm
Unheated length Lu 50 mm
Temperature reduct. length Lt ----
Heating bundle diameter 125 mm
Distance of sheets 335 mm
Flange EN 1092-1 / 05 / B1 / DN125 / PN16
6 Material & Surface
Heating elements 1.4541 metallic bright
Cartridge pipe ---- ----
Flange C-Steel - (P250GH) varnished with Hammerschlag
Connection enclosure Cast iron - (EN-GJL-250) varnished with Hammerschlag
7 Operation data
Medium / flow rate Air / ----
Operating pressure atm.
Working temperature app. +40 °C °C
Ambient temperature / max. housing temperature -40 ... +50 °C / 80 °C
Mounting position in aggregate, tank or container; Heater horizontal; "TOP" is marked;
cable glands from bottom side; H 180 ± 45, V 90
8 Design data
Design code AD 2000
Allowable operating pressure 0,5 bar g
Allowable temperature min. / max. ----
Fluid group / diagramm ----
Category / module ----
Inspection / certificate / report Pressure test / ---- / K-828327-0010
9 Documentation
Language german / english
Operation manual DHF…, DHG… und DHK… IBExU 15 ATEX 1019 X
10 Remarks Motor space heater
11 Internal remarks Test pressure: 5,0 bar g

Heating elements: pieces; shape; wiring; type 6 DH; YP; NR 600V 12G / 270W / 266V + 6 H; YP; NR 312V 12G / 135W / 266V
Solder / welding filler / heating elements diameter Fontargen AF 314 D / 1.5424 / 8,5 mm
In charge / Project team Mr. Konradt Mr. Löw
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
(OHNWULVFKH6FKDOWXQJ+HL]XQJ
(OHFWULFDOGLDJUDPKHDWHU

Bemessungsleistung / Rated power 2,4 kW Auftrag Nr. / Order No. 828327-0010

+HLGW
36'
Bemessungsspannung / Rated voltage 460 V 3/PE 50/60 Hz Kunde / Customer ATB Schorch GmbH
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU

Bemessungsstrom / Rated current 3,0 A Schaltplan-Nr. / Diagram No. 16-1461-40
Vorsicherung / Back up fuse 10 A
Typ
Product code
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.
Klick für Anschlussschaltbild
.8*3/
Ex-Flanschheizkörper TB = T3 - wirksam auf TR = 0...190 °C - wirksam auf
Heizelementoberfläche Heizelementoberfläche
BB
Ex-Flanged Heater TL = T3 - effective on heating element TR = 0...190 °C - effective on heating element
surface surface


Seite / Page /
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
6SDFH+HDWLQJ0RWRU
Prüfprotokoll / Test Report Q065_Rev01
Kunde / Customer ATB Schorch GmbH

Fabriknummer / Fabrication No. 828327/001+002
Auftrag Nr. / Order No. 828327-0010
Artikelnummer / Article No. 50043551
Schutzart / Degree of protection IP 66
Ex-Kennzeichnung & Zündschutzart /
Ex-Marking & Type of Protection EN 60079, EN 61241 (Ex) II 2G / Ex db eb IIC T3
Technische Daten / Technical data
Stufe, Gruppe / Stage, Group 1

Bemessungsleistung / Nominal Power [kW] 2,4
Bemessungsspannung / Nominal voltage 50 / 60 Hz [V] 460/3~/PE
Bemessungsstrom / Nominal current [A] 3
spezifische Oberflächenbelastung / specific surface load [W/cm²] 0,17
Steuerstromkreis / Control circuit max. 16A; 230V 1N/PE 50/60 Hz
Gehäuseheizung / Anticondensation heater n.a.
Schutzsystem / Protection system

Temperaturbegrenzer / Temperature limiter B1 [°C] 0…200 Oberfläche/surface
Temperaturregler / Temperature regulator B2 [°C] 0…190 Oberfläche/surface
weitere Überwachungsgeräte, Sensoren /
additional monitoring devices, sensors
Temperaturbegrenzer / Temperature limiter n.a.
Temperaturregler / Temperature regulator n.a.
Einbaulage / Mounting Position
beliebig / any H 180 ±45
Heizkörper waagerecht / Heater horizontal V 90
Messungen / Measurements
Widerstand Heizung / Resistance Heater [] 174

Hochspannung / High voltage 60sec. [kV] 1,92
Ableitstrom / Fault current [mA] 26,2
Isolation / Isolation [V] 1000
Isolationswiderstand / Isolation resistance [M] >400
Einstellung Schutz-Temperatur-Begrenzer eB*6*** TB/TR
n.a.
Adjustment Thermal cut out eB*6*** TL/TR
Einstellung Begrenzer / Limiter adjustment B1 [°C] 180 0
Einstellung Regler / Regulator adjustment B2 [°C] 160 0
Einstellung Wächter / Monitor adjustment n.a.
Lage heißester Punkt / Position of Hot Spot LM1 mm Oberfläche
Temperatur heißester Punkt / Hot spot temperature M1 < T3
Prüfung / Test 15.03.2017 durch / by MG
Prüfzeichen - Unterschrift /
0*ULJDW
Test mark - Signature
Elmess Thermosystemtechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Nordallee 1, 29529 Uelzen
N:\ETSF\ETSF-Q\Prüffeld\Prüfbuch\828-\828327-0010.xls www.elmess.de 15.03.2017
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
D758 MiniPurge®
Manual
ML 434
Important Note:
It is essential for safety that the installer and user of the Expo system follow these
instructions.
Please refer to the standard for principles and definition.
These instructions apply only to the pressurizing system. it is the responsibility of the
manufacturer of the pressurized enclosure to provide instructions for the enclosure.
Expo Technologies reserves the right to replace any component, with one of the equivalent functionality.
ML434 | v12l 23-Mar-16
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Section 1: System Specification ................................................................................................1

MiniPurge® Control Unit Data...................................................................................................2
Relief Valve Unit and Purge Outlet Valve with integral spark arrestor......................................3
Section 2: Quick User Guide ......................................................................................................3
Installation ................................................................................................................................3
Operation of the System ...........................................................................................................3
Section 3: Application Suitability ..............................................................................................4
Section 4: Description and Principle of Operation ..................................................................5
Section 5: Main Components .....................................................................................................6
Air Supply Filter / Regulator......................................................................................................6
Logic Air Supply Regulator .......................................................................................................6
Minimum Pressure Sensor .......................................................................................................6
Purge Flow Sensor ...................................................................................................................6
Intermediate Sensor .................................................................................................................7
Purge Timer ..............................................................................................................................7
Purge Complete Valve..............................................................................................................7
OR Gate ...................................................................................................................................7
Alarm Only Circuit (/AO) ...........................................................................................................7
Visual Indicators .......................................................................................................................7
Power Interlock Switch .............................................................................................................8
Alarm / Pressurized Switch.......................................................................................................8
System Purging Switch (Optional)............................................................................................8
Intermediate Switch ..................................................................................................................8
Purge Valve ..............................................................................................................................8
Purge Flow Restrictor ...............................................................................................................8
CLAPS Sensor .........................................................................................................................8
CLAPS Regulator .....................................................................................................................8
Relief Valve Unit .......................................................................................................................8
/PA Terminal Box......................................................................................................................9
Section 6: Installation of the System.........................................................................................9
Relief Valve Unit .......................................................................................................................9
Air Supply Quality .....................................................................................................................9
Pipe Work ...............................................................................................................................10
Multiple Enclosures ................................................................................................................10
Provision and Installation of Alarm Devices ...........................................................................10
Power Supplies and their Isolation .........................................................................................11
Power Interlock Switch ...........................................................................................................11
Section 7: Commissioning .......................................................................................................11
Commissioning the System ....................................................................................................11
Normal Operation ...................................................................................................................13
Section 8: Maintenance of the System....................................................................................13
General maintenance .............................................................................................................13
Additional maintenance checks ..............................................................................................13
Re-calibration of the Relief Valve Unit ....................................................................................13
Re-calibration of the Pressure Sensors ..................................................................................14
Section 9: Fault Finding............................................................................................................14
General Information................................................................................................................14
System purges correctly but trips and auto re-purges at the end of the purge time. ..............15
Relief Valve opens (continuously or intermittently).................................................................15
System enters purging but purge indication does not occur...................................................16
Section 10: Recommended Spares List ..................................................................................16
Section 11: Glossary.................................................................................................................16
Section 12: Drawings and Diagrams .......................................................................................17
Section 13: Certifications .........................................................................................................17
ML434 | v12l i
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Section 1: System Specification

5 X LC / ss / OV / PC / PA
Size PA = Power and Alarm. Integral

5 = MiniPurge® Ex e IIC T5 Gb
Purge flow rate: Ex tb IIIC T100ºC Db IP66
6000 NI/min Power and Alarm. Integral
Ex e IIC T4 Gb
Approval / Certification Power = 250 Vac 4 Amp (AC15) DPNO
Ex d IIC T6 Gb
ATEX Certificate:
Ex tb IIIC T80ºC Db
Sira 01ATEX1295X
Alarm = 250 Vac 4 Amp (AC15) SPCO
0518 II 2(2) GD Ex d IIC T6 Gb
Ex [pxb] IIC T6 Gb
Ex [pxb] IIIC T85ºC Db
PC = Pressurized Control. Automatic
Tamb -20ºC to +55ºC leakage compensation (CLAPS)
IECEx Certificate:
IECEx SIR07.0027X OV = Purge Outlet Valve is
Ex [pxb] IIC T6 Gb pneumatically operated
Ex [pxb] IIIC T85ºC Db
Tamb -20ºC to +55ºC
MiniPurge® Housing
TÜV INMETRO Certificate: ss = Stainless Steel 316L
TÜV 12.1462X
Ex [pxb] IIC T6 Gb Pressurization Method
Ex [pxb] IIIC T85ºC Db LC = Leakage Compensation
Tamb -20ºC to +55ºC
Page 1 ML434 | v12l
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
MiniPurge® Control Unit Data

Action on Pressure Failure: Alarm and Trip (isolate power to pressurized enclosure), user
adjustable Alarm Only.
Type of Operation: Automatic leakage compensation using the Closed Loop Automatic
Pressurization System (CLAPS System).
Leakage Compensation 1000 NI/min initial maximum pressurized enclosure leakage.
Capacity 1900 NI/min maximum as leakage increases.
Enclosure Material: Stainless Steel 316L.
Mounting Method: Wall mounting straps. Fixing holes as per drawing.
Temperature Limits: -20oC to +55oC
Compressed Air Supply: Clean, dry, oil free air or inert gas. Refer to Air Supply Quality section
in Installation of the System.
Supply Pressure: 5 to 16 barg (73 to 232 psi).
Main Regulator: Set at 5 barg, 40 m automatic drain supply inlet filter.
Logic Regulator and Gauge: Fitted and set to 2.3 barg (33 psi).
Process Connections: Purge supply and outlet to pressurized enclosure 1” NPT female.
Minimum supply line 25 mm (1”) ID tube, inlet sized appropriately for
flow rate.
Reference points & signals 1/8” NPT female, minimum 6 mm pipe to be
used.
Visual Indicators: Alarm (Red ) / Pressurized (Green ).
System Purging (Yellow )
/PA Terminal Box: Stainless Steel, Ex e IIC T5 Gb / Ex tb IIIC T100ºC Db IP66
Tamb: -20ºC to +55ºC with terminals, front access cover & lower
removable gland plate.
Stainless Steel, Ex e IIC T4 Gb Tamb: -20ºC to +60ºC with terminals,
front access cover & lower removable gland plate.
Power Interlock Switch: DPNO switch, contact ratings 250 Vac 4 Amps (AC-15) / 24V DC 4A,
Ex d IIC T6 Gb / Ex tb IIIC T80ºC Db.
Alarm Switch: SPCO switch, contact ratings 250 VAC 4 Amps (AC-15) / 24V DC 4A,
Intermediate Switch: SPCO switch, contact ratings 250 VAC 4 Amps (AC-15) / 24V DC 4A,
System Purging Switch SPCO switch, contact ratings 250 VAC 4 Amps (AC-15) / 24V DC 4A,
(Optional): Ex d IIC T6 Gb / Ex tb IIIC T80ºC Db.
Minimum Pressure Sensor: Minimum: 0.5 mbarg.
Maximum: 5.0 mbarg.
Default Setting: 1.5 mbarg.
Tolerance -0, +0.7 mbarg.
Intermediate Sensor: Minimum: 2.0 mbarg.
Maximum: 10 mbarg.
Default Setting: 5.0 mbarg.
Tolerance: -0, +10%
Note: There must be a 1.5 mbarg difference between the minimum pressure and intermediate sensors.
Purge Flow Sensor: Set at 6.4 mbarg (Tolerance: -0, +10%).
ML434 | v12l Page 2
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
CLAPS Sensor: Minimum: 5.0 mbarg.

Maximum:15 mbarg.
Default Setting: 10 mbarg.
Tolerance: -0, +10%
Note: there must be a 2.5 mbarg difference between the intermediate and CLAPS sensor calibration point.
For example: Minimum pressure = 5 mbarg, intermediate pressure = 6.5 mbarg, CLAPS sensor = 9 mbarg.
Purge Time: User selectable, 3-off time increments available. 10, 15 or 20 Minutes
(-0 + 25%). Maximum available purge time of 45 minutes.
Default Setting 45 minutes.
Weight: 27 kg (60lb).
Relief Valve Unit and Purge Outlet Valve with integral spark arrestor
Type: RLV104/ss/FS, Design number D758RLV.
Bore: Purge Outlet Valve Ø 104 mm, Relief Valve Ø 75 mm.
Relief Valve Lift-Off Pressure: Minimum: 20 mbarg.
Maximum: 50 mbarg.
Default: 30 mbarg (+0, -20%).
Flow Rate: Range: 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, or 6000 NI/min.
Default: 2000 NI/min.
Material: Housing: Stainless steel 316L.
Gasket: Silicone foam.
Spark arrestor: Stainless steel mesh.
Mounting Method: Rectangular cut-out and fixing holes as per drawing.
Weight: 7 kg (15.4 lb)
Section 2: Quick User Guide

Installation
The MiniPurge® System must be installed by a competent engineer, in accordance with relevant standards,
such as IEC / EN 60079-14 and any local codes or practice.
• Mount the purge system in accordance with the hook-up drawing.

• Ensure the system is installed according to the full instructions in the “Installation of the System” section
of this manual.
• All pipings must be clean and free of dirt, condensation and debris prior to connection to the purge
system or pressurized enclosure.
• It is strongly recommended that a local isolation valve is installed on the air supply upstream of the
purge system.
Note: Most faults are due to restricted air supply, inadequate supply pipe work or drop in air supply
pressure during the purge process.
Operation of the System

Once the system is installed correctly, turn on the air supply. Refer to Commissioning section.
Indicator Colour Status

Alarm / Pressurized Red Low pressure alarm (enclosure pressure too low)
Page 3 ML434 | v12l
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP

Purging Black Purge flow too low or not in purge mode
The purge system commences the purge cycle:
• The purge air will enter the enclosure.

• The pressurized enclosure will obtain a positive pressure.
• The Purge Outlet Valve will open within the Relief Valve Unit.
• The air will then exit the Relief Valve Unit housing via the spark arrestor.

Alarm / Pressurized Green Pressurized (minimum enclosure pressure achieved)
Purging Black Purge flow too low
Open the Purge Flow Restrictor Valve until the air flow reaches the required rate; the system will initiate the
timed purge cycle. Start a stopwatch when the purging indicator turns yellow.

Alarm / Pressurized Green Pressurized
Purging Yellow Purge flow rate above minimum
On completion of an uninterrupted purge cycle of the required length, the system will indicate purge
complete. Stop the stopwatch when the purging indicator turns black.

Alarm / Pressurized Green Pressurized and in leakage compensation mode
Purging Black No longer in purge mode
Check stopwatch timing to verify that the actual purge time is equal to or greater than the required purge
time.
Note: The recorded purge time must never be less than the required purge time.
The system is now operating correctly in leakage compensation mode.
If the system has not performed as expected, check the installation thoroughly and ensure it has been
carried out according to the instructions.
If an obvious problem has not been highlighted and corrected, follow the procedures in the Fault Finding
section.
If all checks have been carried out and the system still does not perform as expected, contact your local
distributor or Expo Technologies.
Section 3: Application Suitability

MiniPurge® systems are certified for use in hazardous locations, where the hazardous location is non-
mining (above ground) and the hazard is caused by flammable gasses, vapours or dust. Depending on the
model the systems may be used in IECEx and ATEX Zone 1(21) and/or Zone 2(22) - Categories 2 and 3
respectively.
ML434 | v12l Page 4
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
MiniPurge® systems may be used for hazards of any gas group. Apparatus associated with the MiniPurge®
system, such as intrinsically safe signalling circuits and flameproof enclosures containing switching devices
may be limited in their gas group. The certification documentation supplied with any such devices must be
checked to ensure their suitability.
This system is primarily designed for use with compressed air. Where other inert compressed gasses are
used (Nitrogen, for example) the user must take suitable precautions so that the build up of the inert gas
does not present a hazard to health. Consult the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) data
sheet for the gas used. Where a risk of asphyxiation exists, a warning label must be fitted to the pressurized
enclosure.
The following materials are used in the construction of MiniPurge® systems. If substances that will adversely
affect any of these materials are present in the surrounding environment, please consult Expo Technologies
for further guidance.
Materials of Construction
Stainless Steel Aluminium Acrylic
Mild (Carbon) Steel Nylon Silicone
Brass Polyurethane Neoprene
ABS Polycarbonate Polyester (glass filled)
Section 4: Description and Principle of Operation

The MiniPurge® system is pneumatic in operation, with electrical interfaces.
Purge and pressurization is a method of protection used in Zone 1 (21) and/or Zone 2 (22) hazardous
locations to ensure that the interior of an enclosure is free of flammable gas. Addition of a MiniPurge®
system allows the electrical equipment within the enclosure to be used safely in a hazardous location.
The principle of purge and pressurization is as follows:
• Clean compressed air or inert gas is drawn from a non-hazardous location.
• The interior of the pressurized enclosure is flushed to remove any hazardous gas or dust.
• This is introduced into the pressurized enclosure to keep the internal pressure at least 0.5 mbarg above
the external pressure.
• Whilst pressurized, flammable gas cannot enter the enclosure from the environment.
Prior to switching on the power to the electrical equipment, the enclosure must be purged to remove any
flammable gas that might have entered the enclosure before pressurization. Purging is the process of
removal contaminated air and replacement with air (or inert gas) known to be free from flammable gas. The
duration of this purge process is normally ascertained by performing a purge test.
At the end of the purge cycle the system automatically switches to leakage compensation mode.The Purge
Outlet Valve is closed and the airflow is reduced but remains high enough to compensate for the leakage of
air from the enclosure whilst maintaining the minimum over pressure state.
In the event of pressure failure within the pressurized enclosure the system will raise an alarm in the form
of visual indicators and a volt free contact depending on the specification of the system. The default action
on loss of pressurization is alarm and automatic disconnect of power (A&T - Alarm and Trip). This can be
changed by the customer to Alarm Only (/AO), please refer to section titled Main Components.
The MiniPurge® system incorporates a Closed Loop Automatic Pressurization System (CLAPS). This allows
the system to detect a rise or fall of the enclosure’s internal pressure and adjust the leakage compensation
rate accordingly. Pressure variations are more likely during sudden start up of large rotating electrical
machines but can also be caused by changes in running temperature. This system has been specifically
designed to maintain a stable internal pressure within the enclosure.
Page 5 ML434 | v12l
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Pressure characteristics during purge and pressurization of a pressurised enclosure using a MiniPurge®
system that incorporates a CLAPS system:
Power Interlock switch
Alarm Only
Power Interlock switch
Alarm &Trip Active
Contacts
Intermediate Inactive
pressure switch
Minimum
pressure switch
Purging Pressure
Intermediate switch contacts
open. Intermediate sensor
sends falling pressure signal
CLAPS Regulator Minimum pressure switch contacts

Pressure open. Minimum pressure sensor sends
a low pressure signal.
Alarm indicator shows red (alarm only)
Alarm indicator shows red and power
Intermediate Pressure is disconnected (Alarm and Trip)
Sensor Pressure
Minimum Pressure
Sensor Pressure
Purge Time Machinery Start Normal Operation Fault Condition - loss of pressure
outside of CLAPS regulation
Section 5: Main Components

Air Supply Filter / Regulator
The unit is provided with a 40 m liquid / dust filter element as a precaution. The user of the MiniPurge®
system must ensure that air supply is to the quality stated in Air Supply Quality paragraph found in the
Installation of the System section. The regulator is factory set to 5 barg (73 psig) and regulates the pressure
of an air supply between 5 and 16 barg (73 to 232 psig). A pressure gauge is fitted down stream of the filter;
this should indicate no less than 5 barg (73 psig). During the purge cycle a pressure drop will be indicated
on the gauge.
Logic Air Supply Regulator

This device provides the system with a stable air supply pressure to the logic system and allows consistent
operation. The pressure level is factory set to 2.3 barg (33 psig) and can be verified by means of the integral
pressure gauge.
Minimum Pressure Sensor

This monitors the pressure inside the pressurized enclosure. When the pressure is below the minimum
required for safe operation, the pressure sensor causes the system to reset and the Alarm / Pressurized
indicator turns Red . The sensor is factory calibrated and set to operate in falling pressure at or above the
minimum specified pressure.
Purge Flow Sensor

The Purge Flow Sensor monitors flow through the Purge Outlet Valve. At correct purge flow rates, above
the minimum specified for purging, the sensor sends a signal that activates the purge timer. This sensor is
factory calibrated to operate on falling flow rate at or above the minimum specified purge flow rate.
ML434 | v12l Page 6
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Intermediate Sensor
This sensor monitors the pressure inside the pressurized enclosure. It senses when the pressure is drops
and provides early warning before the low pressure sensor trips the system. The setting on this is user
selectable.
Purge Timer
When both the enclosure pressure and the purge flow rate are correct, the Purge Flow Sensor activates the
timer to start the timing period. The purge time is set by opening/closing the pinch valve so that the sum of
the open valves times equals or exceeds the required purge time. At least one valve must be open, and the
screws must be at the appropriate limit of travel. Do not over tighten. The purging indicator will turn yellow
during timing.
Purge Complete Valve

This valve receives a signal from the purge timer that indicates the completion of the purge cycle and verifies
that the pressurization signal is still present. If both conditions are satisfied a signal is sent to indicate that
the purge is complete. This performs two functions: to turn on the electrical supply to the pressurized
enclosure and to reduce the high purge flow rate to leakage compensation mode. It also provides a hold-on
signal that maintains the leakage compensation mode with the power switch on, even when the purge timer
has reset ready for the next purge cycle.
OR Gate
This device provides the Purge Complete Valve with the hold-on function referred to previously. When either
the timed-out signal or the purge complete signal is present it allows the pilot signal to be sent to the purge
complete valve.
Alarm Only Circuit (/AO)

If the pressure in the pressurized enclosure is too low the system will normally cut off electrical power to it.
In certain circumstances, where local codes of practice allow, the system can be altered to provide a hold-
on circuit that will maintain the electrical power supply to the pressurized enclosure while also providing a
pressure failure alarm. The user must respond to the alarm and either restore the pressure to the
pressurized enclosure or otherwise make the installation safe; for example, cut off the electrical supply. The
decision to use the Alarm Only facility, and the allowable length of time for non-pressurized operation, is the
responsibility of the user.
Warning: It is potentially dangerous to energise the pressurized enclosure in an non-pressurized

condition when it is known that there is potentially explosive gas or dust in the hazardous location.
Visual Indicators
Visual indicators are fitted to provide status information to the operator.
Alarm / Pressurized Indicator

Green* Pressurized
Red Pressure Alarm (enclosure pressure low)
System Purging Indicator

Black* Purge flow too low (not in purge mode)
Yellow Purging (flow above minimum)
* The Green / Black combination indicates normal operation of the pressurized enclosure after the
initial purging cycle has been completed.
Page 7 ML434 | v12l
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Power Interlock Switch

This flameproof power switch is activated by the signal from the Purge Complete Valve. This activation can
be used to turn on the electrical supply to the pressurized enclosure. The cable from the switch is terminated
in the /PA terminal box.
Alarm / Pressurized Switch

This flameproof switch is operated by the pressurized signal. It allows a remote electrical system status
indicator to show either pressurized or a pressure failure alarm. The cable from the switch is terminated in
the /PA terminal box.
System Purging Switch (Optional)

This switch is operated by the purge flow signal that allows a remote electrical system status indicator to
signal that the system is purging; sometimes referred to as purge in progress. The cable from the switch is
terminated in the /PA terminal box.
Intermediate Switch
This is a flameproof switch which is activated by the signal from the Intermediate Sensor. The cable from
the switch is terminated in the /PA terminal box.
Purge Valve
This changeover valve selects between purge air flow or leakage compensation. It is sized to allow sufficient
air into the enclosure during purging based on: the specified air supply pressure range, the minimum
specified purging outlet flow rate +10% and the expected leakage rate from the pressurized enclosure. At
the end of the purge cycle, the purge valve closes in response to the “Purge Complete” signal; it remains in
the closed position until the next purge cycle is initiated.
Purge Flow Restrictor

This valve restricts the purge flow to the minimum required flow rate. The Purge Flow Restrictor must be
readjusted during commissioning.
CLAPS Sensor
This sensor monitors the pressure within the pressurized enclosure and sends a control signal to the CLAPS
Regulator. The normal running pressure must be determined prior to system start-up so that the CLAPS
Sensor may be set to the level required to control the CLAPS Regulator.
CLAPS Regulator
This is the regulator that controls the leakage compensation air flow into the enclosure after the purging is
complete. It either increases or decreases the air flow into the enclosure as appropriate to maintain a stable
running pressure.The CLAPS Regulator must be set at the time of commissioning.
Relief Valve Unit

The Relief Valve Unit allows the purge air to exit the enclosure safely via a built-in spark arrestor. This spark
arrestor is designed to prevent the emission of arcs, sparks and incandescent particles produced within the
pressurized enclosure.
Purge air passes through the Relief Valve Unit; the preset pressure differential across the appropriate orifice
ensures that the purge flow sensor is activated once the selected purge flow has been attained.
During the purge cycle a pneumatic cylinder operates the Purge Outlet Valve that lets the air from inside the
enclosure exhaust through the Relief Valve Unit. When the system changes to leakage compensation mode,
the Purge Outlet Valve is closed and the enclosure sealed.
ML434 | v12l Page 8
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
The Relief Valve Unit has an in-built relief valve.This is sized to ensure that, if the air supply pressure rises
up from the specified maximum, the internal enclosure pressure will not exceed the specified maximum
working pressure of the pressurized enclosure.
/PA Terminal Box

Increased Safety
Ex e IIC T5 Gb Ex e IIC T4 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T100ºC Db IP66
Tamb -20ºC to +55ºC Tamb -20ºC to +60ºC
The Terminal Box is increased safety (Ex e) certified and incorporates the terminal connection points for the
alarm and interlock switches. All contacts provided are volt free (dry).
Cable entry methods (for example conduit or cable glands) must be certified to IECEx, ATEX or INMETRO
standards. The main requirement is that IP66 (or better) ingress protection must be provided by use of seals
or washers.
Section 6: Installation of the System

The MiniPurge® is designed for use under normal industrial conditions of ambient temperature, humidity and
vibration. Please consult Expo before installing this equipment in conditions that may cause stresses beyond
normal industrial conditions.The MiniPurge® system must be installed by a competent person in accordance
with relevant standards, such as IEC / EN 60079-14, and any local codes of practice.
The MiniPurge® control unit should be installed either directly on, or close to the pressurized enclosure. It
should be installed such that the system indicators and certification labels are in view.
All parts of the system carry a common serial number. If installing more than one system, ensure that this
commonality is maintained within each system installed.
Relief Valve Unit

To achieve effective purging, the points where air enters and exits the pressurized enclosure should
normally be at opposite ends of the enclosure. The RLV unit must be mounted vertically and there should
be a minimum clearance of 300 mm (12") around the spark arrestor (purge outlet).
It is important that the interior and exterior of the spark arrestor is kept clean and debris is not allowed to
accumulate; this might affect the calibration of the device. In particular the exterior of the spark arrestor
should not be painted or blocked in any way.
Air Supply Quality

The MiniPurge® system should be connected to a protective gas supply, which is suitable for purging and
pressurization.
The supply pipe connection to the MiniPurge® must be appropriate for the maximum input flow rate for the
application.
The air supply must be regulated at a pressure less than the maximum stated inlet pressure.
The air supply must be: clean, non-flammable and from a non-hazardous location. The air should be of
Instrument Air Quality. Although the purge control system will operate with lower air quality, its operational
life will be adversely affected. The equipment that is being protected by the MiniPurge® may also suffer
because of poor air quality.
With reference to BS ISO 8573-1: 2010, Instrument Air is typically specified as:
Particle Class 1
Page 9 ML434 | v12l
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
In each cubic metre of compressed air, the particulate count should not exceed 20,000 particles in the 0.1
to 0.5 micron size range, 400 particles in the 0.5 to 1 micron size range and 10 particles in the 1 to 5 micron
size range.
Humidity or pressure dew point
The dew point, at line pressure, shall be at least 10 °C below the minimum local recorded ambient
temperature at the plant site. In no case, should the dew point at line pressure exceed +3 °C.
Oil Class 2
In each cubic metre of compressed air, not more than 0.1mg of oil is allowed. This is a total level for liquid
oil, oil aerosol and oil vapour.
When an inert gas is being used to supply the purge system, risk of asphyxiation exists. Refer to Application
Suitability section.
Before connection of the air supply to the purge system, the supply pipe work should be flushed through with
instrument quality air to remove any debris that may remain in the pipes. This must be carried out for at least
10 seconds for every meter of supply pipe.
Unless a supply shut-off valve has been fitted to the MiniPurge® system, an external shut-off valve with the
same, or larger, thread size as the Control Unit inlet fitting should be fitted by the installer to prevent any
restriction of purge flow.
The purge air from the MiniPurge® Control Unit should be piped within the pressurized enclosure to ensure
purging of potential dead air spots.
The purge system is fitted with an internal regulator factory set to 3 bar feeding the logic.
Pipe Work
If the MiniPurge® is not connected directly to the pressurized enclosure, pipe work and fittings used to
connect the Control Unit to the pressurized enclosure should be either metallic or appropriate to the
environment into which the system is installed. No valve may be fitted in any signal pipe connecting the
Control Unit to the pressurized enclosure. This pipe work must be fitted in accordance with local codes of
practice where relevant.
Multiple Enclosures
This system is suitable for the purge and pressurization of the primary pressurized enclosure and its
associated terminal boxes.
Provision and Installation of Alarm Devices

When the pressure inside the pressurized enclosure is above the minimum, the Minimum Pressure Sensor
returns a positive (pressurized) signal causing the alarm indicator on the control unit to change from red to
green.
When the pressure falls below the minimum permissible the positive (pressurized) signal is removed. This
absence of signal indicates a low pressure alarm condition and causes the alarm indicator on the control
unit to go from green to red.
There are volt free (dry) contacts available within the terminal box for remote usage.
The user must make use of this alarm facility in accordance with the local code of practice for Action on Pres-
sure or Flow Failure. Most codes include the following recommendations:
• Zone 1 Installations: Alarm and Automatic Trip of Power.
• Zone 2 Installations: Alarm Only on pressure or flow failure with power being removed manually.
ML434 | v12l Page 10
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Power Supplies and their Isolation

All power entering the pressurized enclosure should have a means of isolation. This requirement also
applies to any external power sources that are connected to the equipment such as volt-free (dry) contacts
within the pressurized enclosure. This is commonly achieved using the Power Interlock Switch.
Power Interlock Switch

This switch is a Double Pole Normally Open, double-break switch: it provides two independent contacts that
should be connected in series and used to isolate the power. This can be achieved using switchgear or other
suitable switching device. These contacts are terminated and accessible to the user in the Ex e terminal box.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the switch is only operated within appropriate technical limits.
The switch must be replaced after any short circuit that occurs within the main circuit; the switch is a piece
of encapsulated equipment and as such it is not possible to check the state of the contacts. Technical
modifications to the switch are not permitted.
Prior to commissioning, check that the Ex e terminal box is clean, the connections have been made properly,
the cables laid correctly and all screws in the terminals are secure.
In all cases the application and isolation of power must be controlled by the MiniPurge® system using the
power interlock signal.
No switches are permitted between the power switch and the MiniPurge® system other than an authorized
manual override circuit.
The safe use of this switch is the responsibility of the user, all electrical installations must conform to local
codes of practice.
Exception
Power to apparatus that is already suitable for use in hazardous locations need not be isolated by the
MiniPurge® system.
Section 7: Commissioning
Commissioning the System
Note: The steps 11 and 15 to 21 represent detailed commissioning tests
The following equipment is needed for this process:
• Continuity meter
• Gauge manometer (0 to 200 mbarg)
• Differential manometer
If, after commissioning, the system does not perform as expected, refer to the Fault Finding Section.
Follow the steps as outlined:
1. Check all connections and that the Relief Valve Unit is fitted correctly with an unobstructed path to the
purge exhaust.
2. Close the Purge Flow Restrictor Valve.
3. Fully open external supply shut-off valve where fitted.
4. Check that the internal logic pressure gauge reads 2.3 barg / 33 psi / 230 kPag.
5. Check that the pressure gauge on main air supply reads 5 barg / 73 psi / 500 kPag.
6. Check that the Pressure Relief Valve is correctly set by disconnecting the minimum pressure sensing
pipe at the bulkhead fitting on the input to the MiniPurge®. This will disable all of the pressure sensors.
Page 11 ML434 | v12l
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
• Using a 4 mm nylon tube, connect a manometer to the bulkhead fitting from which the minimum
pressure sensing pipe was removed.
• Open the Purge Flow Restrictor Valve very slowly, until the Pressure Relief Valve opens
• Check the opening pressure is within calibration limits.
• This test can be carried out several times to ensure repeatability and compliance.
Refer to the Maintenance of the System section if the Relief Valve needs recalibrating.
7. Close the Purge Flow Restrictor Valve.
8. Remove the manometer and reconnect the minimum pressure sensing pipe to the bulkhead fitting.
9. Remove red plug from the top of the Minimum Pressure Sensor and connect a gauge manometer.
10.Connect a differential manometer to the test points on the flow sensor.
11.To check sensor calibration
• The internal pressure in the pressurized enclosure must be below Relief Valve lift off pressure and
above the CLAPS pressure
• At this time the pressurized indicator should be green.
• gradually open Purge Flow Restrictor Valve until purging indicator turns yellow.
Note: For large volumes it may take a long time for the purge flow to start.
• very slowly close Purge Flow Restrictor Valve until the purging indicator turns back to black.
• Take a reading from pressure gauge.
12.To set the purge flow rate:
• Turn on the compressed air to the MiniPurge®.
• Gradually open the Purge Flow Restrictor Valve until the black / yellow indicator changes to yellow.
• The yellow indicator confirms the correct flow rate.
• The differential pressure should be greater than 6.4 mbarg.
• The relief valve is supplied with different orifice plates for the specified flow rate. This orifice plate is
held in position by two M3 screws and can easily be changed by removing the large cover plate from
over the outlet valve assembly and screws.
Warning: When opening the Purge Flow Restrictor Valve, ensure the over pressure within the pres-
surized enclosure does not exceed the pressure relief valve setting.
13.The purge timer will start as soon as the Purging Indicator turns yellow. Check that the time delay
between the indicator turning to yellow and returning to black is not less than the minimum time
required for complete purging of the pressurized enclosure. Times in excess of minimum are permitted.
14.After the purge has been completed, the Purge Valve will close and the air flow into the pressurized
enclosure will be controlled by the CLAPS Regulator. The initial setting may be too high or too low.
15.Gradually turn the CLAPS Regulator anti-clockwise to reduce enclosure pressure.
16.Reduce regulator until intermediate sensor causes contacts to open.
17.Check the manometer on the minimum pressure sensor.
18.Continue to reduce the CLAPS Regulator to test the minimum pressure sensor.
19.To check operation of Minimum Pressure Sensor, check readings on manometer as system will
automatically re-purge when it reaches minimum pressure.
20.While the system re-purges, return the CLAPS Regulator to the initial setting.
21.If minimum pressure is below the set point, refer to the Recalibration section
22.If the setting is too high, continual rising and falling of the enclosure pressure will be seen as the CLAPS
Regulator automatically shuts off and reinstates the flow. The CLAPS Regulator should be adjusted to
reduce the flow into the pressurized enclosure by turning the adjuster screw anti-clockwise.
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
23.If the initial setting is too low the CLAPS Regulator may not provide enough air flow causing a gradual
decline in enclosure pressure. To increase the flow into the pressurized enclosure, adjust the CLAPS
Regulator Relief Valve unit by turning the adjuster screw clockwise.
24.To test the CLAPS settings, create a leak in the system by removing a bolt or losening a gland plate in
order to create a 15mm hole. Remember to replace bolt or retighten gland plate after testing.
25.The setting of the CLAPS Sensor is factory calibrated to the normal working pressure expected in the
pressurized enclosure, typically 10 mbarg. The pressure in the pressurized enclosure should be
stabilized as close as possible to this figure. This can be checked by a manometer attached to the
minimum pressure sensor.
26.Remove the air supply to the system, remove all test equipment and replace all plugs.
Normal Operation
For normal operation of the system, after commissioning has been carried out it is possible to turn the air
supply valve on or off to start or stop the system. After this, the purge and pressurization sequence is
automatic.
Section 8: Maintenance of the System

General maintenance
The maintenance of the system outlined in this manual should be supplemented with any additional
requirements set out in appropriate local codes of practice.
The following checks should be carried out every 6 – 36 months dependent on environment
according to IEC / EN 60079-17
• Tests outlined in the Detailed Commissioning section.
• Ensure that the Relief Valve Unit is free from contamination prior to making any adjustment. To do this:
• Remove large cover plate using a 8 mm spanner (wrench).
• Check that the interior and all components are clean and free from contamination.
• Replace large cover plate.
• Check the condition of the air supply filter element. Clean or replace as necessary.
Additional maintenance checks
The following additional checks are recommended at least every 3 years:
Check that:
• Apparatus is suitable for use in the hazardous location.
• There are no unauthorised modifications.
• The air supply is uncontaminated.
• The interlocks and alarms function correctly.
• Approval labels are legible and undamaged.
• Adequate spares are carried.
• The action on pressure failure is correct.
Re-calibration of the Relief Valve Unit

Warning
Incorrect adjustment of the Relief Valve Unit can lead to significant over pressure and result in
damage to the enclosure.
If maximum pressure setting is reached, stop adjustment and reduce the pressure.
To perform the following adjustments, an 8 mm spanner (wrench) and a 2.5 mm hex key will be required.
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Ensure that the Relief Valve Unit is free from contamination prior to making any adjustment. To do this:
• Remove large cover plate using a 8 mm spanner (wrench).
• Check that the interior and all components are clean and free from contamination.
• Replace large cover plate
To adjust the lift off pressure of the Relief Valve:
• Attach test equipment as described in the Commissioning Section.
• Remove small cover plate.
• Whilst holding the central adjustment screw in position using the hex key, loosen the retaining nut.
• Adjust the hex key clockwise to increase, or anti-clockwise to reduce the lift off pressure.
• Before testing, retighten the locking nut whilst holding the adjustment screw in place.
• Carry out the commissioning tests to check the correct setting of the relief valve after adjustment.
• The adjustment is sensitive and it is recommended that a 1/4 turn (maximum) adjustments are applied
between tests.
Rem ov ing t hesm a ll cov er pl a tet oset

t heRL Vo penin g pressur e Orific e P la te
A llen Sc rew& Lock N UT
Re-calibration of the Pressure Sensors

The brass nozzle on the sensor is sealed into position using Loctite thread sealant. If the thread has seized
up, remove to a safe area and heat slightly to soften prior to making any adjustment. This prevents potential
damage to the brass of the nozzle.
• Disconnect pipe work from the sensor, including pipe located below the sensor.
• Remove sensor by unscrewing anti-clockwise.
• The nozzle is located under the sensor.
• The adjustment is sensitive, turn the nozzle in 1/8 of a turn steps.
• Turn clockwise to reduce the pressure setting and anti-clockwise to increase.
• Replace sensor, screwing clockwise.
• Reconnect all pipe work.
Section 9: Fault Finding

General Information
If you are having problems that cannot be corrected using one of the methods described, please call Expo
or your supplier for further assistance. If the system is less than 12 months old, parts under warranty should
be returned to Expo for investigation. A full report of the fault and the system serial number should
accompany the parts.
It is common for problems with the MiniPurge® system to be caused by contamination of the air supply with
oil, water or dirt. To prevent these problems, the air supply must contain a dust filter and a water filter. This
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
will ensure that the air is instrument quality and protect both the purge system and the equipment being
purged. This filtration system is not provided by Expo and must be sourced separately.
Contamination can enter the system from a number of sources. To prevent this, it is essential that the
procedures described in the Installation section are carried out prior to first use of the system. These
procedures should also be carried out following any disconnection and re-connection of the pipe work.
Failure to perform these procedures may cause damage to the system that will not be covered by the
warranty.
The system has been designed for ease of fault finding and many of the components fitted are plug-in or
chassis mounted. Check components by substitution only after establishing that such action is necessary.
Before carrying out the fault finding procedures, ensure that:
• Both the main air pressure to the system and for Motor Purge Systems, the regulated pressure to the
logic manifold are as specified on the settings sheet.
• Air pressure does not drop below the minimum supply pressure during purging; the majority of faults
reported are due to insufficient air supply during the purge cycle.
System purges correctly but trips and auto re-purges at the end of the purge time.
This is a result of the pressure within the pressurized enclosure being below the minimum pressure sensor
setting. The pressure can be checked using a manometer. The most common causes of this problem are
outlined below:
Fault Location Cause Solution

Pressurised Enclosure There is debris on the face of the • Remove debris and ensure RLV
Relief Valve disk held in place by disk is clean.
the magnet.
Enclosure leaking excessively. • Ensure all doors and covers are
closed and that all conduit and
cable glands are properly sealed.
• Seal any other leaks.
Pressure sensing tube damaged. • Replace tubing.
CLAPS Regulator The CLAPS Regulator setting is • Increase the setting of the CLAPS
too low. regulator to raise the pressure in
the pressurised enclosure after
purging.
• To do this, turn clockwise.
MiniPurge® Control Unit the Minimum Pressure Sensor The Minimum Pressure Sensor needs
setting has drifted above the re-calibrating.
CLAPS setting
• Refer to Re-calibration of Pressure
Sensors in the Maintenance
section
Relief Valve opens (continuously or intermittently)

Pressurised Enclosure Enclosure pressure is too high Adjust the CLAPS Regulator.
due to CLAPS Regulator being
open to far.
Relief Valve Unit Debris on the Relief Valve disk Remove Relief Valve cover and clean
allowing air to leak from the valve. the valve disk.
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
System enters purging but purge indication does not occur.

Air Supply Insufficient flow rate due to Static pressure of 5 barg must be
inadequate air supply pressure. maintained during purge
Often due to pressure drop in the • Check air supply pressure at the
supply pipe. inlet to the control unit.
• Ensure that the supply pipe bore is
suitable for the flow rate
Pressurized Enclosure Excessive leakage from the • Check around the enclosure while
pressurized enclosure. purging is taking place.
• Total leakage at purge outlet valve
should not exceed 10% of purge
flow sensor setting.
• Check for leakage down cables
and conduit.
Pipe Work Tubing from Relief Valve flow • Ensure fitting nuts are tightened.
sensing point not air tight. • Check for tube damage.
• Repair as necessary.
Relief Valve Unit Relief Valve opening during purge • Check enclosure pressure on start
up is less than Relief Valve lift off
pressure.
MiniPurge Control Unit Flow sensor setting incorrect • Check the pressure is correct on
the flow sensor.
Section 10: Recommended Spares List

Part Number Description
KFL-AO1N-001 Filter Kit for S0015/275 filter / regulator
S0030/606 Purge flow sensor factory set to 6.4 mbarg
S0030/016 Minimum Pressure sensor, must be factory set to the value as stated on the
Customer Test and Inspection Sheet
S0030/478 Intermediate pressure sensor
S0030/588 CLAPS Sensor must be factory set to the value as stated on the Customer Test
and Inspection Sheet
S0015/018 Pressure gauge (Air Supply Pressure), 0 - 10 barg
S0015/135 Miniature gauge (Logic Pressure), 0-4 barg
Note. The system’s Pneumatic Timer may be replaced with the Expo Electronic Timer. Please contact Expo Technologies’
Sales Team for further details.
Section 11: Glossary

Acronym Definition
A&T Alarm and Trip
AO Alarm Only
CLAPS Closed Loop Automatic Pressurization System
CU Control Unit
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Acronym Definition
ET Electronic Timer
FCV Flow Control Valve
IS Intrinsically Safe
LC Leakage Compensation
PA Power and Alarm
RLV Relief Valve Unit
Section 12: Drawings and Diagrams

Title Drawing Number Number of Sheets
D758 Control Unit - Pneumatic Timer D758MOTORSYS-P 2
Typical D758 Hook Up D758-HU 1
D758-3 P and I Diagram D758-PI 1
D758 Circuit Diagram - Pneumatic Timer AGM-PA00-029 1
D758 Ex e Terminal Box Layout AGE-WC00154 1
Manual Override Switch Hook Up AGE-WC00-117 1
Size 5 MOTORPURGE RLV XBR-RTD0-009 1
MiniPurge® X LC Sequence Diagram XBR-7TD0-040 1
System Status Indication TP-518-058-wd 1
Section 13: Certifications

Download the certificates at www.expoworldwide.com/downloads.
Component Certificate Number
Purge System ATEX Certificate SIRA 01ATEX1295X
IECEx Certificate IECEx SIR07.0027X
INMETRO/TÜV Certificate TÜV 12.1462X
MIU/e Ex e Terminal Box ATEX Certificate ITS 10ATEX37092X
IECEx Certificate IECEx ITS 10.0003X
INMETRO/TÜV Certificate TÜV 12.1463
Electronic Switches Ex d limit switch IECEx EPS 14.0092X
Ex d limit switch EPS 14 ATEX 1766 X
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
7KHFRQWHQWVRIWKLVGUDZLQJGRFXPHQWDUH&RS\ULJKW([SR7HFKQRORJLHV/LPLWHG7KH\DUHWREHWUHDWHGDVFRQILGHQWLDODQGDUHUHWXUQDEOHXSRQUHTXHVW7KH\DUHQRW
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
UG$1*/(352-(&7,21 ',0(16,216,1PP '21276&$/( 72/(5$1&( 81/(6667$7('27+(5:,6(
WREHFRSLHGRUFRPPXQLFDWHGLQSDUWRULQZKROHZLWKRXWZULWWHQFRQVHQWIURP([SR7HFKQRORJLHV/LPLWHGQHLWKHUDUHWKH\WREHXVHGLQDQ\ZD\DJDLQVWRXULQWHUHVWV
Datum / Date
Name / Name

'3+,)5205(/,()9$/9(137
'3/2)5205(/,()9$/9(137

([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
23(1385*(287/(76,*1$/

725(/,()9$/9(137

ML434 | v12l

+HLGW
36'

Typ

,1',&$725
6<67(0385*,1*
%/$&.<(//2:
Product code
385*($,56833/<
,1',&$725 137)(0$/(
02725/2:35(6685(
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

$/$5035(6685,=(' (7,0(5'$7$/$%(/
5('*5((1
027256<67(0'$7$/$%(/

385*($,5287/(7 0,1,385*(,17(5)$&(81,7

($57+678'0;
137)(0$/( &(57,),&$7,21/$%(/

21([H-81&7,21%2;
([H-81&7,21%2;:,7+
)5217$&&(66&29(5$1'
Page 18
5(029$%/(/2:(5*/$1'
;+2/(6 )25 3/$7(
:$//02817,1*
.8*3/

02725(1&/2685(35(6685(
&211(&7,21137)(0$/(

),/7(5'5$,1

137)(0$/(
$1'*/$1'3/$7(
$3(5785( 6<67(0%5($7+(5'21272%6758&7
,1&/8',1**$6.(76
,1&/8',1**$6.(7
0$7(5,$/6
6<67(0+286,1* 67$,1/(6667((/

BB
([H-81&7,21%2; 67$,1/(6667((/

%8/.+($'),77,1*6 67$,1/(6667((/

127(6
0,1,385*(0867%(02817(',17+($77,78'(6+2:1 ($57+678'0;

:(,*+7$3352;.J
02'(/180%(512;/&66(7293$3&
(;323$57&2'('027256<63
5(9 02'180%(5 $33529(''$7( $33529(' '5$:1'$7( 6&$/( 5(9

0$7(5,$/66((127(6 ([SR7HFKQRORJLHV/LPLWHG 6855(<7:'%81,7('.,1*'20 '5$:,1*1R
'5$:,1*67$786 &RQWUROOHG
7,7/(
'5$:1 &+(&.(' $33529(' 1$
'&21752/81,731(80$7,&7,0(5 '027256<63

'5$:1 0/& -* $6 0/& -2%1R &86720(5 6+((71R 2)

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
7KHFRQWHQWVRIWKLVGUDZLQJGRFXPHQWDUH&RS\ULJKW([SR7HFKQRORJLHV/LPLWHG7KH\DUHWREHWUHDWHGDVFRQILGHQWLDODQGDUHUHWXUQDEOHXSRQUHTXHVW7KH\DUHQRW
UG$1*/(352-(&7,21 ',0(16,216,1PP '21276&$/( 72/(5$1&( 81/(6667$7('27+(5:,6(
WREHFRSLHGRUFRPPXQLFDWHGLQSDUWRULQZKROHZLWKRXWZULWWHQFRQVHQWIURP([SR7HFKQRORJLHV/LPLWHGQHLWKHUDUHWKH\WREHXVHGLQDQ\ZD\DJDLQVWRXULQWHUHVWV
Datum / Date
Name / Name
,7(012 3$57'(6&5,37,21
385*(28/(723(16,*1$/9$/9(
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
385*(&203/(7(%22679$/9(
6<67(0385*,1*6:,7&+9$6312([G,,237,21$/
7,0(55(6(592,56
&/$365(*8/$725

7,0(6(/(&7259$/9(6
+HLGW
36'
385*()/2:5(675,&725

385*(9$/9(
$/$5035(6685,=('6:,7&+9$6312([G,,

32:(5,17(5/2&.6:,7&+9$'312([G,,
Typ
/2*,&0$1,)2/'
385*()/2:6(1625
6&5$39,(::,7+'225),77('
726+2:,1',&$7256 385*(&203/(7(9$/9(
7,0(59$/9(
0,1,08035(6685(6(1625
Product code
,17(50(',$7(35(6685(6(1625
385*(287/(723(16,*1$/9$/9(
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

)/2:5(675,&725&/$366(1625

&/$366(1625
$,56833/<),/7(55(*8/$725

*$8*(0$,1$,56833/<
*$8*(/2*,&$,56833/<

5(*8/$725/2*,&$,56833/<

Page 19
,17(50(',$7(6:,7&+$&78$725
,17(50(',$7(6:,7&+9$6312([G,,
(/(&7521,&385*(7,0(5
.8*3/
,6%$77(5<3$&.
,1',&$725$/$5035(6685,=('
,1',&$7256<67(0385*,1*

0,1,385*('28%/(,1',&$725/$%(/
0,1,385*(&(57,),&$7,21/$%(/
6&5$39,(:2) 7(50,1$/5$,/
'225)520,16,'( 7(50,1$/6([&203/,$17
3$7(50,1$/%2;
)52179,(::,7+'22565(029('72
6+2:,17(51$//$<28762)&21752/81,7
$1'([H-81&7,21%2;
BB
'5$:1'$7( 6&$/( 5(9
ML434 | v12l
0$7(5,$/66((127(6 ([SR7HFKQRORJLHV/LPLWHG 6855(<7:'%81,7('.,1*'20 '5$:,1*1R
'5$:,1*67$786 &RQWUROOHG
7,7/(
'5$:1 &+(&.(' $33529(' 1$
'&21752/81,731(80$7,&7,0(5 '027256<63

-* 1: 0/& -2%1R &86720(5 6+((71R 2)

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
UNS P E CIFIE D N O D E C P LA C E ± 0 . 5
D I M E N S I O N S IN m m The contents of this drawing / docum ent are Copyright ¤ Expo Technologies Lim ited. They are to be treated as confidential and are returnable
3rd A N G L E T O LERANCES 1 D E C P LA C E ± 0 . 2
upon request. They are not to be copied or com m unicated in part or in whole without written consent from Expo Technologies Lim ited, neither
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
P R O JE C T IO N D O N O T SC ALE 2 D E C P L A C E ± 0 .1
are they to be used in any way against our interests.
F LA T N E S S T O B E LE S S T H A N 0. 4m m O V E R A N Y 10 0m m LE N G T H
ML434 | v12l

+HLGW
36'

R E LI E F V A LV E U N I T
Typ
M O T O R CO O LE R
Product code
PURGE OUTLET VALVE open signal Air outlet
Ensure outlet is not obstructed
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

Measuring point for flow of purge air
Page 20
M OTOR
Air inlet
MINIPURGE
.8*3/
B O O S T A IR
CONT ROL
UNIT Measuring point for minimum pressure
SYSTEM PURGING contacts

PURGE AIR DISTRIBUTION ALARM / PRESSURIZED contacts See drawing
AS REQUIRED INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE contacts A G M - P A 00 - 02 1
BB
POWER INTERLOCK contacts

IS S U E : M A T E R IA L S U R R E Y K T 7 0R H SC ALE

APP'D Expo Technologies Limited U N IT E D K IN G D O M
MO D. No:
T IT L E D R A W IN G N o .
CHK'D DAT E:
F IN IS H
APPROVED:
DR'WN JOB No: C U S T O ME R :
D R A W IN G S T A T U S : S H E ET N o. OF

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
UN S P E CIFIE D
N O D E C P LA C E ± 0 . 5
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP

M I N I P U R G E S Y S T E M E N C LO S U R E S Y S T E M P U R G IN G ( O P T I O N A L )
+HLGW
36'
A L A R M / P R E S S U R IZ E D

LO W
P RES SU R E P A L
A LA R M I N TE R M E DI ATE PRE S SUR E
PUR GI N G /
XI M O T O R IN T E R L O C K
PU RG E
Typ
C O M PLE T E
1/8" NP T D . P . H I F R O M R E LI E F V A L V E 1 /4 " [6 m m ] I.D.
XC 1/8" NP T D . P . L O F R O M R E LI E F V A L V E 1 /4 " [6 m m ] I.D.

M I N IP U R G E
C O N TR O L LO G I C
Product code
1/8" NP T O P E N P U R G E O U T L E T V A L V E C O N T R O L S IG N A L 1 /4 " [6 m m ] I.D.
1 /8 " N PT TE ST PO I N T
N O RM A LLY PLU GG E D
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

M O T O R E N C LO S U R E
1/8" 1/8" 1 /8 "
M AN UA LLY S E T N PT N PT N PT
PU RG E FLO W
C O N T RO L VA LVE R E LI E F
V A LV E
S U P P LY H
AS SE M BLY
PI
5 - 1 6 b a r g ( 7 3 - 2 3 0 p si )
I N S TRUM E N T
AI R /I N E R T G A S 1 " [ 2 5 m m ] I. D. M IN I M U M 1" N P T 1" N P T * 1 " [ 2 5 m m ] I.D . M IN I M U M
H
Page 21
A B
A U TO M A TI C
.8*3/
LE A KA G E
C O M P E N S A T IO N
V A LV E
B O O S T A I R C O N T R O L U N I T ( O P T I O N A L)
M A N U ALLY SE T * R E C O M M E N D E D M IN IM U M S IZ E FO R P U R G E A I R DI S T R IB U T IO N
PI PU RG E B OO S T FLO W PIPEW OR K
C O N TR O L VA LVE
H
1/ 2" N PT 1/ 2" N PT
C O N N E C T T O E IT H E R E L E C T R I C A L S I G N A L V I A E E x e J U N C T IO N B O X
A OR B
O PTI O N A L
BB
M A T E R IA L S U R R E Y K T 7 0R H SC ALE

IS S U E :
MO D. No:
CHK'D DAT E:
F IN IS H
APPROVED:
ML434 | v12l

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
UNSPECIFIED NO DEC PLACE ±0.5
DIMENSIONS IN mm The contents of this drawing / document are Copyright ã Expo Technologies Limited. They are to be treated as confidential and are returnable
3rd ANGLE TOLERANCES 1 DEC PLACE ±0.2
upon request. They are not to be copied or communicated in part or in whole without written consent from Expo Technologies Limited, neither
PROJECTION DO NOT SCALE 2 DEC PLACE ±0.1
FLATNESS TO BE LESS THAN 0.4mm OVER ANY 100mm LENGTH
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
ML434 | v12l
2 21 7
8

+HLGW
36'

5
Typ
2
Product code
19 28
29 6
23 22 26
18
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

4
Page 22
1
17
15
.8*3/
24
12 25
1
14
13
16 3
27
BB
ISSUE: MATERIAL SURREY KT7 0RH SCALE
APP'D Expo Technologies Limited UNITED KINGDOM
MOD. No:
TITLE DRAWING No.
CHK'D DATE:
FINISH
APPROVED:
DR'WN JOB No: CUSTOMER:
DRAWING STATUS: SHEET No. OF

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
U N S P E C I F IE D
N O D E C P LA C E ± 0 . 5
3rd A N G L E T O LERANCES
1 D E C P LA C E ± 0 . 2
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
S EE CI R CU I T D I A G R A M

+HLGW
36'
AL A RM / I N T ER M ED I A T E PO W E R
PR ES S U R I S E D PR E SS U R E I N T E RL OC K

CO N T A C T S CO N T A C T S CO N T A C T S
Typ
G REY
G REY
G REY
B LA C K
B RO W N
B LA C K
B RO W N
BLUE
B LA C K
B RO W N
TERMINAL LAYOUT
10 1 1 02 1 03 104 105 1 06 107 1 08 1 09 11 0
Product code
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.
S EE CI R CU I T D I A G R A M
A LA R M / I N T E RM E DI A T E POW ER S Y S T EM
P RE SS U RI S E D PR ES S U RE I N T ER LO C K PU RG I N G
C O N T A CT S CO N TA CTS CO N TA CTS C O N T A CT S
Page 23
.8*3/
T ER M I N A L L A Y OU T F OR
G REY
G REY
G REY
G REY
B LA C K
B RO W N
B LA C K
B RO W N
BLUE
B LA C K
B RO W N
B LA C K
B RO W N
SYSTEM FITTED WITH "SYSTEM
1 01 10 2 10 3 1 04 1 05 10 6 1 07 10 8 10 9 110 1 11 11 2 1 13
PURGING" CONTACTS
N OT ES
1 E X T R A T E R M IN A L S M A Y B E F I T T E D . T H E N U M B E R O F T E R M I N A L S M U S T N O T E X CE E D T H E
M A X I M U M S P EC I F I ED I N T H E T ER M I N A L B O X C E R T I F I CA T E - C O N S U L T E X P O T E CH N O L O G I ES .
2 A L L T E R M I N A L S M U S T B E E x e CE R T I F IE D K E M A 9 8 A T E X 1 6 8 3 U , I E C E x U L D 0 5 .0 0 0 8 U .
BB
3 D O U B LE LI N ES S H OW T HE PO S I T I O N O F T E R M I N A L E N D PLA T ES

4 M A X I M U M PER T ER MI N A L A T 5 5 ° C : 2 5 0 V 4 A ( A C - 1 5 )
M A T E R IA L S U R R E Y K T 7 0R H SC ALE

IS S U E :
MO D. No:
CHK'D DAT E:
F IN IS H
APPROVED:
ML434 | v12l

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
UNS P E CIFIE D N O D E C P LA C E ± 0 . 5
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
ML434 | v12l

+HLGW
36'

Typ
Product code
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.
Page 24
.8*3/
MANUAL OVERRIDE SWITCH SUPPLIED LOOSE.
GLAND PLATE IN PURGE SYSTEM IS UNDRILLED.
CABLE GLANDS ARE NOT SUPPLIED.
BB
* TERMINAL NUMBER ACCORDING TO MOTOR SYSTEM

IS S U E : M A T E R IA L S U R R E Y K T 7 0R H SC ALE

MO D. No:
CHK'D DAT E:
F IN IS H
APPROVED:

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
3rd ANGLE DIMENSIONS IN mm The contents of this drawing / document are Copyright © Expo Technologies Limited. They are to be treated as confidential
TOLERANCES 1 DEC PLACE ±0.2
PROJECTION and are returnable upon request. They are not to be copied or communicated in part or in whole without written consent
DO NOT SCALE 2 DEC PLACE ±0.1 from Expo Technologies Limited, neither are they to be used in any way against our interests.
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
MOTOR ENCLOSURE OVER PRESSURE

RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY 10-OFF
FIXING POINTS
TO SUIT M8 INSPECTION COVER

+HLGW
36'
OPEN PURGE OUTLET
VALVE SIGNAL

EXCHANGEABLE
ORIFICE PLATE
Typ
DIFFERENTIAL FLOW SIGNAL
LOW PRESSURE
280
256 CRS
120 CRS
Product code
60
30
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

43
240 CRS
MOTOR ENCLOSURE LARGE COVER PLATE FOR
88 TEST POINT (PLUGGED) CHANGING THE ORIFICE PLATE
306 CRS
330 12.0
DIFFERENTIAL FLOW SIGNAL
HIGH PRESSURE = 306 =
PURGE AIR OUTLET
Page 25
10.8
PURGE AIR OUTLET
SPARK ARRESTOR = 274 =
MUST NOT BE OBSTRUCTED
9.4
.8*3/
= 240 =
NOTES
1. RELIEF VALVE SUPPLIED WITH USER

SELECTABLE ORIFICE PLATES TO SET
THE FLOW RATE.
95
136
2. THE RELIEF VALVE MUST BE MOUNTED
IN THE ORIENTATION SHOWN.
8.9
4.7
10.1
= 225 =
= 120 =
3. WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 7 kg
= 256 =
4. PART CODE: ARV-1048-107
202 5. ON INSTALLATION ENSURE THAT FIXING

BOLTS ARE EVENLY TIGHTENED TO A
TORQUE OF 5 Nm (44 lbf/in)
BB
274
10 FIXING POINTS
TO SUIT M8

MOUNTING DETAILS

REV. MOD NUMBER APPROVED DATE APPROVED DRAWN DATE: 11/02/2009 MATERIAL SURREY KT7 0RH SCALE REV:
STAINLESS STEEL 316L Expo Technologies LimitedUNITED KINGDOM 1:5 03
01 DRAWN 20/02/2009 JPdB DRAWING STATUS: Controlled 1.6mm THK TITLE DRAWING No.
02 4666 17/04/2009 JPdB APP'D CHK'D DR'WN FINISH SIZE 5 MOTORPURGE RLV
XBR-RTD0-009
ML434 | v12l
NROB
03 4793 16/10/2009 JPdB JPdB NRB NAH JOB No: CUSTOMER:
SHEET No. 1 OF 1

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
TOLERANCES 1 DEC PLACE ±0.2
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
PROJECTION and are returnable upon request. They are not to be copied or communicated in part or in whole without written consent
DO NOT SCALE 2 DEC PLACE ±0.1 from Expo Technologies Limited, neither are they to be used in any way against our interests.
ML434 | v12l
Pressurized Enclosure door closed PRESSURIZED INDICATOR
Red = Pressure Low

+HLGW
36'
Turn Pressurizing air or inert gas on "Pressurized" signal absent i.e. "Alarm" ON

Pressurizing air or inert gas turned off Enclosure door opened, or excessive leakage
Air enters the PE
Enclosure pressure falls below the minimum

No
Typ
Is the PE pressure above the minimum?
Minimum Pressure sensor turns off PRESSURIZED INDICATOR
Yes Action taken on pressure failure Red = Pressure Low
depends upon the user. Actions
Minimum Pressure sensor turns on PRESSURIZED INDICATOR include:- Alarm and/or Trip
Green = Pressure OK Alarm and delayed trip Power turned off automatically without delay "Pressurized" signal absent i.e. "Alarm" ON
Product code
Relief Valve opens Purge flow starts "Pressurized" signal to remote alarm switch
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

No
Purge Outlet flow above the minimum?
Yes
Purge timer resets Purge Flow Sensor turns on
"Purging" Indicator
Yellow = Purge flow OK
Black = Purge flow too low
Page 26
Purge timer starts automatically
No
.8*3/
Outlet flow still above the minimum?
Yes Key to functions
Purge timer times out

Manual operation by the user
Purge valve closes; Power Sw. signal ON
"Purge Complete" signal to electrical Power Switch Automatic operation by the system
Purge flow ceases; Relief Valve closes
Purging Indicator turns Black as Optional operation (User decision)

Purge flow falls below minimum
Leakage Compensation starts
Power on - Normal operation
BB
THE RELEVANT EXPO CERTIFICATION DRAWING IS EP99-2-3
REV. MOD NUMBER APPROVED DATE APPROVED DRAWN DATE: 23/06/2010 MATERIAL SURREY KT7 0RH SCALE REV:
02

Expo Technologies Limited UNITED KINGDOM 1:1
DRAWING STATUS: Controlled
TITLE DRAWING No.
01 DRAWN 23/06/2010 JPdB APP'D CHK'D DR'WN FINISH MINIPURGE X LC SEQUENCE DIAGRAM
XBR-7TD0-040
02 5434 20/12/2011 JPdB JPdB PSC BRD JOB No: CUSTOMER:
SHEET No. 1 OF 1

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
TOLERANCES 1 DEC PLACE ±0.2 and are returnable upon request. They are not to be copied or communicated in part or in whole without written consent
PROJECTION DO NOT SCALE 2 DEC PLACE ±0.1 from Expo Technologies Limited, neither are they to be used in any way against our interests.
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
SYSTEM STATUS INDICATORS SYSTEM

PURIGING
OPTION

+HLGW
36'
DURING PURGE GREEN YELLOW
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
GREY
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
Typ
Product code
PURGE COMPLETE -
NORMAL OPERATION GREEN BLACK
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
GREY
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
Page 27
INTERMEDIATE
.8*3/
OR PRE-ALARM GREEN BLACK
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
BLUE
GREY
BLACK
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
MOTOR LOW PRESSURE RED BLACK

SHUTDOWN
BB
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN
GREY
BLUE
BLACK
BROWN
BLACK
GREY
BROWN

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113

DRAWN DATE: 19/03/2009 MATERIAL SURREY KT7 0RH SCALE REV:
Expo Technologies LimitedUNITED KINGDOM 1:1 05
DRAWING STATUS: Controlled
TITLE DRAWING No.
APP'D CHK'D DR'WN FINISH SYSTEM STATUS INDICATION
ML434 | v12l
TP-518-058-WD
JPdB PSC BRD JOB No: CUSTOMER:
SHEET No. 2 OF 2

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
ML434 | v12l
SCHEDULE
1 EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE
EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 01ATEX1295X
2 Equipment intended for use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC

Issue 9
3 Certificate Number: Sira 01ATEX1295X Issue: 9
+HLGW
36'
4 Equipment: Purge Controllers: Sub-MiniPurge, MiniPurge, Super-MiniPurge, 13 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT

Super-MiniPurge 1800/3500/7000/7000X
5 Applicant: EXPO Technologies Limited The Purge Controllers are pneumatically operated devices, which are intended to provide a given flow rate of
6 Address: Unit 2, The Summit, Hanworth Road, Sunbury on Thames, Surrey TW16 5DB UK purging gas for a predetermined time to unspecified Ex p protected electrical equipment. The MiniPurge
Control Units provide one of the following four methods of purge operation.
7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and
Typ
the documents therein referred to. LC-Leakage compensation only after initial high purge
CF-Continuous flow (same flow rate during and after purging)
8 Sira Certification Service, notified body number 0518 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EC of 23
CF2-Two flow CF system with initial high purge rate only at one orifice
March 1994, certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety
CFHP-Continuous (lower) flow after initial high purge
Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive. The MiniPurge control unit may be supplied within a heated enclosure to permit the use of the system within
Product code
The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section 14.2. an ambient temperature down to –50oC.
9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements, with the exception of those listed in the The MiniPurge option pD is for use in combustible dust
schedule to this certificate, has been assured by compliance with the following documents:
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

Relief Valve - The MiniPurge controller is supplied with an optional overpressure relief valve, which is to be
EN 60079-0:2012 EN 60079-2:2014 fitted to the Ex p protected apparatus to prevent an internal overpressure above the maximum overpressure
The above list of documents may detail standards that do not appear on the UKAS Scope of Accreditation, but have been added rating of the apparatus. There are 14 models of relief valve; the designation of each relief valve refers to its
through Sira’s flexible scope of accreditation, which is available on request. nominal bore in mm, as follows:
10 If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject to special RLV3, RLV6, RLV9, RLV12, RLV19, RLV25, RLV26, RLV52, RLV36, RLV75, RLV104, RLV125, RLV150 and
conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate. RLV200.
11 This EC type-examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified equipment. If
Page 28
The outlet of each relief valve is fitted with a spark arrestor, of which there are four optional types:
applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacture and supply of this equipment.
• Metal foam • Multi-layer stainless steel mesh
11 The marking of the equipment shall include the following:
• Tortuous path with at least 4 x 90°or 2 x 180° bends • Knitted mesh
.8*3/
Standard versions: Outlet Orifice - Three types of orifice are used:
II 2(2) GD II 2(2) GD II 2(3) GD • Threaded Orifices e.g. ¼″ NPT or 2″ BSP with a built in spark arrester. These are selected to maintain a
Ex [pxb] IIC T6 Gb Ex [pyb] IIC T6 Gb Ex [pzc] IIC T6 Gb desired back pressure within the Ex p protected apparatus when used with the Continuous Flow options.
Ex [pxb] IIIC T85°C Db Ex [pyb] IIIC T85°C Db Ex [pzc] IIIC T85°C Db The designation of each outlet orifice indicates the nominal inlet diameter. The designations are as
(Ta –20°C to +55°C) Ta –20°C to +55°C) (Ta –20°C to +55°C) follows: SA3, SA6, SA9, SA12, SA19, SA25, SA32, SA38 and SA50.
Standard/ET versions: Low temperature versions: Low temperature/ET versions • Plain holes in the Relief Valve disk, sized according to the flow rate required.
• Replaceable orifice type SAU**.
II 2(2) GD II 2(2) GD II 2(2) GD
High Pressure Sensor for CF Systems (HP code) - If the pressure in the pressurized enclosure
Ex [pxb] ia IIC T6 Gb Ex [pxb] d e m ia IIC T3 Gb Ex [pxb] d e m ia IIC T3 Gb
rises above the setting of the High Pressure sensor, the controller resets cutting the power to the
Ex [pxb] ia IIIC T95°C Db Ex [pxb] d e m ia IIC T4 Gb Ex [pxb] d e m ia IIC T4 Gb
enclosure. On detecting the overpressure an optional facility is available for the generation of an alarm
(Ta –20°C to +55°C) Ex [pxb] ia IIIC T200°C Db Ex [pxb] ia IIIC T200°C Db
or indicator. On systems with a High Pressure sensor, the relief valve may be omitted.
Ex [pxb] ia IIIC T135°C Db Ex [pxb] ia IIIC T135°C Db
(Ta –60°C to +55°C) (Ta –60°C to +55°C) High Pressure Sensor for LC Systems (HP code) - If the pressure in the pressurized enclosure
rises above the setting of the High Pressure sensor, the purge gas flow is isolated from the pressurised
BB
enclosure. The valve isolates both the leakage compensation and the purge streams. On detecting the

overpressure, an optional facility is available for the generation of an alarm or indicator. On systems
with a High Pressure sensor, the relief valve may be omitted.
Pneumatically Operated Outlet Valve - The pneumatically operated outlet valve is used to

Project Number 70012182 C Ellaby
positively open or close the outlet of the purged enclosure by means of a spring return pneumatic
Deputy Certification Manager
cylinder. Systems fitted with the Pneumatically Operated Outlet Valve will carry the option OV.
This certificate and its schedules may only be
reproduced in its entirety and without change.
Sira Certification Service This certificate and its schedules may only be Sira Certification Service
Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park, reproduced in its entirety and without change. Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park,
Hawarden, CH5 3US, United Kingdom Hawarden, CH5 3US, United Kingdom
Page 1 of 7
Form 9400 Issue 1 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900 Page 2 of 7 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301 Form 9400 Issue1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301
Email: ukinfo@csagroup.org Email: ukinfo@csagroup.org
Web: www.csagroupuk.org Web: www.csagroupuk.org

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
SCHEDULE SCHEDULE

Issue 9

Issue 9
+HLGW
36'
Variation 1 This variation introduced the following changes:
a Size or Capacity

1 Sub-MiniPurge i. The purge controller to be fitted inside an additional, heated, stainless steel enclosure that allows
2 MiniPurge Model Number: it to be used down to -50oC.
3 Super-MiniPurge 1 X LC cs DS SS AA MO FM OA TW
4 Super-MiniPurge 1800 Key: The heater (500 W maximum) is manufactured by Intertec-Hess GmbH and coded Ex d m IIC T3
5 Super-MiniPurge 3500
Typ
a b cc mm Example option codes (max) under PTB 02ATEX1041X. If the outer enclosure is reduced in size the power of the heater
6 Super-MiniPurge 7000 may be reduced in proportion to the reduction in surface area. Other alternative heaters may be
7 Super-MiniPurge xxxx
b Pressurization Type
used as a replacement if they are suitably certified, carry the same or greater ambient
X X Pressurization temperature range, occupy the same or smaller physical space, have the same certification code
Y Y Pressurization and have the same or more restrictive Temperature Class.
Z Z Pressurization
Product code
cc Action after initial purging The enclosure is made from 1.5mm or 2.5 mm thick stainless or mild steel painted and the lid is
LC Leakage Compensation only after initial High Purge made from 1.5 mm thick stainless steel, lined with 38 mm thick insulation, or other materials with
CF Continuous Flow (same flow rate during and after purging) equivalent insulating properties. The purge inlet, purge outlet and pressure sensing lines are
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

CF2 Two Flow CF system with initial High Purge rate but only one orifice similarly insulated. The door may optionally be hinged with quick release catches, these will be
CFHP Continuous (lower) Flow after initial High Purge fitted with a padlock. An enclosure breather tube is fitted to help prevent condensation. A plastic
DP Dust Protection (pressurization only) clear viewing window may optionally be fitted to the door.
mm Material of the Control Unit Enclosure
al Aluminium alloy RTDs are fitted to the air inlet pipe-work and inside the purge controller enclosure.
cs Mild steel, painted
ss Stainless steel An Ex e terminal box is provided within the main enclosure for connection of the heater leads. This
bp Back Plate only polyester box is manufactured by Bartec and coded Ex e II T6 under BAS 98ATEX3008X. Other
co Chassis only alternative ATEX terminal boxes may be used as a replacement if they are suitably certified, carry
Page 29
pm Panel mounting the same or greater ambient temperature range, occupy the same or smaller physical space, have
nm Non-Metallic the same certification code and have the same Temperature Class.
Option codes (Added only if used)
.8*3/
AA Active Alarm output fitted. Any suitably ATEX, Category 2 approved cable gland may be used, if it can be used with the
AC Alarm cancellation circuit. ambient temperature range.
AO "Alarm Only" Action on Pressure or Flow Failure.
AS Alarm "Action on Pressure or Flow failure", Selector valve. ii. A change of the Applicant’s name on the certificate and the substitution of the new name for the
CS Containment System Monitor. old name on the approved label affixed to the purge controllers:
DS Door switch Power Interlock fitted.
DT Delayed Trip after Pressure or Flow failure. Old Name: New name:
DXXX Special design for specific flow rates Expo Telektron Safety System Limited Expo Technologies Limited
ET Electronic Timer
FM Flow Meter(s) fitted.
Variation 2 This variation introduced the following change:
HP System LC or CF with High Pressure Sensor i. To permit the pressurisation of enclosures for the exclusion of combustible dusts in accordance
IS Internal Switches suitable for Ex i circuits.
Model Number Designation for ATEX approved MiniPurge systems

with IEC61241-4:2001 and modification of the marking to include one of the following:
MO Manual Override fitted.
MT Mechanical Timer. [Ex pD] II T200°C 21 (Ta = -20°C to +55°C) - (used with the low temperature versions)
OA On/Off switch controlling Protective gas and logic supply. [Ex pD] II T85°C 21 (Ta = -20°C to +55°C) - (used with the standard temperature versions)
OB On/Off switch controlling logic supply only.
OC On/Off switch controlling Protective gas supply only. The ATEX coding is modified to: II 2(2) G D
BB
OS Outlet (Orifice) Selector valve.
OV Outlet valve, pneumatically operated.

PA "Ex" switch(es) built-in, with/without "Ex" junction box.
PC PE Pressure Control Leakage Compensation Valve (CLAPS System.)
PO Pneumatic Output signals for Power and Alarm control.

SP Secondary Pressurization supply options.
SS Separate Supply for Protective gas and Logic air.
TW Twin (or more) outputs for two or more separate pressurized enclosures purged in paralle
LS Local Sensing for internal overpressure monitoring
This certificate and its schedules may only be Sira Certification Service
This certificate and its schedules may only be Sira Certification Service reproduced in its entirety and without change.
reproduced in its entirety and without change. Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park,
ML434 | v12l
Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park,
Hawarden, CH5 3US, United Kingdom
Page 4 of 7 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900
Page 3 of 7 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900 Form 9400 Issue1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301
Form 9400 Issue1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301 Email: ukinfo@csagroup.org
Email: ukinfo@csagroup.org Web: www.csagroupuk.org
Web: www.csagroupuk.org

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Datum / Date
Name / Name
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
SCHEDULE
ML434 | v12l
SCHEDULE
EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 01ATEX1295X EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 01ATEX1295X
Issue 9 Issue 9

+HLGW
36'
Variation 3 This variation introduced the following changes: 14 DESCRIPTIVE DOCUMENTS

i. Following appropriate re-assessment to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the 14.1 Drawings
EN 60079 series of standards, the documents originally listed in section 9, EN 50014:1997
(amendments A1 to A2) and EN 50016:1995 were replaced by EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-1:2004, Refer to Certificate Annexe.
EN 61241-0:2006 and EN 61241-1:2006, the markings in section 12 were updated accordingly. 14.2 Associated Sira Reports and Certificate History
Typ
ii. The removal of special conditions for safe use that were not specifically associated with the
equipment covered by this certificate. Issue Date Report no. Comment
0 3 July 2002 R53A7169A The release of prime certificate.
Variation 4 - This variation introduced the following change: 1 29 March 2004 R53V11342A The introduction of Variation 1.
i. To permit the inclusion of the following coding for the Low Temperature MiniPurge Enclosure: 2 30 September 2004 R51A11080A The introduction of Variation 2.
Ex [p] dem IIC T4 3 19 September 2006 R51A15629A The re-issue of Variation 2 to include the changes
Product code
Ex pD II 21 T135°C described in report number R51A15629A.
(Ta –50oC to +55oC) 4 7 June 2007 R51L15966B This Issue covers the following changes:
Variation 5 - This variation introduced the following changes: • All previously issued certification was rationalised
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

into a single certificate, Issue 4, Issues 0 to 3
i. The introduction of the /ET version, an alternative to the pneumatic or mechanical timer system,
referenced above are only intended to reflect the
this incorporates an Electronic Timer Module ETM-IS**-*** in the Mini Purge, the certification
history of the previous certification and have not
includes ‘ia’ marking when the ETM is fitted.
been issued as documents in this format.
ii. The dust marking was changed to be consistent with the marking for gases and vapours.
• The introduction of Variation 3.
iii. The introduction of a high pressure sensor for the LC option.
5 18 February 2009 R51L19695A The introduction of Variation 4.
Variation 6 - This variation introduced the following change: 6 22 December 2010 R23665A/00 This Issue covers the following changes:
Page 30
i. Following appropriate re-assessment to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the • This certificate history was modified to recognise
latest EN 60079 series of standards, the documents previously listed in section 9, EN 60079-0: that that Variation 2 was re-issued, subsequent
2006 and EN 60079-2: 2004 were replaced by those currently listed (EN 61241-0: 2006 was Variations have therefore been re-numbered.
.8*3/
removed as this is incorporated into the current version of 60079-0), the markings in section 12 • The introduction of Variation 5.
were updated accordingly and a new condition of certification was added. 7 07 December 2011 R25983A/00 The introduction of Variation 6.
8 05 October 2012 R29097A/00 The introduction of Variation 7.
Variation 7 - This variation introduced the following change:
9 10 July 2015 R70012182A The introduction of Variation 8.
i. The recognition of the Applicant’s address change from Summer Road, Thames Ditton, Surrey KT7
0RH to Unit 2, The Summit, Hanworth Road, Sunbury on Thames, Surrey TW16 5DB. 15 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (denoted by X after the certificate number)
Variation 8 - This variation introduced the following changes: 15.1 When using the AO, AS and DT options, the recommendations for the additional requirements of Ex p
apparatus contained within EN 60079-14 shall be applied.
i. The inlet air temperature sensing system was changed; as a consequence, a Special Condition For
Safe Use was amended. 15.2 The installer/user shall ensure that the MiniPurge Control Unit is installed in accordance with the equipment
ii. A Local Sensing (LS) option was introduce. certificate that covers the combination of the pressurised enclosure(s) and MiniPurge Control Unit.
iii. The RLV configuration was changed to show an optional alternative position of the flow sensing 15.3 The values of the safety parameters shall be set in accordance with the equipment certificate that
connection. covers the combination of the pressurised enclosure(s) and MiniPurge Control Unit.
iv. The recognition of minor drawing modifications; the addition of notes and the clarification of the
markings etc., these amendments are administrative that do not affect the aspects of the product 15.4 This MiniPurge Control Unit shall be incorporated into equipment and the appropriate Conformity
Assessment Procedures applied to the combination as defined by Directive 94/9/EC. This certificate
BB
that are relevant to explosion safety.
v. The minimum ambient temperature limit for the Low Temperature and Low Temperature/ET does not cover the combination.

versions was lowered from -50°C to -60°C. 15.5 The purge controller, low temperature version, shall be protected by a safety related system that
vi. Following appropriate assessment to demonstrate compliance with the latest technical knowledge, ensures that it cannot be energised if the temperature of the controller logic air or purge controller falls
Following appropriate assessment to demonstrate compliance with the latest technical knowledge, EN below -20°C. This system shall utilise the RTDs that are fitted to the purge controller to provide the

60079-0:2012, EN 60079-2:2007, IEC 61241-4:2001 Edition 1 and EN 61241-4:2006 were replaced appropriate level of system integrity, i.e. a level of operational safety of Cat 3 according to EN 954-1 for
by EN 60079-0:2012 and EN 60079-2:2014, the markings in section 12 were updated accordingly. ATEX Category 2 (Zone 1) applications; note that these RTDs have not been assessed as a safety
related device in accordance with EHSR 1.5 of Directive 94/9/EC.
This certificate and its schedules may only be Sira Certification Service This certificate and its schedules may only be Sira Certification Service
reproduced in its entirety and without change. Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park, reproduced in its entirety and without change. Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park,
Page 5 of 7 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900 Page 6 of 7 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900
Form 9400 Issue1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301 Form 9400 Issue1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Certificate Annexe
Datum / Date
Name / Name
Certificate Number: Sira 01ATEX1295X
Equipment: Purge Controllers
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Sub-MiniPurge, MiniPurge, Super-MiniPurge,

Applicant: EXPO Technologies Limited
SCHEDULE
EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 01ATEX1295X Issue 0 (The drawings associated with this issue were replaced by those listed in Issue 4)

Issue 9
Number Sheet Rev. Date Description
+HLGW
36'
16 ESSENTIAL HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS (EHSRs) SD7281 1 to 4 3 02 Jul 02 MiniPurge ATEX Certification Labelling

SD7282 1 to 2 2 21 May 01 MiniPurge ATEX Certification Type Numbering Scheme
The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been EP/99-2-17 1 of 1 1 21 Sep 00 MiniPurge, Continuous Flow with /HP Sensor –Schematic diagram
identified and individually assessed reports listed in Section 14.2.
EP99-7-7 1 of 1 1 21 Sep 00 RLV, outlet orifice
17 CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION EP99-7-9 1 of 1 1 21 Sep 00 Outlet Valve Control Circuit Diagram
Typ
17.1 The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Sira Certificates. Issue 1 (The drawings associated with this issue were replaced by those listed in Issue 4)
17.2 Holders of Type Examination Certificates are required to comply with the production control
SD7448 1 of 1 3 22 March 04 Low Temperature Housing - General Arrangement
requirements defined in Article 8 of directive 94/9/EC.
Issue 2 (The drawings associated with this issue were replaced by those listed in Issue 4)
Product code
17.3 The switches incorporated in the PA option shall be suitably certified for Category 2.
17.4 The following routine tests shall be performed by the manufacturer: Number Sheet Rev. Date Description
SD7281* 1 to 5 4 17 Dec 03 Certification label
Verification of Minimum Overpressure Cut Off
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

SD7449 1 of 1 1 18 Dec 03 Low temperature housing wiring certification drawing.
An overpressure loss shall be simulated whilst the MiniPurge Control Unit is cycling, it shall be verified * Modified by Sira 30 September 2004
that the controller provides the appropriate output and resets. Issue 3 (The drawings associated with this issue were replaced by those listed in Issue 4)
Verification of Purge Failure Protection Number Sheet Rev. Date Description
A purge failure shall be simulated whilst the MiniPurge Control Unit is cycling, it shall be verified that SD7281 1 to 5 5 30 Aug 06 Certification label
the controller provides the appropriate output and resets.
Issue 4
Page 31
Verification of Air Supply Failure Protection
An air supply failure shall be simulated whilst the MiniPurge Control Unit is cycling, it shall be verified EP99-3-1 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Minipurge Control Unit – General Assembly
.8*3/
that the controller provides the appropriate output and resets. EP99-2-1 1 of 1 03 09 Jul 07 Schematic - Type x Leakage Compensation
Verification of Purging Overpressure protection EP99-2-3 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Sequence Diagram - Type x Leakage Compensation
EP99-2-2 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic - Type x Continuous Flow
Where the HP is specified an overpressure shall be simulated whilst the MiniPurge Control Unit is EP99-2-7 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Separate Supply and Mechanical Timer
cycling, it shall be verified that the controller provides the appropriate output and resets. EP99-2-8 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Delay Before Trip and On/Off
17.5 The products covered by this certificate incorporate previously certified devices, it is therefore the EP99-2-9 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Twin Output and Manual Override
responsibility of the manufacturer to continually monitor the status of the certification associated with EP99-2-10 1 of 1 03 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Pressure Control Leakage Compensation
these devices, and the manufacturer shall inform Sira of any modifications of the devices that may EP99-2-11 1 of 1 03 15 Mar 07 Internal “IS” Switches
impinge upon the explosion safety design of the products. EP99-2-12 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Containment System and Secondary pressurisation
EP99-2-14 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Continuous Flow with 2 Flow Rates
17.6 The certification code that is appropriate to Purge Controllers low temperature version shall appear in
EP99-2-17 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Continuous Flow with High Pressure
the product marking applied to outer stainless steel enclosure.
EP99-2-16 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Outlet Valve Control
17.7 The Purge Controllers: Sub-MiniPurge, MiniPurge, Super-MiniPurge, Super-MiniPurge 1800/3500/7000/7000X SD7533 1 of 1 01 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Dust Protection
shall not be marked as suitable for use in explosive dust atmospheres when a non-metallic or painted SD7535 1 of 1 01 15 Mar 07 Spark Arrestor
housing is used.
BB
SD7536 1 of 1 01 18 Apr 07 Differential Flow Monitor
SD7538 1 of 1 01 27 Mar 07 Continuous Flow Outlet Orifice

SD7449 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Wiring Diagram – Low temperature
SD7500 1 of 1 01 25 Apr 07 Outlet Orifice Closing Device
SD7448 1 of 1 04 15 Mar 07 Low Temperature Housing

SD7281 1 to 2 06 20 Feb 07 Certification Label Details
SD7282 1 to 2 03 20 Feb 07 MiniPurge Data Sheet
This certificate and its schedules may only be Sira Certification Service reproduced in its entirety and without change.
ML434 | v12l
Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park, Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park,
Page 7 of 7 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900 Page 1 of 2 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900
Form 9400 Issue1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301 Form 9400 Issue 1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301

Seite / Page /
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.
Certificate Annexe
Datum / Date
Name / Name
Certificate Number: Sira 01ATEX1295X
Equipment: Purge Controllers
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Sub-MiniPurge, MiniPurge, Super-MiniPurge,

Applicant: EXPO Technologies Limited
ML434 | v12l
SD7537 1 to 3 01 20 Feb 07 Fault Evaluation

+HLGW
36'
EP99-7-9 1 of 2 02 15 Mar 07 Outlet Valve Circuit N/O
EP99-7-9 2 of 2 01 15 Mar 07 Outlet Control Valve N/C

SD7531 1 of 1 02 09 Jul 07 Schematic – Type Z or Y leakage compensation
SD7532 1 of 1 01 15 Mar 07 Schematic Type Z or Y Continuous Flow
EP99-2-4 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Sequence Diagram – Type X Continuous Flow
EP99-2-5 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Alarm only and Alarm Action Selector
Typ
EP99-2-6 1 of 1 02 15 Mar 07 Schematic – Door Switch Active Alarm and Alarm Cancel
SD7555 1 to 4 01 05 Jul 07 RLV Configurations
SD7556 1 of 2 01 09 Jul 07 Alternative Z&Y LC System
SD7556 2 of 2 01 09 Jul 07 Alternative Z&Y LC System
Product code
Issue 5
Number Sheets Rev. Date (Sira stamp) Description
SD7281 1 to 2 7 12 Feb 09 Minipurge ATEX/IECEx Certification Label
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

SD7448 1 of 1 05 12 Feb 09 Minipurge Low temperature Housing
Issue 6
SD7281 1 to 2 8 23 Dec 10 Minipurge ATEX/IECEx Certification Label
SD7282 1 to 2 4 21 Dec 10 MiniPurge Data Sheet
SD7913 1 of 1 2 21 Dec 10 MiniPurge electronic timer
Page 32
SD7914 1 of 1 2 21 Dec 10 MiniPurge HP sensor
Issue 7
.8*3/
SD7448 1 of 1 6 23 Nov 11 Minipurge Low Temperature Housing
SD7282 1&2 5 23 Nov 11 Minipurge Data Sheets
SD7281 1 to 3 9 23 Nov 11 Minipurge ATEX/IECEx Certification Label
SD7533 1 of 1 2 23 Nov 11 Minipurge Dust Protection Schematic
Issue 8
Number Sheets Rev. Date (Sira stamp) Title
SD7281 1 to 3 10 05 Oct 12 Minipurge Certification Label
Issue 9
Number Sheets Rev. Date (Sira stamp) Title
SD7448 1 to 3 10 22 Jun 15 Low Temperature Housing
SD7281 1 to 3 11 22 Jun 15 MiniPurge Certification Label
BB
SD7282 1 to 2 6 22 Jun 15 MiniPurge Data Sheets
SD8196 1 to 7 1 22 Jun 15 MiniPurge Manual Extracts

SD7449 1 of 1 8 22 Jun 15 Low Temperature Wiring
SD8158 1 of 1 2 22 Jun 15 Local Sensing Option

Unit 6, Hawarden Industrial Park,
Page 2 of 2 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670 900
Form 9400 Issue 1 Fax: +44 (0) 1244 539 301
Email: ukinfo@csagroup.org
Web: www.csagroupuk.org

Seite / Page /
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
MiniPurge Interface Unit MIU/e

User Instruction Manual
Manufacturer: Expo Technologies Ltd, Unit 2 The Summit, Sunbury on Thames. UK.
Model Type & Rating: MIU/e1 MIU/e2 MIU/e1/MO
400V / 7A 400V / 7A 400 V / 2A
Certificates:
IECEx ITS10.0003X ITS 10ATEX37092X TUV 12.1463
II 2 G D
Hazardous Area Marking
Ex e IIC T5 Gb Ex e IIC T5 Gb Ex e IIC T5 Gb
Code:
Ex tb IIIC T100°C Db IP66 Ex tb IIIC T100°C Db IP66 Ex tb IIIC T100ºC Db IP66
Tamb -20°C to +55°C Tamb -20°C to +55°C Tamb -20°C to +55°C
II 2 G D
Ex e IIC T4 Gb Ex e IIC T4 Gb Ex e IIC T4 Gb
Tamb -20ºC to +60ºC Tamb -20°C to +60°C Tamb -20°C to +60°C
APPLICATION SUITABILITY
The MiniPurge Interface Units – MIU/e are certified for use in Hazardous Areas where the Hazardous Area is non-mining
(i.e. above ground) and the hazard is caused by flammable gasses or vapours.
The systems may be used in ATEX/IECEx Gas Zones 1 & 2, Gas Groups IIA, IIB & IIC and in Dust Zones 21 & 22, Dust
Groups IIIA, IIIB & IIIC.
The following materials are used in the construction of MIU/e: Stainless Steel, Steel, Brass, Copper, Polyamide, Silicone.
If substances that will adversely affect any of these materials are present in the surrounding environment, please consult
Expo Technologies for further guidance. This equipment is designed for use under normal industrial conditions of ambient
temperature, humidity and vibration. Please consult Expo Technologies before installing this equipment in conditions that
may cause stresses beyond normal industrial conditions.
WARNING - Only install, commission, inspect, maintain or fault find when safe to do so.
INSTALLATION
The MIU/e shall be installed in accordance with relevant standards, such as EN 60079-14 and any local codes of practice
that are in force. Cable glands or other cable entry devices shall be appropriately certified and suitable for the cable and
the conditions of use and be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
The MIU/e shall be connected to the Purge and Pressurization system in accordance with the instructions given in the
handbook supplied with the pressurization system.
The external earth connection of the MIU/e shall be connected to earth using minimum 4mm2 conductor.
TERMINALS
MIU/e may be fitted with a combination of:
WDU2.5 terminals certified to KEMA 98ATEX1683U & IECEx ULD05.0008U
SAK2.5 terminals certified to KEMA 98ATEX1798U & IECEx KEM06.0014U
WPE2.5 Earth terminals certified to KEMA 98ATEX1683U & IECEx ULD05.0008U
For all type of terminals:

Tightening torque range: 0.4 to 0.8 Nm (WDU & WPE) & 0.4 to 0.6 Nm (SAK)
Conductor cross section maximum 2.5 mm2, minimum 1.5 mm2
Type of connection is screwed - Solid copper conductors to be used.
Stripping length shall be 10 mm.
Only one conductor is allowed at each side of a terminal. Multiple conductors shall be crimped together before screwed
into the terminal.
Maximum number of terminals:

For Model MIU/e1 – Up to 18 current carrying terminals
For Model MIU/e2 – Up to 33 current carrying terminals
For Model MIU/e1/MO – Up to 13 current carrying terminals
COMMISSIONING
The installation of the cable glands, electrical and earth connections shall be inspected for correct installation before the
unit is put into service. The lid shall be correctly fitted.
MAINTENANCE
The condition of enclosure and associated cable glands shall be inspected for damage every six months. The terminals
shall be inspected for tightness and gaskets inspected for damage.
FAULT FINDING
When wiring or signal fault occurs, check each terminated wire, terminals for tightness and gaskets for damage.
External faults such as broken switches within the Control Unit may also require investigation.
ML358 v7 Page 1 of 1 18-Feb-16
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Rev. / Rev.
Abt. / Dept.

Datum / Date
Name / Name
!"#$%
& '#()!*+,./,////:////
()!*+,/,////:////
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP

+HLGW
36'

!);
# #
!* <=
Typ
;&& ;>?
B
+,.,///:////@+,.A,///:////@
+,.,.///:////@+,.A,.///:////@ + .B
+,.,+///:////@+,.A,+///:////@
+,,////:////@+,.,////:////@ C@. C.B
Product code
+,+,////:////
C+ CDB
+,.,D///:////@+,.A,D///:////@
+,.,E///:////@+,.A,E///:////@
Dok.-Nr. / Doc. No.

+,.,A///:////@+,.A,A///:////@ @ DB
+,D,////:////@+,E,////:////@
+,A,////:////
<=
#$&F)$ &
<=
& @.##G@.##G
<=
#$#&&&? H,EI ! J+.I<!E=@
Page 47
H,EI ! JI<!.=
<=
K *;;?>
.8*3/
!)FFF#&&;;#$#&&@&&;@$*;
&!);&;F;)#&N?;)*&&>;;$*)#F&&()
));#;&#
BB
ML434 | v12l

Seite / Page /
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
With
EC-Declaration of European
Conformity Directives
Expo Technologies Ltd

Unit 2, The Summit, Hanworth Road
Sunbury on Thames TW16 5DB, UK
This is to declare that

Purge Controllers Type “MiniPurge”
are manufactured in conformity with the following
European Directives and standards:
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EG

MiniPurge Systems with a /PO suffix in the type number are non-electrical and are outside the scope
of the EMC Directive.
MiniPurge Systems with suffices /PA or /IS incorporate one or more volt-free (“dry”) contacts which
work in circuits specified by others. In normal operation these circuits are “benign” and no CE mark is
appropriate.
MiniPurge Systems with Electronic Timer (Option /ET) are designed to conform to the EMC Directive,
in compliance with EN 61000-6-4:2007 and EN 61000-6-2:2005 (Intertek Report EM10048000).
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC

MiniPurge Systems are intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (Hazardous Areas) and
are therefore excluded from the Low Voltage Directive.
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC

MiniPurge Systems are classified as not higher than category I under Article 9 of this Directive and
intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (Hazardous Areas) and are therefore excluded
from the Pressure Equipment Directive.
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC

MiniPurge Systems are designed to conform to the ATEX Directive, in compliance with:
EN 60079-0 : 2012 + A11:2013 EN 60079-2 : 2014
MiniPurge Systems are certified by SIRA Certification Service, Rake Lane, Eccleston, Chester CH4 9JN,
England, under EC Type-Examination Certificate SIRA 01ATEX1295X, in compliance with:
EN 60079-0 : 2012 EN 60079-2 : 2014
According to the model, MiniPurge Systems are rated and shall be marked as follows:
MiniPurge, X & Y models Group II Category 2G & 2D II 2(2) GD

MiniPurge, Z models Group II Category 3G & 3D II 2(3) GD
MiniPurge systems are manufactured under Production Quality Assurance Notification

SIRA 99 ATEX M043, issued by SIRA Certification Service, Notified Body No 0518.
John Paul de Beer Date 25/09/2015

Managing Director Confidential Assessment file reference SC004
S:\Files\QA\CERTS\C-OF-C\Minipurge CE SC004 Issue7.doc
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
([S6\VWHP
([S6\VWHP
Expo Technologies Ltd.

Unit 2 The Summit Tel: +44(0)20 8398 8011
Hanworth Road Fax: +44(0)20 8398 8014
Sunbury on Thames E-mail: sales@expoworldwide.com
TW16 5DB
UK
Expo Technologies Inc.

9140 Ravenna Road Unit #3 Tel: +1 (440) 247 5314
Twinsburg Fax: +1 (330) 487 0611
OH 44087 E-mail: sales.na@expoworldwide.com
USA
www.expoworldwide.com
Abt. / Dept. 36'

.8*3/
Ersatzteilliste für 2/5-jährigen Betrieb
Spare parts list for 2/5-years of operation
Position Anzahl Einheit Bezeichnung

Item Quantity Unit Designation
Satz Lagerschalen DE
1 1
Set Bearing shells DE
Satz Lagerschalen NDE

2 1
Set Bearing shells NDE
Stück Losschmierring
3 1
Piece loose oil ring
Stück Dichtschneide DE
4 1
Piece Seal wiper DE
Stück Dichtschneide NDE

5 1
Piece Seal wiper NDE
Satz Schwimmende Schneidendichtung DE

6 1
Set Floating seal wiper DE
Satz Schwimmende Schneidendichtung NDE

7 1
Set Floating seal wiper NDE
Satz Spaltdichtung Ex px
8 1
Set Gap seal Ex px
Satz Lager PT100

9 1
Set Bearing PT100
Satz Stabheizung
10 1
Set Tube heater
Satz Bolzen inkl. Stützer

11 1
Set Bolts incl. Supports
Satz Leckagewächter
12 1
Set Leakage monitor
Erforderliche Angaben bei Bestellung Typ, ATB Schorch Auftrags-Nr. und Bezeichnung
Requested data for ordering Product code, ATB Schorch ref. No. and Designation
Ohne diese Angaben ist eine Bearbeitung von Ersatzteilbestellungen nicht möglich.
Without these data we cannot handle orders for spare parts.
Kontaktinformationen für Ersatzteile, Reparaturen und Kundendienst finden Sie auf www.schorch.de
Contact details in regard to spare part, repair and field services can be found on
Abt. / Dept. E41

KU7840G-PL20 44063601

Binder1 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Binder1 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ATB SCHORCH GmbH

Current-torque / speed characteristic

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

Thermal withstand characteristic/ thermal limit curve

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

Partial load characteristic

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

Current-speed / -time characteristic

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

Current-speed / -time characteristic

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

Dynamic Air Gap Torques Calculation

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

Locked Rotor Time and Time Constant

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

Festbremszeit warm bei Unterspannung s

Festbremszeit kalt bei Unterspannung s

Thermische Erwärmungszeitkonstante (Maschine) bei Nenndrehzahl min

Thermische Erwärmungszeitkonstante (Wicklung) bei Nenndrehzahl min

Thermische Abkühlzeitkonstante (Stillstand) min

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

Drehstrom - Asynchronmotor mit Käfigläufer

Anzahl / Quantity :1 ITEM-No.:340-MK-01

Typ / Product code : KU7840G-PL20

Elektrische Daten / Electrical data Allgemeine Daten / General Data

Drehstrom - Asynchronmotor mit Käfigläufer

Typ / Product code : KU7840G-PL20

Lagerung NDE / Bearing NDE

Lagerwiderstandsthermometer 2x PT100, EEx i (3-Leiter), 2x auf AS und 2x auf GS

Widerstandsthermometer in der Wicklung 9x PT100, EEx i (3-Leiter)

Widerstandsthermometer Luft PT100 EEx i (3-Leiter), 2x Kaltluft und 1x Warmluft

Schwingungsaufnehmer 2x für Wellenschwingung, 1x AS und 1x GS

Spüllufteinrichtung Expo-Technologies, Typ D758

Leckagewächter Endress & Hauser, Liquiphant M FTL50, EEx d

Abt. / Dept. E41

Genehmigungsvermerk durch Kunden / Datum / Abteilung / Name /

genehmigt, wenn entsprechende Anmerkungen im Prüfablaufplan berücksichtigt werden /

1.2 Kalter Wicklungswiderstand EN 60034-1 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

1.3 Drehrichtungskontrolle EN 60034-1 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

1.4 Erwärmungsprüfung * EN 60034-29 Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

1.5 Warmer Wicklungswiderstand (Abkühlkurve) EN 60034-2 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

1.8 Wellenspannung im Leerlauf * EN 60034 / EN 60034 / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

2.2 Erwärmungsmessung bei Un, fn im Leerlauf EN 60034-29 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

2.3 Erwärmungsmessung bei Ured., fn im Leerlauf EN 60034-29 / Fertigungsauftrag / Prüffeld / Prüfzertifikat /

Luftgeräusche Magnetgeräusche Lagergeräusche Luftstrom

Abt. / Dept. PB Kundenkennung / Item no. / TAG-No.:

Bemessungsleistung (kW): 2300 Wicklungstemperatur (°C): 22

Bemessungsspannung (kV): 13,2 Raumtemperatur (°C): 22

Bemessungsstrom (A): 144,0 Blechpaket / Laminated core

Prüfspannung / Wicklung Prüfspannung / Pt100 (kV): 1,5

Stränge tan d ( ‰) 13,12 21,80 29,26 34,33 38,58

Strang tan d ( ‰) 11,84 19,20 25,33 29,69 33,57

Strang tan d ( ‰) 11,92 19,16 25,42 29,86 33,65

Strang tan d ( ‰) 11,71 19,08 25,20 29,77 33,68

Andere Stränge sind mit dem Blechpaket verbunden.

Abt. / Dept. P16 Kundenkennung / Item no.:

Bemessungsspannung (kV): 13,2 Wicklungstemperatur (°C): 21

Bemessungsleistung (kW): 2300 Raumtemperatur (°C): 21

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

S N:9<+]$PLQ1P cos ϕ = η=

$EW'HSW ( .XQGHQNHQQXQJ,WHPQR